JP6877082B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines that are provided with operating means (operation buttons) that can be operated by the player and that provide an operation effect according to the operation by the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-12231

However, in the gaming machine described above, the decline is operated willingness of Yu technique's, there was a concern to reduce the interest of the game.

An object to be solved by the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in the interest of a game, which has been made in view of the above circumstances.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, a special lottery means capable of executing a special lottery based on the acceptance of a game ball into a starting port provided in the game area and a special effect corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery are executed. The operation means includes a possible effect executing means and an operation means capable of receiving an operation input by a player, and the operation means has a movable body portion that can be operated, and a plurality of modes are obtained by operating the movable body portion. The mode of accepting the operation input can be changed, and the effect executing means receives the operation input within the valid period for accepting the operation input for the operation means based on the lottery result of the special lottery, thereby performing the special effect. It is possible to make it feasible and change the mode of accepting the operation input to the operating means at the time of executing the special effect from the normal mode to a special mode different from the normal mode, and the operating means is the special lottery. Based on the lottery result, after changing from the normal mode to a suggestion mode different from the normal mode and the special mode and suggesting that the operating means may change to the special mode, the special mode is used. It is possible to carry out the first pattern of changing to the normal mode and the second pattern of changing from the normal mode to the suggested mode and then changing to the normal mode, and the operating means can be changed to the special mode according to the first pattern. After the change to, the special mode is continued until the expiration of the valid period, and the effect executing means inputs an operation to the operating means in the first pattern based on the lottery result of the special lottery. When an operation input for the operation means is received during the acceptance mode of the above, and the operation input by the player is received within the validity period, the movable body portion is subjected to the special. It is characterized in that it can be changed to a mode different from the mode.

According to the present invention, it is possible to solve the above-mentioned problems and suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. is there. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the outer upper hinge member. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the upper hinge member on the main body side is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the action of the lock member in the outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feed unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (A) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame viewed from the front right, and (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the front left. (A) is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the lower left rear. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the back. FIG. 8 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged portion of a lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 28. (A) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guide portion, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guide portion different from (a). Yes, (c) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example provided with a further different ball guiding portion. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing a splittable lower plate, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is a figure, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower plate of (b) in a schematic perspective view. (A) is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which saw the effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 48 (a). FIG. 4B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 48 (b). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 48 (b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled each main member of an effect operation unit and looked at from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. In (a), a part of the operation button is cut out in the view of the effect operation unit viewed from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button, and the part to be hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, or the like is shown. It is explanatory drawing which shows, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. .. (A) is a front view of the second effect operation unit having a different embodiment from the effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 63, and (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. 64 (a). FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line HH in FIG. 64 (b). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line I-I in FIG. 64 (b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is an exploded perspective view of the 2nd effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the 2nd effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the back. is there. It is a perspective view which looked at the 2nd base unit of the 2nd production operation unit from the front. (A) is an explanatory view of the second production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and (b) shows the sub screen of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends in the state which turned forward. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK in FIG. 74 (b). (A) attempts to hide the second production operation unit by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the view seen from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button with the main screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is present, (b) is the explanatory view which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd effect operation unit in the state of (a). Is. (A) attempts to hide the second production operation unit by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the view seen from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button with the sub screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is present, (b) is the explanatory view which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd effect operation unit in the state of (a). Is. (A) is a front view of the third effect operation unit having a different embodiment from the effect operation unit and the second effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 77, and (b) is a right side view of the third effect operation unit. is there. It is a rear view of the third production operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 3rd effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 78 (a). It is sectional drawing taken along the line MM in FIG. 78 (b). It is an exploded perspective view of the 3rd effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the 3rd effect operation unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the 3rd base unit of the 3rd production operation unit from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the decorative rotating body unit of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the decorative rotating body unit of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a front view of the third effect operation unit showing the second decorative surface portion of the decorative rotating body unit facing forward, and (b) is the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends in (a). It is an explanatory diagram seen from. (A) is an explanatory view showing the rotation of the first decorative surface portion in the third effect operation unit with the first decorative surface portion facing forward, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the rotation of the first decorative surface portion in the third effect operation unit with the second decorative surface portion forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the rotation of the 2nd decorative surface part in the state which is directed to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the movable effect which rotates the decorative rotating body unit in the 3rd effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the movable effect which rotates the decorative rotating body unit in the state which the 1st decorative surface part and the 2nd decorative surface part are rotated in the 3rd effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the air flow by the rotation of the 2nd decorative surface part in the 3rd effect operation unit. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 93 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 97 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 97 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ in FIG. 97 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. Is. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the back. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line RR in FIG. 102. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the ball guidance unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball guidance unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the ball guidance unit. (A) is a perspective view of the payout device of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout device as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout device and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout device and looked at from the back. (A) is a front view of the payout device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line SS in (a). (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is closed by the ball pulling movable piece in the payout device, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is opened by the ball pulling movable piece. (A) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the lower full-filled ball path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the lower full-filled ball path unit as viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank path unit, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of the game board in which the panel plate of a game panel is in an opaque state. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board in the state of FIG. 129 from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board in the state of FIG. 129 from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is sectional drawing cut along the TT line in FIG. 129. It is sectional drawing which cut at the UU line in FIG. 129. It is a front view which cut the front unit in the game board at the substantially center of the game area in the front-rear direction. It is a front view of the game board which made the panel board of a game panel transparent. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the starting port unit, the side unit, the side slope, and the attacker unit in the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which showed from the front by cutting the attacker unit in the front unit at the substantially center of the game area in the front-rear direction. (A) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit of a game board from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main component and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main component and looked at afterwards. (A) is a front view of the back front decoration unit in the back unit, and (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view cut along the VV line in (a) and enlarged. (A) is a perspective view of the back-up movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-up movable effect unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the movable production knit on the back side, which is mainly disassembled for each constituent unit and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-up movable production unit disassembled for each of the main constituent units and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the back-up first decorative body unit in the back-up movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-up first decorative body unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the first decorative body unit on the back and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the first decorative body unit on the back and looked at from the back. (A) is an explanatory view showing the drive system when the back upper first decorative unit is in the closed position from the front, and (b) is the drive system when the back upper first decorative unit is in the open position from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows. (A) is a perspective view of the back-up second decorative body unit in the back-up movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-up second decorative body unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the second decorative body unit on the back side viewed from the front by disassembling it. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the second decorative body unit on the back and looked at from the back. (A) is an explanatory view showing the drive system when the back upper second decorative unit is in the closed position from the front, and (b) is the drive system when the back upper second decorative unit is in the open position from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows. (A) is a perspective view of the back-up third decorative body unit in the back-up movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-up third decorative body unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the third decorative body unit on the back side viewed from the front by disassembling it. It is an exploded perspective view of the third decorative body unit on the back side as viewed from behind by disassembling it. (A) is an explanatory view showing the drive system when the back upper third decorative unit is in the closed position from the front, and (b) is the drive system when the back upper third decorative unit is in the open position from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows. (A) is a perspective view of the back-up rotation base unit in the back-up movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-up rotation base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-up rotation base unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-up rotation base unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the gear composition in the back-up rotation base unit from the front. (A) is an explanatory view showing the state of the action lever in the back-up rotation base unit from the front, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the state of the action lever in the non-action position from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the back-up elevating unit in the back-up movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-up elevating unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up elevating unit disassembled into a movable side unit and a fixed side unit and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up elevating unit disassembled into a movable side unit and a fixed side unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the movable side unit of the back-up elevating unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the movable side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the fixed side unit of the back-up elevating unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the fixed side unit of the back-up elevating unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is an explanatory view showing the drive system when the movable side unit of the back-up elevating unit is in the ascending position from the front, and (b) is the drive system when the movable side unit of the back-up elevating unit is in the descending position. It is explanatory drawing which shows from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system for ascending / descending when the movable side unit of the back-up elevating unit is the raising position in the back-up movable production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system for ascending / descending when the movable side unit of the back-up elevating unit is the descending position in the back-up movable production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the action lever in the back-up movable production unit when the movable side unit is a descending position, and the back-up rotation base unit is a horizontal position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the action lever in the non-action position when the movable side unit is a descending position, and the back-up rotation base unit is a horizontal position in the back-up movable production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of the back-up rotation base unit when the movable side unit is a descending position, and the back-up rotation base unit is a horizontal position in the back-up movable production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of the back-up rotation base unit when the movable side unit is a descending position, and the back-up rotation base unit is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from a horizontal position in the back-up movable production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of the back-up rotation base unit when the movable side unit is a descending position, and the back-up rotation base unit is a vertical position in the back-up movable production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the action lever in the non-action position when the movable side unit is a descending position, and the back-up rotation base unit is a vertical position in the back-up movable production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which regulates the rotation by the action lever in the back-up movable production unit when the movable side unit is a descending position, and the back-up rotation base unit is a vertical position. In the back-up movable production unit, when the movable side unit is in the descending position and the back-up rotation base unit is in the vertical position, the action lever is in the action position, and the back-up first decorative unit, the back-up second decorative unit, and the back-up first It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which acts on a three ornamental body unit. (A) is a front view of the back lower movable effect unit of the back unit, (b) is a rear view of the back lower movable effect unit, and (c) is a back lower movable decorative unit in the back lower movable effect unit. It is a rear view which shows in the raised state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the back middle left decorative body and the back middle right decorative body of the back middle movable effect unit in the back unit are moved to the appearance position on the center side. After moving the back left movable effect unit and the back right decorative body of the back right movable effect unit to the appearance position closer to the center, the first decorative surface of each is facing forward. It is a front view of the game board shown. It is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body of the left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit are rotated from the state of FIG. .. It is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body of the left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit are rotated from the state of FIG. .. In the back unit, the back upper movable effect unit, the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable of the back upper second decorative unit. After the decorative lens and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back upper third decorative body unit are in the closed positions, the back upper first decorative body unit and the back upper second decorative body are placed in the closed positions, respectively. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which moved to the descending position with the back-up rotation base unit in the horizontal position so that the body unit and the back-up third decorative body unit are arranged horizontally. From the state shown in FIG. 189, the back-up rotation base unit is rotated 45 degrees in the front-view clockwise direction, and the back-up first decorative unit, the back-up second decorative unit, and the back-up third decorative unit are obliquely rotated. It is a front view of the game board shown in a side-by-side state. From the state shown in FIG. 190, the back-up rotation base unit is further rotated 45 degrees in the front-view clockwise direction to be in a vertical position, and the back-up first decorative unit, the back-up second decorative unit, and the back-up third It is a front view of the game board which shows the decorative body unit in a state that it is arranged vertically. From the state of FIG. 177, the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative unit, and With the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the third decorative body unit on the back in the open position, respectively, the first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens are set. It is a front view of the game board which shows in the state which made it visible. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which moved the back lower movable decorative body unit of the back lower movable effect unit in the back unit to the first ascending position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the lower back movable decorative body unit is further raised from the state of FIG. 193 and moved to the second ascending position. As another embodiment of the game board, an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the back upper movable production unit of the back unit is provided with an LED for illuminating and decorating the stage of the center accessory and the back front lower center lens of the back front decoration unit. Is. In the back-up movable production unit in the back unit of the game board, the back-up rotation base unit is set to the vertical position, and the first left movable decorative lens, the first right movable decorative lens, and the back of the back-up first decorative body unit are set. The second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the upper second decorative body unit, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the upper upper third decorative body unit are in the open positions, respectively. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which shows the 1st fixed decorative lens, the 2nd fixed decorative lens, and the 3rd fixed decorative lens in a viewable state. A third effect operation unit 400B is attached to the plate unit 320 in place of the effect operation unit 400 so that the first decorative surface portion of the decorative rotating body unit faces forward, and the pachinko machine showing the game board in a normal state. It is a front view. In FIG. 197, with the second decorative surface portion of the decorative rotating body unit facing forward, the back-up rotating base unit is set to the vertical position in the back-up movable effect unit in the back unit of the game board. , The first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative body unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative unit, and the back upper third With the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the decorative body unit in the open positions, the first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens can be visually recognized. It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown in the state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special figure look-ahead effect control processing in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the look-ahead effect including the button movable body effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the button effect setting process in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the button operation effect processing in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the button movable body effect by the operation input of a player. It is a figure explaining the effect of the button movable body during change, and the mode change of the button movable body.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back by disassembling into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and can be visually recognized from the player side through the door frame 3. It is provided with a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, which are connected to each other at both ends of the 20 and extend vertically, are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in the front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 having a front-view outer shape extending vertically and penetrating back and forth, and a through-hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by the player to drive the game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 320, which is attached to the lower part of the front surface below the door, and the player, which is attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and is attached to the center of the dish unit 320, according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a. A production operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory effect, and a door frame left side unit 540 attached to the front left portion on the upper side of the plate unit 320 and on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100. And, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, the door frame left side unit 540, and the door frame right side unit 550. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4. And the locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the reverse side that is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out the game ball to the player side. The L-shaped payout unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. It includes a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the upper part of the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from island equipment that is not shown in a box shape, and a game ball that is attached to the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802 and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are viewed to the left in the front view. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a serpentine manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game balls that are detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and are guided by the ball guide unit 820 are paid out one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. The payout device 830 and the game ball attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 are guided downward, and the game ball is stored according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320. It was discharged from the upper full tank path unit 850 to be discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. The normal taxiway 861 that guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e are guided forward and the door frame 3 is full from the front end. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 860 having a full tank taxiway 862 for guiding to the tank ball receiving port 274.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the speaker for bass inside. The speaker unit 920 having 921, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodating the power supply board inside, and the power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and inside. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game balls are housed therein. The payout control board box 950 and the like are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer circumference of the game area 5a into which the game ball is hit, and the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 is placed on the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 to guide the player, and a flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a. There is.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 with the game ball stored in the upper plate 321, the ball launching device 680 causes the game ball to have a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning opening. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front by disassembling the outer frame. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. It is a figure. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending to the left frame member 30 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are flush with each other. Has been done.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the front left end side of the upper frame member 10, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and the like. The curtain plate member 50 includes an upper portion on the left end side of the front view and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be opened and closed by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, a flat plate-shaped left sliding member 81 attached to a position on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 to the left from the center of the left and right, and a curtain. A flat plate-shaped right-sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50 is provided. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. It includes a connecting member 85 that is connected. Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the inside (left side surface side) of the right frame member 40, and the upper hook hook member 90 and the lower hook hook member 91 to which the hook 703 for the outer frame of the locking unit 700, which will be described later, is locked. , Prepared.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engaging notch 11 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. The upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch 11. Further, the upper frame member 10 is provided with mounting steps 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in the front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed so that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths of the upper frame member 10 are the same. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 is provided with an engaging notch 21 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch 21.

Further, the lower frame member 20 includes front end notches 22 recessed from the front surfaces of both left and right ends to the rear. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch portion 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same dimensions as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. In the state where the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded metal material such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in a shape symmetrical to each other in a plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from a position rearward to the center in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the rear end on the outer side surface in the left-right direction. It is provided with recesses 31 and 41 and protrusions 32 and 42 that bulge from the opposite side surfaces of the recesses 31 and 41 and have a hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are increased by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the protruding portions 32 and 42, the lower left lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B described later of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface thereof. With these plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a worker and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. It is possible to enhance the design of the appearance of the machine 1.

[2-4. Curtain board member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side open. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extending portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51 so that a game ball can pass through. A standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extending portion 51 in a flat plate shape, and a standing wall portion 54 protruding forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. It is provided with a return portion 55, which is inclined toward the rear toward the rear.

The curtain plate member 50 is a lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side so that the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side is placed on the upper surface of the front side of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined so that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on a portion on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface and a right mounting portion for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. A unit 57 and a unit 57 are provided. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a grid pattern to increase the strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated inside.

[2-5. Upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped upper fixing portion 61 having a quadrangular outer shape and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. A plan view of the front extension portion 62, the bearing groove 63 extending vertically from the right end of the front extension portion 62 to the left and right center of the front extension portion 62 and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing portion 61. A flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from the end side extending from the left end to the front end of the front extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened. A flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 16B and the like).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by screws (not shown). There is. Further, the front extending portion 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by screws in a state of being inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63 to form the main body frame 4. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 has a strip-shaped lock body 66a whose left and right sides extend back and forth with a predetermined width, and an operation unit protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending diagonally to the left front after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock main body 66a, and a mounting hole penetrating up and down near the rear end of the lock main body 66a. It is equipped with 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by the attachment screw 67.

The lock member 66 is mounted at a position where the rear end of the lock body 66a is rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the mounting hole 66d. Further, in a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 of 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

Further, the tip of the elastic portion 66c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space in the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a is formed so as to accommodate the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, which will be described later, of the hinge member 620 on the main body frame side.

By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. Then, by operating the operation unit 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 that is rearward from the center in the front-rear direction. Only one game ball can pass through the rising flat rising portion 72, the hinge pin 73 under the outer frame protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and the horizontal portion 71 up and down. It is provided with a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extending portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by a screw (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. As a result, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed. Since the space between the two and the cloaca gradually narrows, the vehicle rolls to the rear side where the interval is wide, and the cloaca can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, since the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C that connects 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper-horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. The upper horizontal fixing portion 87 in 86 includes a flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the extending portion. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the end portion of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is a screw inserted into the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. Is fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. The lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed in a state of being in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper and horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction, respectively. To.

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. 17 and 18 are shown with respect to the locking mechanism of the main body frame 4 with respect to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. It will be explained with reference to. FIG. 17 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state in which the upper hinge member on the main body side is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member on the outer frame.

When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a does not block a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a dogleg shape, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not block the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space is formed in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 into which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

In the support mechanism of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66a is in close contact with the right side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal shaft support state, the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are obliquely opposed to each other. It is in a state.

In this normal shaft support state, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame that pivotally supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, so that the hinge pin on the main body frame is in contact with the front end portion. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. There is. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape and comes into contact with the arcuate front end surface of the lock main body 66a, the acting force is applied. F is a component force F1 (in the normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. When divided into a component force F2 that acts on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the center of rotation of the lock member 66). The front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 does not rotate in the direction away from the hanging portion 65 on the right side, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is one of the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the side inner surface is maintained.

Therefore, even in a normal bearing state or in a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from falling off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts on the hanging portion 65 and further. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the forward extending portion 62.

Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the above-mentioned component force F1 or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extending portion 62. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extending portion 62.

When the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 supports the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the bearing groove 63 is placed in the bearing groove 63 from the open side on the main body frame. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted to open the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

Then, when the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the locking main body 66a is released by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is accommodated in the space on the front side of the lock main body 66a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can rotate in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It becomes a held (locked) state in the state.

When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from the bearing groove 63, the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
Prevention of ball biting to prevent the game ball from being pinched between the security mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be described.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion in the front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is to be inserted into the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the illegal tool comes into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the illegal tool from being further inserted to the rear side. , It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side.

Further, since the return portion 55 extending forward is provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 54, when an illegal tool in contact with the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the tip of the illegal tool is provided by the return portion 55. Can be further turned forward, so that it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 open with respect to the outer frame 2. When the game ball falls on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the vertical wall portion 54, so that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 and a left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass. And, since the right discharge hole 53 is provided, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be discharged. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is pinched between the two.

Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the circumference of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state and is not closed with the outer frame 2. A gap is created between the main body frame 4 and the gap, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line CC in FIG. It is a figure. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 is attached to a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in front view extends vertically, and to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 300, the plate unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the effect operation unit 400 installed in the center of the plate unit 320, and the door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. The door frame left side unit 540 attached to the front left side of the 100, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and the door frame left side. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but the plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 having a front-view outer shape extending vertically and penetrating back and forth in a rectangular shape (square). The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side in the front view are attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge rotatable. A door frame side upper hinge member 140, a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 to close the through hole 111, and a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190. Locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward so as to be openable and closable. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for opening and closing, the ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 to send the game ball to the ball launcher 680, and the ball launcher 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. It is provided with a foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has not reached the game area 5a and is discharged to the lower plate 322.

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but when the player rotates the rotatable handle 302, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 is adjusted according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strong strength.

Although the details of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the dish unit 320 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 below the through-hole 111, and the front surface bulges forward. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end at the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 has an upper plate 321 for storing game balls for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged under the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for pulling out the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the balance of cash and prepaid card put into the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to a player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card after deducting the amount of the game ball lent from the ball lending machine, and cash put into the ball lending machine. The ball lending display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 that can accept the player's operation when presenting the effect, and the lower plate 322. It is provided with a lower plate ball removal button 333 for discharging the game ball below the plate unit 320.

The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front portion of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player. It is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail later, but has a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that is visibly arranged in the operation button 410 from the player side and can display an effect image. It includes a display device 460.

The door frame left side unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and the through port 111 ( It decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 540 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) capable of emitting and decorating.

Although the details of the door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front right portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and the through port 111 ( It decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame right side unit 550 projects far forward from the door frame left side unit 540, and is provided with a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the left and right sides, and at the front end. The right unit decorative lens member 561 and the door are provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can illuminate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It decorates the upper part of the frame 3. The details of the door frame top unit 570 will be described later, but the pair of upper speakers 573 separated to the left and right, the top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center of the front surface, and the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 are It includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that are decorated. The door frame top unit 570 can illuminate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable / closable (hinge rotatable) so that the left side side of the front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 in which the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 540 in the left outer front surface of the through port 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through opening 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through opening 111, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a rectangular outer shape extending vertically and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth. , The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and the main body frame 4 which is attached to the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side of the front view and protrudes forward from the door frame base 110. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front surface of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decorative board 160, which is mounted on the left side of the door and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the glass unit 190, which is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, are detachably attached. A glass unit mounting member 170 for the door is provided.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the lower right corner of the front view on the front surface of the door frame base 110, and is attached to the tubular handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300 and the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 that closes the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an opening / closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward. It includes 210, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feed solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single-shot button operation sensor 312, and the like. Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental display unit 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , The upper speaker 573, and the like are provided with a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 penetrates in the front-rear direction, and includes a through-hole 111 formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the through-hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the through openings 111 penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 110 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through hole 111. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view, and penetrates back and forth between the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted and the cylinder mounting portion 113. The cylinder insertion hole 114 into which the cylinder lock 211 of the above is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 penetrate the front and rear on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feed opening 115 for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 110 is to the left of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, and faces the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. It penetrates back and forth between the lower plate passage port 116 and the door frame base 110 near the left end of the front view so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111, so that the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. The dish passage port 117, the glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and the left and right upper sides of the door frame base 110, which are recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the through port 111. It is provided with a speaker insertion port 119 that penetrates back and forth in the corner and through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left-right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a left-right extending middle reinforcement attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. The sheet metal 132, the vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side of the front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and the vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side of the front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. It includes a sheet metal 134 and a locking locking portion 135 that is attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and locks the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700.

In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 has a cutout portion 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage port 117 of the door frame base 110.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. The strength and rigidity are enhanced by the part, and the intrusion of an illegal tool such as a piano wire or a flat-blade screwdriver from the outside is prevented.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 having a pair of projecting pieces 141a attached to the door frame base 110 and separated vertically, and the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A pair of projecting pieces 141a in the columnar door frame upper hinge pin 142 and the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that penetrate the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. A disk-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between the door frame and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame while being interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. Is inserted, and is provided with a lock spring 144 that urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

Although not shown, the hinge shaft bracket 141 on the door frame has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and the shape of the side view is open to the front. It is formed in a character shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece connecting a pair of projecting pieces 141a to each other is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

In the door frame upper hinge pin 142, a portion (upper end) protruding upward from the upper protruding piece 141a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. Further, although not shown, the hinge pin 142 on the door frame has a portion protruding downward from the lower protruding piece 141a bent in the horizontal direction. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a to restrict the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

The collar member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted, and the upper end is in contact with the flange member 143 and the lower end is in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the collar member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward via the collar member 143. ..

The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of the piece 141a. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

The door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 when the operator holds the portion and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 has the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulled out downward. Can be done. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view can be inserted. , The hinge can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 4.

Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, the portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is the door frame of the door frame side lower hinge member 150, which will be described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. As a result, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in a good state.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is in the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-shaped extension piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) projecting downward from the vicinity of the front end portion of the extension piece 151a is provided.

The hinge shaft bracket 151 under the door frame has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of the horizontally extending flat plate-shaped extending piece 151a, and has an overall shape in a side view. Is formed in a substantially L shape. In the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151, a mounting piece (not shown) is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by screws.

The lower end of the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the lower end portion narrows toward the bottom. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

In the door frame side lower hinge member 150, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported by.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is a door extending vertically from a height below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side of the front view of the door frame base 110 to a height near the center in the vertical direction of the through hole 111. The lower decoration on the left side of the door frame extends vertically from the height of the lower side of the upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the frame and the upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame to approximately the same height as the lower end of the passage port 117 for the upper plate. The board 162 and the like are provided.

The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are each provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a capable of irradiating light forward on the front surface. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 540, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and has a plurality of (mounted) LEDs 161a and 162a provided on the front surface. The left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 540 can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting light.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 (b) and the like. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for mounting the glass unit 190 detachably. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 172 and a protrusion 172.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 at a portion outside the pair of speaker insertion ports 119 and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118, respectively.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is in a state in which the protruding portion 172 is rotated so as to protrude upward from the base portion 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the rear. In the positioned state, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding portion 172 becomes glass. The glass unit 190 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a state where it comes into contact with the rear side of the attachment piece 191a of the unit 190 and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted.

Since the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 protrudes from the disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located in the protruding portion 172. .. From this, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can rotate freely, the protruding portion 172 is stable in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. Then, in the glass unit mounting member 170, when the protruding portion 172 is in the rotational position protruding downward from the base portion 171, the protruding portion 172 restricts the backward movement of the glass unit 190, so that the glass unit is mounted. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the entire protrusion 172 does not rotate upward from the base 171 and the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally lifted. Absent.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 projects upward from the base 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is mounted on the glass unit 190 mounting piece 191a. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved to the rear, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 has a cylindrical tubular portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction and an outward direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 181 from the rear end of the tubular portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends, and a plurality of flange portions 182 that project into the tubular portion 181 and extend over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 181 and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181. In this example, it is provided with three) ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylinder portion 181 by connecting the outer peripheral surface of the cylinder portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182. ..

The handle mounting member 180 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 on the door frame base 110.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three ridges 183 is provided on the upper side in the tubular portion 181 and the other two are provided on the lower side in the tubular portion 181. These three ridges 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the tubular portion 181 only when the three ridges 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 110.

Since the axis of the cylinder portion 181 extends vertically to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle mounting member 180 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 to form the cylinder portion. The axis of 181 is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in the same tilted state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be seen from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 118, and the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. It comprises two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191 respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

The glass frame 191 includes a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 191b and. The mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the intermediate reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

In the glass unit 190, the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from the rear side of the door frame base 110. , The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is brought into contact with the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by being brought into contact with the rear surface.

When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is arranged so as to be separated from each other to the left and right by a flat plate-shaped main body 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 110.

The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled in the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201. Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201, which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. The rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 202 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball (the game ball launched by the ball launcher 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and is inside the game area 5a. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball into the ball.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. As a result, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

When the security cover 200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 202 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 10008 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess 1008. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Open / close cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder mounting portion 113 located between the through hole 111 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in the front view, and cooperates with the locking unit 700 described later. It works and is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 has a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extending forward and backward, and a locking unit that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and rotates a key inserted into the keyhole 211a. It includes a rotation transmission member 212 that transmits to the key cylinder 710 of 700, and a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 that mounts the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting the corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a, and the corresponding key can be either clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the front. It can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notched portions 212a that are notched. The rotation transmission member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. As a result, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted into the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both the left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a rectangular shape in a direction away from each other from the rear side of each of the pair of side plate portions 213b. The front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is penetrated by the cylinder lock 211 from the rear at a position substantially central in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side in the front view is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 in the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side in the front view is the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. As a result, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 connects the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 of the reinforcing unit 130.

When the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. It is inserted through 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 are housed in the box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 which is open to the rear. ing.

[3-1k. Ball feed unit]
The ball feed unit 250 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feed unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 250 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 to the ball launcher 680 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 can be used as the upper plate balls. It can be pulled out to the lower plate by operating the pull-out button 327.

In the ball feed unit 250, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are supplied through the upper plate ball feed port 323d of the plate unit base 323 and the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110 and penetrate in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 251 having an entrance 251a and a ball outlet 251b that opens below the entrance 251a and whose rear is open, and a box in which the rear end of the front cover 251 is closed and the front is open. A rear cover 252 having a hitting ball supply port 252a for supplying a game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a of the front cover 251 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the ball launcher 680, a rear cover 252, and a front cover. With a ball pulling member 253 having a partition portion 253a which is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 251 and which partitions the entrance 251a and the ball pulling port 251b on the rear side of the front cover 251. , The game balls on the partition portion 253a of the ball removing member 253 are sent one by one to the hit ball supply port 252a of the rear cover 252, and can rotate around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252. The ball feed member 254 supported by the ball feed member 254 and the ball feed solenoid 255 for rotating the ball feed member 254 are provided.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feed unit 250, the ball feed member 254 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 251a in the front view, and the ball feed member 253 is on the left side of the ball feed member 254 of the ball feed member 254. Ball feed solenoids 255 are arranged on the right side, respectively.

The front cover 251 of the ball feed unit 250 is provided with an arcuate slit 251c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extraction member 253 on the left side of the ball extraction port 251b when viewed from the front, and the slit 251c is provided. The working rod 253c of the ball removing member 253, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 251 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 251a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the front cover 251 is upstream of the ball feed taxiway 323e and the ball removal taxiway 323f of the dish unit base 323. It is formed so as to close the portion that is open to the rear of the end side from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 253 has a partition portion 253a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 254 and a ball of the partition portion 253a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the feed member 254, bends in a dogleg shape from the middle of the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 251b, and rotates around the axis whose lower end extends in the front-rear direction. From the side surface of the rotating paddle portion 253b that is movably supported, the rod-shaped operating rod 253c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating paddle portion 253b, and the rotating paddle portion 253b below the operating rod 253c It is provided with a weight portion 253d projecting to the side opposite to the partition portion 253a. The working paddle 253c of the ball pulling member 253 is formed so as to project forward through the arcuate slit 251c formed in the front cover 251 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The actuating paddle 253c comes into contact with the upper end of the actuating transmission unit 327a operated by pressing the upper plate ball pulling button 327 of the plate unit 320 via the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110.

The ball feeding member 254 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 254a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 253a of the entrance 251a and the ball pulling member 253, and the rear end of the blocking portion 254a. It is provided with a ball holding portion 254b recessed in an arc shape toward the center of rotation axis, and a rod-shaped paddle portion 254c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 254b. The blocking portion 254a and the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feed member 254 rotates around the rotation shaft core by moving the paddle portion 254c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotation shaft core in the left-right direction by driving the ball feed solenoid 255.

The ball feed member 254 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 254a faces the direction of the partition portion 253a and at the same time the ball holding portion 254b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 254b communicates with the hit ball supply port 252a, and the ball holding portion 254b faces the direction of the partition portion 253a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position facing toward. When the ball feed member 254 is in the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 254b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 252a to the ball launching device 680, and the game ball that has entered the partition portion 253a from the entrance 251a. However, the blocking portion 254a blocks the movement of the ball holding portion 254b (ball hitting port 252a) side, and the ball stays on the partition portion 253a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 254 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 254b faces the direction of the partition portion 253a, and the end of the ball holding portion 254b on the paddle portion 254c side closes the ball hitting supply port 252a. , Only one game ball on the partition portion 253a is held in the ball holding portion 254b.

Further, the ball feed unit 250 has a ball feed operating rod 256 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 255, and a ball feed operating rod 256 that swings back and forth due to the movement of the tip swinging in the vertical direction. It includes a ball feed crank 257 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 254 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 257 has an engaging portion 257a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 256, and a side of the engaging portion 257a that engages with the ball feed operating rod 256. A shaft portion 257b that is arranged on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252, and a shaft portion 257b that extends upward from the shaft portion 257b and feeds the ball. The member 254 includes a transmission portion 257c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 254c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feed unit 250 transmits the movement of the ball feed operating rod 256 that swings by the drive of the ball feed solenoid 255 that advances and retreats in the vertical direction by the ball feed operation rod 256 and the ball feed crank 257 to transmit the ball feed member 254. It can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 255 is not driven (normal time), the ball feed operating rod 256 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 255 and the tip is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feed member 254 is in the supply position. It will be in the state of being located in. Further, when the ball feed solenoid 255 is driven, the ball feed operating rod 256 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 255 and the tip is positioned upward, and the ball feed member 254 rotates to the holding position. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 255 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 254 receives one game ball, and when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 255 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member 254 is released. The game ball received by the solenoid can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 680 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 255 in the ball feed unit 250 is controlled by the launch control unit (not shown) of the payout control board 951 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 682.

Further, the ball removing member 253 rotatably supported by the ball feed unit 250 is subjected to a moment such that the weight portion 253d rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, but the ball feeding member 253 projects forward. The operation rod 253c is brought into contact with the upper end of the operation transmission unit 327a operated by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removal button 327 of the plate unit 320, so that its rotation is restricted. The partition portion 253a of the above partitions between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, so that the game ball does not invade the ball outlet 251b side.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 327 of the plate unit 320 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 327b slides downward together with the operation transmission unit 327a and moves downward of the operation transmission unit 327a. Along with this, the operating rod 253c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 253c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, the ball pulling member 253 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition between the entrance 251a and the ball pulling port 251b by the partition portion 253a is released. Will be done. As a result, the game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a is discharged from the ball outlet 251b to the ball extraction guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. be able to.

Since the upper plate ball removal slider 327b on which the operation transmission portion 327a with which the operation rod 253c of the ball removal member 253 abuts is formed is urged upward by the upper plate ball removal spring 327c, it is above the partition portion 253a. Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied, the impact can be absorbed by the upper plate ball pulling spring 327c via the operating pad 253c, and it is possible to prevent the ball pulling member 253 and the like from being damaged. , It is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 253a.

Further, the ball feed unit 250 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 252b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) recessed forward to the upper right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 252a in the rear cover 252, and the ball feed unit 250 is formed. The fraud prevention member 260 is mounted in the mounting recess 252b. The fraud prevention member 260 of the ball feed unit 250 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 252b of the rear cover 252 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 260 is formed in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape of the front view extends to the left and right, and the upper piece portion 261 and the upper piece portion 261 which are separated vertically at substantially the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It is provided with a lower piece portion 262 and an inclined portion 263 formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip end side (right end side in the front view) of the side facing each other of the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262. .. The upper piece 261 of the fraud prevention member 260 is bent so that the right end of the front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 260. The lower piece portion 262 extends on the same surface as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 260. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 260 is attached to the mounting recess 252b of the rear cover 252 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 communicates with the inside of the ball striking supply port 252a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 260, a fraudulent game ball to which a string is attached is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate 321 via the ball feed unit 250 by the ball launcher 680, and is attached to the fraudulent game ball. When a fraudulent act such as manipulating a string to move an illegal game ball in and out of the first starting port 2002 or the like is performed, the momentum of the illegal game ball launched (struck) by the ball launcher 680 causes fraud. A string attached to the game ball was inserted between the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262, and then the V-shape formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 became narrower. It can be cut depending on the part, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using a fraudulent game ball with a string attached.

[3-1l. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 270 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 37 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 37 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. Further, FIG. 38 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 270 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 271 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the front side open, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271. 272 and. The foul cover unit 270 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and is a penetrating ball that communicates the normal taxiway 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 323a of the dish unit 320. A full-tank ball receiving port 274 that opens rearward on the lower right side of the passage 273 and the penetrating ball passage 273 in the front view and can communicate with the full-tanned taxiway 862 of the lower full-tank ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4. And have.

Further, the foul cover unit 270 opens upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank receiving port 274, and does not reach the game area 5a even though it is launched by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4. The foul ball receiving port 275 that receives the game ball (foul ball), and the game ball that is open forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received by the full tank ball receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 are forward. It is provided with a ball discharge port 276 that discharges to and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the dish unit 320.

Further, the foul cover unit 270 is formed between the full tank ball receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 and the ball discharging port 276 by the unit main body 271 and the lid member 272, and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 277 having a large size, a flat plate-shaped movable piece 278 that constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 277 and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 271, and a movable piece. It includes a full tank detection sensor 279 that detects rotation of the 278 in the direction away from the storage passage 277, and a spring 280 that urges the movable piece 278 toward the center side of the storage passage 277.

When the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 is filled with the game balls and the game balls are not discharged from the ball discharge port 276 to the lower plate 322 side, the foul cover unit 270 has a certain number in the storage passage 277. The game ball can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the upper end of the movable piece 278 moves in the direction away from the storage passage 277 against the urging force of the spring 280 due to the weight of the game balls. The movable piece 278 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 322 is full with the game balls. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects that the lower plate 322 is full, the payout of the game balls is stopped and the payout of the game balls is stopped. It is possible to notify the player, the staff of the game hall, and the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the fullness of the lower plate 322.

Further, the foul cover unit 270 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 273 on the rear side of the unit main body 271, and is a taxiway opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 described later in the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 281 capable of contacting the actuating protrusion 863e of the 863 is provided (see FIG. 127). The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is formed so that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 863e of the taxiway opening / closing door 863 comes into contact with the main body frame 4. When the actuating protrusion 863e of the taxiway opening / closing door 863 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 281, the taxiway opening / closing door 863 rotates and the downstream ends (front opening) of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862. ) Can be released.

[3-2. Handle unit]
The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39 (a) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 39 (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 40A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 40B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by the player to drive the game ball in the upper plate 321 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Is.

The handle unit 300 covers the handle base 301 attached to the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 302 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 301, and the front end side of the handle 302. It is provided with a handle cover 303 that can be attached to the handle base 301.

Further, the handle unit 300 is rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 304 attached to the front side of the handle base 301 on the rear side of the handle 302 and the handle 302 attached to the front end and rotatably attached by the inner base 304 and the handle base 301. The handle base 301 and the inner have a shaft member 305 having a drive gear portion 305a, a transmission gear 306 meshing with the drive gear portion 305a of the shaft member 305, and a detection shaft 307a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 306. It includes a handle rotation detection sensor 307 sandwiched between the base and the base.

Further, the handle unit 300 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 301 and the other end side is attached to the handle 302 so that the handle 302 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 308 and the other end side are attached to the inner base 304 and the other end side are attached to the transmission gear 306, and the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 306. Auxiliary spring 309 urging in the direction, handle touch sensor 310 attached to handle base 301 behind the inner base 304, and the tip side from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 301 from the left side to the outside. The single-shot button 311 that protrudes and the base end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 301 behind the inner base 304 so as to rotate around the axis, and the single-shot button 311 is attached to the handle base 301 by detecting the pressing operation. It is equipped with a single-shot button operation sensor 312.

The handle base 301 of the handle unit 300 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 301a extending in the front-rear direction, the disc-shaped front end 301b protruding radially from the front end of the base 301a, and the cylindrical base 301a. It also has three groove portions 301c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. Further, the three groove portions 301c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 183 of the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. Therefore, with the three groove portions 301c aligned with the three ridges 183, the base portion 301a can be inserted into the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180, and the ridges 183 are formed in the three groove portions 301c, respectively. When inserted, the handle base 301 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle mounting member 180.

The handle 302 has four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 305). Two slits 302e extending in an arc shape as the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 302e, the other end side of the handle return spring 308 is locked. The locking protrusion 302f is provided.

The four first protrusions 302a, the second protrusion 302b, the third protrusion 302c, and the fourth protrusion 302d are provided in order in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 302a has a side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302, which bulges outward so as to bulge outward, and is the opposite side around the anti-city decision. The side surface in the direction of is dented (cut) so as to curve inward. In the second protrusion 302b, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 302a in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and the second protrusion 302b is separated from the first protrusion 302a. It protrudes slightly low. The side surface of the second protrusion 302b in the clockwise direction of the front view of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the side surface in the direction around the anti-city decision, which is the opposite side, curves inward. It is recessed so as to be formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 302a.

In the third protrusion 302c, the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 302b in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 302a It protrudes at about half the height. The side surfaces of the third protrusion 302c are inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 302d, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 302c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and the fourth protrusion 302d is separated from the first protrusion 302a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 302d has side surfaces on both sides that are inclined in a substantially straight line, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

The handle cover 303 has three mounting bosses 303a whose front center is round and bulges forward and projects rearward. The three mounting bosses 303a penetrate the slit 302e of the handle 302 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 301. Since the mounting boss 303a of the handle cover 303 penetrates the slit 302e of the handle 302, the mounting boss 303a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 302e, which regulates the rotation angle of the handle 302. In this example, the handle 302 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 via the handle mounting member 180. The handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 is attached. The handle unit 300 attached via the slingshot unit 300 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 and perform the rotation operation without any discomfort.

The handle rotation detection sensor 307 of the handle unit 300 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 302 is rotated, the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 rotates via the shaft member 305 and the transmission gear 306. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 307a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 682 in the ball launcher 680 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307. , The game ball is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle 302 and the handle cover 303 are conductively plated, and the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact when the player comes into contact with the handle 302 or the like. Then, when the handle 302 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 310 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The drive of 682 is controlled, and a game ball can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 302 in some way without touching the handle 302, the launch solenoid 682 is not driven and the game ball can be driven. It is not possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 302 in a manner different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 300, when the player presses the single-shot button 311 while the player is rotating the handle 302, the single-shot button operation sensor 312 detects the operation of the single-shot button 311 and the launch control unit of the payout control board 951 (illustrated). Is omitted) to stop the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 682. As a result, it is possible to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle 302, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 311 the driving before operating the single-shot button 311. The game ball can be hit into the game area 5a again with strength.

Further, the handle unit 300 includes four first protrusions 302a, a second protrusion 302b, a third protrusion 302c, and a fourth protrusion 302d on the handle 302, and rotates the handle 302 most in the front-view clockwise direction. When the game ball is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 302d is the position of the first protrusion 302a when the handle 302 is not rotated. By changing the handle 302 with the fourth protrusion 302d as the first protrusion 302a, the player can maintain the handle 302 in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue of the person and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-3. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. FIG. 41 (a) is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame viewed from the front right, and FIG. 41 (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the front left. Further, FIG. 42A is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 42B is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the lower left rear. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged portion of the lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 28. The dish unit 320 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 below the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110, and the front surface bulges forward. An effect operation unit 400, which will be described later, is attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320.

The plate unit 320 includes an upper plate 321 for storing game balls for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. It is provided with a lower plate 322 that can be stored.

The plate unit 320 is attached to the flat plate-shaped plate unit base 323 attached to the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 323, and the left side from the center of the left and right bulges forward greatly. The upper plate body 324 forming the upper plate 321 and the lower plate main body 325 which is attached to the left side of the center of the left and right at the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 323 and bulges forward greatly to form the lower plate 322. And a plate unit cover 326 attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front side of the upper plate main body 324 and the lower plate main body 325.

Further, the plate unit 320 is a front view of the upper plate ball removal button 327 and the upper plate ball removal button 327, which are attached so that they can be pressed from above on the right side of the front view of the upper plate 321 on the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326. The ball lending button 328 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side, the return button 329 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side when viewed from the front of the ball lending button 328, and the ball lending button 328. And the ball rental display unit 330 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 behind the return button 329, and the plate front upper decoration portion 326b on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in front of the upper plate 321. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332, and the lower plate ball removal button 333 that protrudes forward from the front of the plate unit cover 326 in front of the lower plate 322 and is attached so that it can be pressed from the front. I have.

[3-3a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 and 44 and the like. The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is formed by the plate unit base 323 and the upper plate main body 324, and the left side side bulges forward more than the center on the left and right sides of the front view, and is formed in the shape of a container opened upward. Has been done. In the upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 321 recedes backward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and a guide passage portion 321a having a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed. There is. The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 321 including the guide passage portion 321a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 321a is the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 (upper plate ball removal button 327). ) (See FIG. 44).

The upper plate 321 is assembled on the plate unit base 323, and the bottom surface of the upper plate 321 is a game ball from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 323d. It is inclined so that it becomes slightly lower than the outer diameter of. As a result, the game balls discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 323a can be received and stored in the upper plate 321 and the received game balls can be stored in the upper plate 321a from the right end side of the guide passage portion 321a. It can be supplied to the ball feed port 323d.

As described above, the upper plate 321 is formed so that the bottom surface of the guide passage portion 321a whose depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrower becomes lower toward the lower side. That is, a part of the upper plate 321 projects from above into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 to which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) described later is attached. Therefore, in the upper plate 321, a sufficient amount of storage of the game ball can be secured. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) protrudes into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 so as not to come into contact with the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

The guide passage portion 321a is provided with a metal ground fitting 321b that is electrically grounded in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball comes into contact with (rolls), it becomes a game ball. The charged static electricity can be removed.

[3-3b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45 and the like. The lower plate 322 is arranged below the upper plate 321 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 320 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 322 is formed in a container shape capable of storing game balls, and is attached to a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a that penetrates vertically through the bottom wall portion 325a and allows the game balls to be discharged, and a plate unit cover 326. It is provided with a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the effect effect operation unit 400 (second effect effect operation unit 400A). The relief portion 322b of the lower plate 322 is formed so that the right front corner is recessed in an arc shape toward the rear.

In the lower plate 322, the lower plate main body 325 whose upper and rear sides are open, the lower plate cover portion 326k of the plate unit cover 326 covering the upper side from the left end side of the lower plate main body 325, and the lower plate main body 325 are opened. The dish unit is formed by a dish unit base 323 that closes the rear side, and a lower dish cover 340 that covers the upper side of a portion protruding into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the lower dish body 325. It faces outward from the lower plate opening 326d of the cover 326. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 45, the lower plate 322 is a trapezoid in which the outer peripheral shape in a plan view is a quadrangle extending to the left and right, and the front side of the quadrangle is the base and the upper side shorter than the base is arranged on the front side. It is formed in a shape that looks like a combination of and, and the left and right sides of the trapezoid that extend diagonally are curved so as to be recessed rearward. The lower plate 322 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear in a plan view.

As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower plate main body 325 is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate main body 325 has a flat bottom wall portion 325a, a main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer peripheral end excluding the rear end side of the bottom wall portion 325a, and a game ball passing through the bottom wall portion 325a. It is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a that penetrates up and down in a possible size. The outer peripheral shape of the bottom wall portion 325a is curved so that a quadrangle extending to the left and right and an upper side shorter than the base are arranged on the front side with the front side of the quadrangle as the base and the left and right sides extending diagonally are recessed rearward. It is formed in a shape that looks like a combination of a trapezoid and a trapezoid. The bottom wall portion 325a (upper surface) is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. The main body standing wall portion 325b rises upward from the bottom wall portion 325a at a height of 2 to 5 times the diameter of the game ball. The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is formed at a position to the right of the center of the lower plate main body 325 (bottom wall portion 325a) in the left-right direction. In the lower plate main body 325, the curved portion of the front right corner of the front view on the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b corresponds to the relief portion 322b.

The lower plate cover 340 is formed so as to cover an approximately right half portion above the lower plate main body 325. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower plate cover 340 is abbreviated from the cover standing wall portion 340a rising upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 and the upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a. It is provided with a horizontally extending ceiling portion 340b. The cover standing wall portion 340a rises from a portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 from a part on the front side to the rear end on the right side. When the lower plate cover 340 is assembled to the plate unit 320, the rear ends of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b are in contact with the front surface of the plate unit base 323. Further, the front end (left end side in the front side) of the cover standing wall portion 340a is in contact with the right end side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. Further, the left end of the ceiling portion 340b is in contact with the right end of the lower plate cover portion 326k of the plate unit cover 326. In the lower plate cover 340, the curved surface-shaped portion of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the portion diagonally extending between the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b on the rear side correspond to the relief portion 322b. There is.

The lower plate 322 is covered with a plate unit cover 326 (directing operation unit 400) from the vicinity of the front left end to the right side of the portion extending shortly to the left and right on the front end side, and more than half of the lower plate 322 is the directing operation unit 400 in the front view. It is located behind. That is, the lower plate 322 is formed so that the right half wraps around the rear of the effect operation unit 400. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower plate 322 includes the lower plate first region A1 (the crosshatch region in FIG. 45) located behind the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 described later, and the lower plate. Lower plate second region A2 (shaded in FIG. 45) located behind the opening 326d (the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). Area) and. In other words, the lower plate 322 has more than half of the storage area (corresponding to the storage area in a plan view, which is the combination of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2) in which the game balls can be stored. It is located behind the production operation unit 400. In FIG. 45, the area of the dotted line hatch is the remaining space (area) of the mounting space 326j in the dish unit cover 326.

In the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the plate unit base 323 forming the rear wall opens to the right side of the center in the front left-right direction of the rear wall. More specifically, the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the lower plate 322 is the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. It is arranged in the lower plate second region A2 which is behind the side, etc. As a result, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the lower plate ball supply port 323c cannot be seen from the player side through the lower plate opening 326d (see FIG. 19 and the like). Therefore, the lower plate 322 is formed so as to be scooped out from the lower plate opening 326d on the left side surface of the plate unit 320 (dish unit cover 326) that bulges forward toward the rear of the effect operation unit 400. The storage volume of the game ball is formed larger than the range that can be seen from the front. In other words, the lower plate 322 is formed larger in the lower plate second region A2 than in the lower plate first region A1. As a result, when the lower plate 322 is viewed from the outside (player side), more game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 than it looks.

In the lower plate 322, the right half of the lower plate main body 325 in the left-right direction (lower plate second region A2) is, as shown in FIG. ), And the lower plate cover 340 covers the upper side of the portion of the lower plate main body 325 that protrudes into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The lower plate cover 340 prevents the fingertips from touching the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) when the player inserts a finger into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate opening 326d. can do.

The lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a penetrating vertically in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate second region A2. The bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball punching hole 322a. The lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 is closed so as to be openable and closable by a lid member 334 operated by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 333. In the lower plate 322, in a normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, and the game ball can be stored in the lower plate 322. Then, when the lid member 334 is opened by pressing the lower plate ball removing button 333, the game ball in the lower plate 322 can be discharged from the lower plate ball removing hole 322a to the lower side of the plate unit 320.

The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a of the lower plate 322 is arranged in front (directly in front of) the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the plate unit base 323 forming the rear wall of the lower plate 322. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is located on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 and behind the frame unit 415 in the effect operation unit 400. It is not visible from the player (front) side.

As described above, the lower plate 322 is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral shape is a combination of a trapezoid with a narrowed front side on the front side of a quadrangle extending to the left and right, and the bottom surface is a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It is inclined so that it becomes lower toward. Therefore, in a state where the lid member 334 is opened and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 is directly in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c. It is immediately discharged downward from the open lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since the left end of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is located slightly to the left of the left end of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball supply is provided when the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open. The game ball supplied from the mouth 323c to the lower plate 322 does not directly flow to the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322, but is discharged from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Become.

On the other hand, since the right end of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is located to the left of the right end of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the game supplied to the lower plate 322 from the vicinity of the right end of the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The sphere comes into contact with the portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b that forms the right standing wall of the lower plate 322. Since the standing wall on the right side of the lower plate 322 is curved diagonally with respect to the front-rear direction so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is the game ball. When it comes into contact with an inclined portion, it reflects in the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and is discharged from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without going to the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. (See FIG. 45).

As described above, since the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment is formed so as to guide the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a In the open state, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c does not enter the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322, and immediately from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It can be discharged downward (dollar box). As a result, if the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is left open, the player cannot see the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322, so that the lower plate 321 and the payout device 830 are used for payout. It is possible to give the illusion that the game ball or the like is directly discharged to the dollar box, and by making it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, the player can play the game (the operation of driving the game ball). And directing images, etc.) can be devoted to suppressing the decline in interest.

Further, since the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment includes the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A extending upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b, the lower plate 322 Even if the game ball supplied to the inside jumps up in the lower plate 322, it is possible to prevent the game ball from invading the mounting space 326j side from the lower plate 322, and the game ball in the lower plate 322 can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) from coming into contact with the rear side. Therefore, the game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 are prevented from coming into contact with or pressing against the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). It is possible to prevent the game ball from damaging the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, it is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c when the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open. Since the game ball can be directly entered into the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), it is difficult for the game ball to reach the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Can be done. Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. By climbing the bottom surface, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, the impact when the game ball discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 can reduce the impact when it comes into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b, and damages them. It can be difficult.

In the present embodiment, the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removal hole 322a may be interlocked with the upper plate ball removal button 327. As a result, when the upper plate ball removing button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 also moves and the lower plate ball removing hole 322a is opened, so that the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 is further removed from the lower plate ball. It will be discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be further exerted. The upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 may be simultaneously opened by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneously opened by a mechanical link mechanism.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 constituting the lower plate 322 are shown as separate bodies that can be disassembled, but the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 are disassembled. It may be an impossible one. Further, although an example is shown in which the cover standing wall portion 340a of the lower plate cover 340 rises from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340 rises from the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325. The cover standing wall portion 340a may stand up. Further, an example is shown in which the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 extends substantially horizontally from the upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a, but the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 is the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. It may extend substantially horizontally from the upper end.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) of the lower plate 322 is provided, but the relief portion 322b is not provided. It may be a lower plate 322.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 (lower plate main body 325, lower plate cover 340, etc.) is shown to have a uniform surface shape without a through hole, but a plurality of penetrations through which the game ball cannot pass. It may have a hole. Specifically, at least a part of the bottom wall portion 325a, the main body standing wall portion 325b, the cover standing wall portion 340a, the ceiling portion 340b, etc. of the lower plate 322 is formed in a fence shape having a gap through which the game ball cannot pass. It may be a thing or a thing formed in a net shape. A light emitting body such as an LED may be arranged in the dish unit cover 326 (mounting space 326j) to illuminate the inside of the lower dish 322 through a fence-like or mesh-like gap of the lower dish 322 (to illuminate the inside of the lower dish 322). ..

In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 is formed by the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate cover portion 326k), which are separately formed. However, the four members may be integrated to form the lower plate 322 in an appropriate combination. Specifically, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate body 325 are integrated, the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, and the lower plate body 325 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. Integrated, lower plate cover 340 and plate unit base 323 integrated, lower plate body 325 and plate unit base 323 integrated, plate unit base 323 and plate unit cover 326 The lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, and the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. , The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, the lower plate body 325, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, and the lower plate body 325 and The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 may be integrated, or the like.

[3-3b-1. Ball guidance part of the lower plate]
An embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 including a ball guide portion 322c for guiding a game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. .. FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guide portion, and FIG. 46 (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guide portion different from that in (a). It is a figure, and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the ball guide part which is further different. In FIG. 46, the same components as described above are designated by the same reference numerals.

In the example of the lower plate 322 of FIG. 46A, the diameter of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is substantially the same as the diameter of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a at the portion between the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. It includes a pair of ball guiding portions 322c arranged apart from each other on the left and right at a distance. The pair of ball guide portions 322c are formed in a rail shape (protrusion) extending back and forth in a state of protruding from the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. Further, the lower plate 322 is inclined so that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Therefore, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 is guided to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the pair of ball guide portions 322c without getting over the ball guide portion 322c, and the lower plate ball It is discharged downward (dollar box) from the punch hole 322a.

Then, in the same manner as described above, the lower plate 322 of this example has the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball behind the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate second region A2). The punch holes 322a are arranged so as to be linearly arranged in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are located behind the covering wall such as the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340. It is not visible from the front.

As described above, since the lower plate 322 of this example includes a pair of ball guide portions 322c, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open. Can be immediately discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without invading the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since the player cannot see the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322, it is an illusion that the upper plate 321 and the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 are directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (driving operation of the game ball, directing image, etc.) and suppress the decline in interest. Can be done.

In the example of FIG. 46A, a rail-shaped ball guide portion 322c is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball is lowered like a groove extending toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Anything that can be guided to the countersunk hole 322a may be used.

Next, in the example of the lower plate 322 of FIG. 46 (b), the game ball discharged diagonally forward to the right from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is formed on the right wall portion of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is formed in a shape that reflects in the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and a cushioning portion 322d is provided at a portion where the game ball abuts. The buffer portion 322d is made of rubber, foam, or the like.

Similarly to the above, the lower plate 322 of this example also has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged directly in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It is tilted so that it becomes. Therefore. The game ball discharged straight forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a as it is. On the other hand, the game ball discharged to the right front from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is reflected in the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the buffer portion 322d, and is discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Will be done. At this time, since the game ball abuts on the buffer portion 322d and is reflected, the collision sound at the time of reflection is reduced.

Further, the lower plate 322 of this example is also rearward to the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 (the effect operation in the effect operation unit 400 and the plate unit cover 326 which is the lower plate second region A2) in the same manner as described above. It is arranged behind the covering wall such as the unit mounting portion 326a and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340) so that it cannot be seen from the front.

As described above, since the lower plate 322 of this example is provided with the cushioning portion 322d on the wall portion that reflects the game ball, even if the game ball is not discharged straight forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The buffer portion 322d can reflect the sound in the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and discharge it downward (dollar box) without sound. Therefore, when the game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are discharged to the dollar box, the collision sound of the game balls cannot be heard from the lower plate 322, so that the game balls are directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (driving operation of the game ball, directing image, etc.) and suppress the decline in interest. Can be made to.

Subsequently, in the example of the lower plate 322 of FIG. 46 (c), the portion of the bottom surface (bottom wall portion 325a) of the lower plate 322 opposite to the lower plate ball supply port 323c with the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in between. It is provided with a return portion 322e that projects upward from the plate and reflects the game ball that has jumped over the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. For the return portion 322e, the same material as the material forming the lower plate 322 may be used, or a cushioning material such as rubber or foam that alleviates the collision sound at the time of reflection may be used. Further, the return portion 322e may not form the side wall of the lower plate 322, or may form a part of the side wall (main body standing wall portion 325b) of the lower plate 322.

In the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and the return portion 322e are arranged in a straight line from the rear to the front, and the lower plate of the plate unit cover 326. Behind the right side of the opening 326d (the effect operation unit 400 which is the lower plate second region A2, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the rear of the covering wall such as the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). It is arranged so that it cannot be seen from the front. In this lower plate 322, even if the game ball flowing from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a jumps over the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the return portion 322e allows the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a side. It can be reflected downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Therefore, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

In this embodiment, the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffering portion 322d may be appropriately combined with the lower plate 322. Thereby, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

[3-3b-2. Another embodiment of the lower plate]
Another embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing a splittable lower plate, and FIG. 47 (b) is a schematic view showing a state in which the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows, (c) is the explanatory view which shows the lower plate of (b) in a schematic perspective view. In the lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 47, the lower plate main body 325 can be divided with the dividing line PL arranged in the lower plate second region A2 as a boundary. The area indicated by the dotted line hatch in FIG. 47 indicates the remaining space of the mounting space 326j.

First, the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) shown in FIG. 47 (a) constitutes a part of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2, and has a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It includes a main body portion 325A and a first extension portion 325B which is attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower plate second area A2. The first extension unit 325B is more than the main body unit 325A, and is the remaining space of the mounting space 326j in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is accommodated (the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A). It protrudes into the rear space). As shown in the figure, the first extension portion 325B is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear. Further, in the first extension unit 325B, a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in the right front corner.

Next, in the examples of FIGS. 47 (b) and 47 (c), the rear end of the effect operation unit 400 does not protrude rearward from the front end of the lower plate 322, and is more than the example of FIG. 47 (a). , The space behind the effect operation unit 400 (the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is widened. The lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) includes a main body portion 325A that forms a part of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2 and has a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and a main body. It is attached to the right side of the part 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower plate second area A2, and includes a second extension part 325C which is larger than the first extension part 325B. As shown in the figure, the width of the second extension portion 325C in the left-right direction from the front end to the rear end is formed to be constant, and the storage area of the game ball is formed larger than that of the first extension portion 325B. Further, the lower plate cover 340A having a shape corresponding to the shape of the second extension portion 325C is attached to the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 47 (c)).

In the example shown in FIG. 47, by attaching the first extension unit 325B and the second extension unit 325C to the main body portion 325A, the storage areas of the respective game balls are in a continuous (communication) state, and the storage areas of the game balls are connected. Expands. Further, the boundary between the main body portion 325A and the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C is a dividing line PL. Further, the first extension unit 325B and the second extension unit 325C in the lower plate main body 325 communicate with a predetermined gap (mounting space 326j) between the effect operation unit 400 and the rear surface of the second effect operation unit 400A. Space) is formed so as to occur.

As described above, in the above example, since the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) has a structure that can be divided and at least one of the divided members can be exchanged, the game ball in the lower plate 322 can be replaced. The storage area can be increased or decreased as needed. Further, since the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) can be divided, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 protrudes rearward (inside the mounting space 326j). An extension part (first extension part 325B or second extension part 325C) having a size corresponding to the amount can be attached.

In the above embodiment, the dividing line PL is arranged in the lower plate second region A2 behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), but the dividing line PL is below. It may be arranged on the boundary line between the plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2, or may be arranged in the lower plate first region A1.

Further, in the above embodiment, the main body portion 325A of the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is provided with the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, but the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a may be provided.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C are attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A of the lower plate main body 325, but the game ball is on the right side of the main body portion 325A. A flat plate-shaped closing member that does not have a storage area may be attached.

Further, in the above embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322 has been described, but the lower plate cover 340 can also be divided like the lower plate main body 325, and the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion can be divided. The shape may be adjusted to the size of 325C.

[3-3c. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 323 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The dish unit base 323 is attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape (rear is opened) extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 110. It is formed in a shallow box shape).

The plate unit base 323 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth under the upper plate ball supply port 323a and the upper plate ball supply port 323a extending rearward in a tubular shape. A speaker slit 323b composed of a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically and vertically, and a lower plate ball supply port 323c penetrating the front and rear and extending rearward in a tubular shape at the lower part on the left side from the center of the left and right in the front view. The lower plate ball supply port 323c is provided with an upper plate ball feed port 323d which penetrates back and forth on the upper right side of the front view and extends vertically and whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 324.

Further, the plate unit base 323 includes a ball feed guide path 323e that guides a game ball sent to the rear side of the plate unit base 323 through the upper plate ball feed port 323d to the entrance 251a of the ball feed unit 250, and a ball. After hanging from the lower side of the feeding taxiway 323e, it extends in a substantially L shape so as to be lowered toward the right side surface of the tubular front view of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and is extended from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250. The ball-extracting taxiway 323f that guides the released game ball to the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower end of the ball-feeding taxiway 323e and the upper end of the ball-extracting taxiway 323f on the left side of the front view of the ball-feeding taxiway 323e. With an opening 323g that penetrates back and forth at a height between the two, comes into contact with the operating rod 253c of the ball feeding unit 250, and the operation transmitting portion 327a operated by the upper plate ball removing button 327 protrudes rearward. , Is equipped. The downstream end of the ball-extracting taxiway 323f is open in the tubular portion of the lower plate ball supply port 323c.

Further, the dish unit base 323 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the front view, and the handle insertion port 323h through which the cylinder portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted and the front and rear near the right corner of the front view. 323i is provided with a cylinder insertion port 323i through which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

The upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 321 and the tubular rear end is the upper plate passage port of the door frame base 110. It penetrates 117 from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270. As a result, the game balls paid out from the payout unit 800 are supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 321 through the upper plate ball supply port 323a.

The lower plate ball supply port 323c, in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 322 and a tubular rear end penetrating the lower plate passage port 116 of the door frame base 110 from the front side. Then, it is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270. As a result, the game balls circulating in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270 are supplied into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The lower plate ball supply port 323c is arranged behind the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower plate cover 340, and the like. When the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, it cannot be seen from the player side through the lower plate opening 326d.

[3-3d. Dish unit cover]
The dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The plate unit cover 326 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front side of the upper plate main body 324 and the lower plate main body 325. The dish unit cover 326 is provided on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a to which the effect operation unit 400 is mounted and the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in which the center in the left-right direction bulges forward and opens wide in the front in the left-right direction. It is provided with a plate front upper decoration portion 326b formed at substantially the same height as the upper plate 321 and a plate front lower decoration portion 326c formed below each of the left and right plate front upper decoration portions 326b. There is.

The effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is formed so that the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the total width of the plate unit 320 in the left-right direction, and the vertical direction is substantially the same as the height of the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction. It is formed at a height. Further, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is inclined so as to move rearward as the front end moves upward. Specifically, the front end of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is inclined at an angle of 27 degrees with respect to the vertical line.

The front surface of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b moves rearward from the left-right center side of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left and right end sides, and the end portion of the plate unit cover 326 on the left-right direction center side and the left and right end sides. The middle part is formed in a curved surface shape that slightly bulges forward with respect to the plane connecting the ends of the. Further, the lower end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b is inclined so as to move upward from the left-right center side of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left and right end sides, and the plate unit cover 326 is inclined so as to move upward in the left-right direction (center side in the left-right direction). It is formed so as to narrow in the vertical direction from the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a side) toward the left and right end sides. In the plate unit cover 326, the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached to the plate front upper decoration portion 326b on the left side of the front view.

The front surface of the dish front lower decorative portion 326c moves rearward from the left-right center side of the dish unit cover 326 toward the left-right end sides, and the left-right center end and the left-right end side of the dish unit cover 326. It is formed in a curved surface shape such that the middle part is recessed rearward with respect to the flat surface connecting the ends of the above.

A lower plate opening 326d penetrating the front and back is formed in the lower plate front and lower decorative portion 326c on the left side of the front view, and the lower plate 322 faces forward from the lower plate opening 326d. In the plate front lower decoration portion 326c on the left side of the front view, the lower plate ball removal button 333 projects forward from the lower front surface of the lower plate opening 326d. Further, a lower speaker opening 326e made of punching metal is formed on the left side of the lower plate opening 326d in the plate front lower decorative portion 326c on the left side of the front view. The lower speaker port 326e is located in front of the speaker slit 323b of the dish unit base 323 in a state of being assembled in the dish unit 320.

The front lower right decorative portion 326c on the right side of the front view has a handle insertion port 326f that penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the front view and into which the cylinder portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted. A cylinder insertion port 326g, which penetrates back and forth above the handle insertion port 326f near the right corner and into which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted, is formed.

The plate unit cover 326 has a plate-shaped top plate portion 326h extending from the upper end of the plate front upper decoration portion 326b on the right side of the front view to the front end of the plate unit base 323, and the top plate portion 326h causes the upper plate 321 to have a plate-like top plate portion 326h. It covers the upper right side. An upper plate ball removal button 327, a ball lending button 328, a return button 329, and a ball lending return display unit 330 are attached to the top plate portion 326h.

The dish unit cover 326 includes a flat bottom plate portion 326i extending from the lower end of the dish front lower decorative portion 326c to the front surface of the dish unit base 323. The lower side of the dish unit 320 is closed by the bottom plate portion 326i. The bottom plate portion 326i is formed in a stepped shape so that a portion located below the lower plate 322 is recessed from the lower side to the upper side, and a lower plate ball removing base 335 described later is attached to the portion. Further, in the bottom plate portion 326i, a hole penetrating vertically is formed at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a of the lower plate 322.

The dish unit cover 326 is provided with a mounting space 326j that is open forward at the portion of the effect operating unit mounting portion 326a and the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is inserted (accommodated). Further, the plate unit cover 326 extends in a flat plate shape from the left side and the upper side of the lower plate opening 326d to the rear, and includes a lower plate cover portion 326k that covers the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 44). .. The lower plate cover portion 326k is in contact with the upper end of the left side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, and the left end of the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 is in contact with the right end. There is.

[3-3e. Upper plate ball removal button]
The upper plate ball removal button 327 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The upper plate ball removal button 327 is attached to the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side of the front view of the upper plate 321. By pressing the upper plate 321, the game ball in the upper plate 321 is moved to the lower plate 322. It can be pulled out. Although detailed illustration of the upper plate ball removal button 327 is omitted, the rear end side is left and right below the top plate portion 326h by the ball removal button holder attached to the lower side of the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326. It is rotatably mounted around an axis that extends to. The upper end of the ball pulling lever extending up and down is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper plate ball pulling button 327. The ball pulling lever is slidably attached in the vertical direction by a ball pulling base attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 below the upper dish ball pulling button 327.

Then, the ball pulling lever whose upper end is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper dish ball pulling button 327 is brought into contact with the upper portion of the upper dish ball pulling slider 327b slidably attached up and down by the dish unit base 323 from above. ing. The upper plate ball removing slider 327b includes an operation transmission portion 327a projecting rearward from the rear surface, and in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, the operation transmission portion 327a is formed from the opening 323g in the plate unit base 323. It projects rearward so as to face it, and abuts from below on the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 in the ball feeding unit 250. The upper plate ball removing slider 327b is urged upward by the upper plate ball removing spring 327c, and by the urging force of the upper plate ball removing spring 327c, the upper plate ball removing slider 327b and the ball removing lever are used. The upper plate ball removal button 327 is located at the rising end.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball removing button 327 is pressed downward against the urging force of the upper plate ball removing spring 327c, the operation transmitting portion 327a of the upper plate ball removing slider 327b moves downward, and the operation transmitting portion 327a of the upper plate ball removing slider 327b moves downward. Since the operating rod 253c of the ball pulling member 253 that is in contact with the upper end side also moves relatively downward, the ball pulling member 253 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 253a enters. The partition between the mouth 251a and the ball ejection port 251b is released, and they are in a state of communicating with each other. As a result, the game ball in the upper plate 321 is discharged from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 to the ball extraction guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and is discharged to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. Can be (supplied).

When the upper plate ball removing button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 closing the lower plate ball removing hole 322a may be moved in conjunction with the operation. As a result, when the upper plate ball removing button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 also moves and the lower plate ball removing hole 322a is opened, so that the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 is further removed from the lower plate ball. It will be discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, and it is difficult to make the player feel the troublesomeness of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322. It is possible to concentrate the player on the game (driving operation of the game ball, production image, etc.) and suppress the deterioration of the interest. The upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 may be simultaneously opened by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneously opened by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-3f. Ball lending button, return button, and ball lending display section]
The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41. As shown in the figure, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 are inside the circular decoration on the right side of the front view of the upper plate ball removing button 327 on the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326. It is attached to.

The ball lending button 328 inserts cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then presses the ball lending button to plate a predetermined number of game balls. It is rented (paid out) into the upper plate 321 of the unit 320. When the return button 329 is pressed while the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine is inserted, the cash or prepaid card is returned after deducting the amount of the lent game ball.

Although not shown, the ball lending display unit 330 has a three-digit 7-segment LED arranged under the transparent surface, and the remaining number of cash or prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine, or It displays an error code, etc. when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-3 g. Production selection left button and production selection right button]
The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41 and the like. As shown in the figure, the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached to the plate unit cover 326 near the right end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the left side of the front view near the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The effect selection left button 331 is formed in a triangular shape with one apex facing left. The effect selection right button 332 is formed in a triangular shape with one apex directed to the right on the right side of the effect selection left button 331.

The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 can be used by the player in the game board side effect display device 1600 or the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 arranged in the game area 5a in front view. On the other hand, when the effect image prompting the selection is displayed, the pressing operation can be accepted, and the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are operated within a predetermined time to select the desired option. ..

[3-3h. Lower plate ball removal button]
The lower plate ball removal button 333 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The lower plate ball removal button 333 is below the lower plate opening 326d in the plate unit cover 326, which is in front of the lower plate 322, and projects forward from the lower front lower end of the lower plate front lower decoration portion 326c on the left side of the front view. By pressing the lower plate ball removal button 333, the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 can be rotated, and the lid member 334 rotates. The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened, and the game ball stored in the lower plate 322 can be discharged below the plate unit 320.

The lower plate ball removal button 333 can be slid in the front-rear direction by the lower plate ball removal base 335 (see FIG. 42 (b)) attached to the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 on the lower side of the lower plate body 325. It is attached to. The lower plate ball removal button 333 is arranged to the left of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 28 and the like).

The lower plate ball removal base 335 has a bottom plate so as to be accommodated in a portion of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 that is formed in a stepped shape so as to be recessed from the lower side to the upper side at a position below the lower plate 322. It is attached to the portion 326i. The lower plate ball removing base 335 has a discharge port 335a having the same size as the lower plate ball removing hole 322a and penetrating vertically at a position directly below the lower plate ball removing hole 322a of the lower plate 322. .. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lid member 334 is arranged between the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate ball removing base 335. As a result, when the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 is opened, the discharge port 335a of the lower plate ball removal base 335 is also opened, and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a are also opened. And are in a state of communicating with each other.

Although not shown, the lid member 334 is rotatably attached to the lower plate ball removing base 335 about a position to the left of the lower plate ball removing button 333 in a plan view. The lower plate ball removing button 333 is connected to a portion of the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removing hole 322a and a portion that is rotatably attached by the lower plate ball removing base 335. As a result, when the lower plate ball removing button 333 is moved in the front-rear direction, the lid member 334 rotates around an axis extending vertically, and the lower plate ball removing hole 322a (discharge port 335a) can be opened and closed.

Although not shown, the lower plate ball removing base 335 has a holding device for holding the lower plate ball removing button 333 when the lower plate ball removing button 333 is pushed backward and moved, and a lower plate ball removing button. A lower plate ball pulling spring that urges the 333 forward is attached. When the lower plate ball removal button 333 protrudes forward and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, when the lower plate ball removal button 333 is pressed and moved backward, the lid member 334 rotates. As the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is opened by moving, the lower plate ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and remains moved to the rear. In this state, even if the lower plate ball removal button 333 is released, the lower plate ball removal button 333 does not move forward, and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is maintained in an open state, and the lower plate is maintained. The game ball in the 322 can be discharged below the plate unit 320 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and the discharge port 335a.

Then, when the lower plate ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is open, the lower plate ball removal button 333 is pressed backward to release the holding by the holding device. In this state, when the pressure of the lower plate ball removing button 333 is released, the lower plate ball removing button 333 moves forward by the urging force of the lower plate ball removing spring, returns to the protruding state, and the lid member 334 rotates. By moving, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is closed. As a result, the game ball can be stored in the lower plate 322.

In addition to the pressing operation of the lower plate ball removing button 333, the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removing button 327 also moves the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removing hole 322a (discharge port 335a). The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a may be opened. As a result, when it is desired to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the dollar box arranged below the plate unit 320, simply operating the upper plate ball removal button 327 causes the dollar box via the lower plate 322. It is possible to simplify the labor involved in removing the ball. The upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 may be simultaneously opened by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneously opened by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-4. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 48 to 55 and the like. FIG. 48A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 48B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. Further, FIG. 49A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 49B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 50 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 51 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 48 (a), and FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 48 (b). FIG. 53 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 48 (b), and FIG. 53 (b) is an enlarged view of part A in FIG. 48 (a). FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front portion of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent central side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed and operated by the player, and the effect operation unit of the plate unit cover 326 that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the mounting portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, and a frame. The base unit 430, which is attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front side, and the base unit 430, which is visible from the player side through the operation button 410, are attached to the effect. It is equipped with a door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. FIG. 56A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 56B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparently formed. The operation button 410 is formed on a transparent button lens 411 having a circular outer circumference and a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical surface) so that the central side bulges forward, and on the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It includes an annular button frame 412 that is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 that is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that do not allow light to pass through.

The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed on the surface side in a smooth curved surface shape without unevenness. The button lens 411 extends from the back surface to the center side (inside) with a predetermined length at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 in a W-shaped cross section, and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The one-button decorative portion 411a and the first button decorative portion 411a extend along the axis toward the center in a state of being recessed from the back surface in an arc shape at a position on the outer peripheral side, and are lined up within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a plurality of (six) second button decoration portions 411b provided.

As shown in the figure, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 to the center side when assembled to the operation button 410, and a group on both the left and right sides is a group on both the upper and lower sides. It extends longer to the center than.

The plurality of second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411 extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration portions 411b are formed so as to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and project forward so that the front surface side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted due to irregularities having a W-shaped cross section or an arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in an arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the six second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plating layer having a metallic luster on its surface.

The button base 413 has a substantially cylindrical main body portion 413a extending shortly in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a, and a main body portion 413a from the rear side of the flange portion 413b. Along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the guide boss portions 413c and the flange portions 413b, which are arranged in a columnar shape rearward along the outer circumference of the flange portion 413b and are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The detection pieces 413d, which project rearward in a strip shape and are arranged in a plurality (three) in the circumferential direction, penetrate the flange portion 413b in the front-rear direction on the outside of the main body portion 413a and have a predetermined length along the outer circumference. A plurality (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction and a tubular opening extending forward from the front end of the main body 413a, and the front end side is inside along the inner surface of the button lens 411. It is provided with an inner extending portion 413f that is narrowed to (center side).

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are arranged at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right sides with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so that two detection pieces 413d are arranged on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the push detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

The six base openings 413e are provided on each of the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the portion of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f is recessed from the outer peripheral side to the inner side. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extending portion 413f, which is narrowed inward, substantially coincides with the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

The front surface of the operation button 410 bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is transparently formed. The door frame side effect display device 460 is arranged on the rear side. The display screen of is visible from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413c slidably inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431. Is being urged forward by. The operation button 410 is restricted from moving further forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, which causes the front side of the outer peripheral edge to come into contact with the frame unit 415, and the urging force of the operation button spring 438. By pressing against the above, the rear end moves rearward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the push detection sensor 440.

Further, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end to the central side of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

Further, the operation button 410 closes the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 with the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button is provided by the button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear is visible is formed so as to be narrowed from the outer circumference to the inside. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

Further, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the tubular button base 413 (main body portion 413a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative substrate unit 420 and is closer to the front surface of the decorative substrate unit 420. It will be in a state of protruding backward. As a result, the light radiated forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively, is a button. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside to the inside of the base 413, and the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent the light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the decorative board unit 420, the operation button left inner decorative board 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decorative substrate 436 from being luminescently decorated except for the portion targeted for luminescent decoration, and it is possible to perform luminescent decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer circumference from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in a shape whose outer shape matches the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 is a frame-shaped frame main body 416 which is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 and has a circular central opening 416a, and the frame main body 416 on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a from the front side. There is.

The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrating back and forth, and a central opening 416a that penetrates back and forth on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a and notched portions 416c having a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Is equipped. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same size as the diameter on the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on each of the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

Further, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially tubular inner tubular portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner tubular portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is cut out. In the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylinder portion 416d has the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively. It is located between the first LED 422a and 423a and the second LED 422b and 423b (see FIG. 52).

Further, the frame main body 416 extends outward on each of the upper left and right sides of the outer circumference, and includes a pair of mounting portions 416e to be mounted on the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In the frame body 416 (effect operation unit 400), the pair of mounting portions 416e and the left and right side portions of the cutout portion 416c are mounted on the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320.

The frame body 416 is made of metal on substantially the entire surface of the frame body 416, except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c side (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A glossy plating layer is formed.

The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral opening 416b formed on each of the left and right sides of the frame body 416 from the rear side. The front surface of the frame side lens 417 is formed on a smooth surface without unevenness, and a plurality of irregularities along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a are formed on the rear surface side (see FIGS. 53 and 63). Light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 is formed in a substantially quadrangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The front side of the frame top lens 418 is smoothly formed. Further, in the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a are arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side (FIGS. 51 and 63). reference). Light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

In the frame unit 415, with the effect operation unit 400 assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are the second LEDs 422b and 423b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively. The frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted on them enable light emission decoration. ..

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 57 and the like. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front by disassembling it. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate and decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the board base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the board base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The inner peripheral side of the board base 421 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed to be smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The left outer decorative substrate 422 of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 is formed on the front side of a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. It includes a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along the line. The right outer decorative substrate 423 of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button is on the front side of the plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. It includes a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the line. The front and rear sides of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white.

A weight 424a eccentric to the rotation shaft is attached to the vibration motor 424, and vibration can be generated by rotating the weight 424a.

When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Further, in the decorative substrate unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are located behind the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 400, a frame is placed between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively. The inner cylinder portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 52).

Therefore, the decorative substrate unit 420 emits and decorates only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423, respectively. At the same time, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be light-emitting and decorated by the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively.

Further, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424 to vibrate the entire effect operation unit 400.

[3-4d. Base unit]
The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60 and the like. FIG. 58 (a) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 (b) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front by disassembling it. Further, FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from behind by disassembling it. The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the operation button 410 so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415.

The base unit 430 consists of four through holes 431a attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and penetrating in a substantially quadrangular shape extending vertically at the center, and four stop holes opened forward on the outside of the through holes 431a. An annular unit base 431 having a holding hole 431b, and an operation button internal decoration member 432 which is attached so as to cover the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 and has a short tubular shape in the front-rear direction and has translucency. The operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, and the operation button inner decorative member 432 attached to the left and right sides of the through holes 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 behind the button inner decorative member 432, respectively. The operation button upper inner decorative board 435 and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 attached to the upper and lower sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 at the rear, and the frame top lens attached to the upper front surface of the unit base 431. It includes a decorative substrate 437.

Further, the base unit 430 includes four operation button springs 438 inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431, three sensor holders 439 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 431, and each sensor holder. Three pressure detection sensors 440, which are attached to the 439 respectively to detect the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the effect operation unit relay board 441 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431, and the effect operation unit relay board 441. A relay board cover 442 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so as to cover the rear side is provided.

The unit base 431 has a substantially circular outer shape, and is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 431 penetrates back and forth at the center, and a substantially quadrangular through hole 431a extending vertically is formed. The through hole 431a has a size that fits within the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and is formed to a size that allows the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 to be inserted. A door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431.

The four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 are formed at the four corners on the outer side of the through hole 431a at the upper, lower, left, and right corners at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The inner diameter of these holding holes 431b is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be slidably inserted.

More specifically, the holding hole 431b on the upper left side of the four holding holes 431b is from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 431. It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. Further, the holding hole 431b on the upper right side of the four holding holes 431b is clockwise from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410) with respect to the center of the unit base 431. It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 431b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 431b are formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 431 with respect to the upper two holding holes 431b, respectively. ..

Further, the unit base 431 has a light-shielding wall portion 431c that protrudes forward in a flat plate shape from the portion where the inner decorative substrate 435 on the operation button is attached and the portion where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 is attached in the upper part of the front surface. It has. With this light-shielding wall portion 431c, the frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting decorated only by the frame top lens decorative substrate 437.

The decorative member 432 inside the operation button is formed in a curved surface shape so that the substantially cylindrical peripheral wall portion 432a extending shortly in the front-rear direction and the front end side of the peripheral wall portion 432a are closed and the center protrudes forward. A front plate portion 432b, a rectangular opening 432c that penetrates the front plate portion 432b in the front-rear direction and extends vertically, a flange portion 432d that extends outward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 432a, and a flange portion 432d. It is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 432e, which project rearward from the surface and are mounted on the unit base 431.

The outer diameter of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button inner decorative member 432 is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. The opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460.

In the operation button interior decorative member 432, the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the front surface of the front plate portion 432b are formed on smooth surfaces without unevenness.

The operation button internal decoration member 432 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a, is recessed in an arc shape and extends in the front-rear direction, and has a plurality of first button internal decoration portions 432f provided in the circumferential direction. , It is formed on the rear surface of the front plate portion 432b, bulges in an arc shape, extends into a variable octagonal shape centered on the center of the front plate portion 432b, and is concentric circles centered on the center of the front plate portion 432b. It is provided with a second button internal decoration portion 432 g (see FIG. 63), which is provided in a plurality of shapes. The second button inner decorative portion 432g is formed so as to have a portion extending parallel to the four inner periphery of the opening 432c.

The decorative member 432 inside the operation button is formed of a transparent member. The rear part of the operation button interior decoration member 432 cannot be clearly seen due to the lens effect of the first button interior decoration portion 432f of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the front plate portion 432b. ..

The operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 each have a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and these LEDs are mounted. By emitting light, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button can be made to emit light. By luminescent decoration of the operation button interior decoration member 432, the inside of the operation button 410 and the outside of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be luminescently decorated.

A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437, and the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from these LEDs.

The LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, the operation button lower inner decorative board 436, and the frame top lens decorative board 437 are full-color LEDs, respectively. It is said that. The front surface of the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, the operation button lower inner decorative board 436, and the frame top lens decorative board 437 is white. ..

The operation button spring 438 is a coil spring, and is inserted from the front into the four holding holes 431b in the unit base 431. When the operation button spring 438 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end is in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 431b, and the front end is a guide boss projecting rearward from the main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. It is in contact with the rear end of the portion 413c. These operation button springs 438 urge the operation button 410 forward.

The three pressure detection sensors 440 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410. More specifically, in the front surface of the unit base 431, one of the three pressure detection sensors 440 is on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 431b, the other is on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 431b, and the other one is on the lower left side. It is attached to the lower right side of the holding hole 431b of the above via the sensor holder 439, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 440 are mounted at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 431. These three pressure detection sensors 440 can detect the three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

The effect operation unit relay board 441 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 on the left side (right side of the front view) of the through hole 431a in the rear view. The effect operation unit relay board 441 includes an operation button left outer decorative board 422, an operation button right outer decorative board 423, a vibration motor 424, an operation button left inner decorative board 433, an operation button right inner decorative board 434, and an operation button upper inner decorative board. Connection between 435, decorative board 436 under the operation button, frame top lens decorative board 437, pressure detection sensor 440, and door frame side effect display device 460, and the door body relay board (not shown) of the door frame base unit 100. Is for relaying.

The relay board cover 442 extends from the lower end of the portion covering the rear side of the effect operation unit relay board 441 to the left in the front view, and includes a leg portion 442a attached to the lower rear surface of the unit base 431. The leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 extends substantially horizontally on the lower surface when assembled on the door frame 3, and is between the leg portion 442a and the bottom plate portion 326i forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. A slight gap is formed in (see FIG. 26). As a result, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the frame unit 415 is used until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. After the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the movement of the effect operating unit 400 is restricted downward, and the effect unit mounting portion of the frame unit 415 mounting portion 416e and the dish unit cover 326 is restricted. It is possible to prevent the 326a and the like from being subjected to an unreasonable force and prevent their damage.

[3-4e. Door frame side production display device]
The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so that the display screen faces forward from the opening 432c of the operation button interior decorative member 432 in the base unit 430, and the operation button 410 is transparent. The display screen can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the central portion, and the effect image can be displayed on the display screen.

The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 461 having a square display screen on the front side and the liquid crystal display device 461, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. It is provided with a bottomed square tubular mounting bracket 462. The liquid crystal display device 461 is a commercially available color liquid crystal display having an aspect ratio of 16: 9 and a diagonal length of about 4.3 inches. The outer circumference of the mounting bracket 462 is formed to have the same shape as the outer circumference of the liquid crystal display device 461, and the bottom portion of the bottomed tubular shape is attached so as to be in contact with the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 461.

When the door frame side effect display device 460 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the liquid crystal display device 461 penetrates the through hole 431a of the unit base 431 from the rear side, and the inside of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button. (See FIG. 51). The front surface (display screen) of the liquid crystal display device 461 is located near the front end of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button, and faces forward from the opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b.

The door frame side effect display device 460 can display a predetermined effect image based on the control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 on the liquid crystal display device 461.

[3-4f. Effect of production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63 and the like. FIG. 61 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 51. In FIG. 62A, a part of the operation button is cut out in a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button, and is intended to be hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 63 (a) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and FIG. 63 (b) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and is operated by the player. It is possible to entertain the player by having the player participate in the effect presented to the player by operating the button 410.

The total height of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be substantially the same as the height of the portion below the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Further, the total width of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the total width of the door frame 3. The effect operation unit 400 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction on the lower side of the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

In the effect operation unit 400, the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. When the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is provided between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442, which is the bottom surface, and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. Is formed. That is, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed like this. As a result, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is tilted so that it moves upward as it goes forward. As a result, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is arranged above the plate unit 320 (directing operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projected view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). It can be seen in a state, and the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation button 410, and the like can be visually recognized in a good state.

In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be the frame unit 415 due to the urging force of the operation button spring 438. It is in contact with a portion of the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 400 projects forward from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410 to the center side (center axis CL side) from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the shape of a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , The frame unit 415 projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 51 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (front end) is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of the 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is formed to be much larger than that of the operation button for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. It is likely to be done. More specifically, the operation buttons for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment. Since the central axis CL is attached at an angle with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. The portion of the operation button 410 away from the central axis CL is pressed.

By the way, in the operation buttons for directing in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface to be pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the part to be pressed is a flat surface. , If you press a part that is off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed will tilt so that the pressed part will retract first, and the operation button will not be able to retract straight, so you can press the operation button. There is a risk that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) to be pressed by the player is bulged forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410 to make it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. Can be done. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. You can fully enjoy the production of operation.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a plate so that the effect operation unit 400 can be hung. Since it is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the mounted part. , The entire effect operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is in contact with the effect operation unit 400. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly under the position (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 61) where the player is relatively easy to press, the operation button 410 is pressed against the player. It is possible to transmit strong vibrations, which can surprise the player and entertain the production.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the frame is formed until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted, and the effect operation unit attachment of the frame unit 415 attachment portion 416e and the dish unit cover 326 is restricted. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the portion 326a or the like, and it is possible to prevent damage to the effect operation unit 400 or the like. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since the 400 etc. are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the deterioration of the player's interest, and increase the burden on the game hall side by making it hard to be damaged. It can be suppressed.

As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses and operates is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, it is made into a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are higher than in the case, and even if the lens is hit strongly, the impact can be dispersed over the entire button lens 411, and the lens is less likely to be damaged.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63, in the effect operation unit 400, the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button interior decorative member 432 are made of transparent members. The front side (player side) is decorated with irregularities such as the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button inner decoration portion 432f, and the second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the back surface side. ) Can be visually recognized. In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to see the rear side through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. ..

Since the effect operation unit 400 includes a first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a is provided. This makes it difficult to see the rear part of the outer peripheral edge of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rear in the central axis CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432. A gap is located between the outer peripheral surface of the 432a, but the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap allows the outer peripheral gap of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button to be opened from the front side (player side). It can be difficult to see. As a result, even if the operation button internal decoration member 432 having a fixed position is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the operation button 410 from deteriorating in appearance, and the operation button 410 is seen. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button can be arranged without any problem in the transparent operation button 410, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, thereby forming the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430. The unit base 431, the decorative substrate unit 420, and the like, which are on the outer side and on the rear side (back side), are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 62, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 are obscured and hidden. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button inner decoration member 432 arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410 extends into a variable octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 63, the uneven line of the first button decorative portion 411a and the concave-convex line of the second button inner decorative portion 432g intersect with each other and are geometrically arranged. The decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends), the effect operation unit 400 is separated from the first button decoration portion 411a. With the decoration portion 432g inside the second button, it is possible to show the player a geometric pattern having a three-dimensional feeling with depth, and it is possible to enjoy the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, when the position of the player's eyes moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a Since the degree of overlap between the line and the uneven line of the decorative portion 432 g in the second button changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

In this way, the effect operation unit 400 gives the player a moving and three-dimensional decoration by the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button inner decoration part 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, it can strongly attract the attention of the player, and it can be a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), and behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, and the operation button. The upper inner decorative board 435 and the lower inner decorative board 436 are arranged, and by making a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of them emit light, the operation button inner decorative member 432 in the operation button 410 is emitted. Can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be light-emitting decorated by the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. As shown in FIG. 52, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the extending direction of the central axis CL, since they are arranged inside the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, the light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body 413a. , Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be luminescent and decorated satisfactorily.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is located behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 of the decorative substrate unit 420. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are arranged, and by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are light-emitting and decorated. Can be done. As shown in FIG. 52, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. It is located between the tubular inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d, and the operation is performed. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 has a second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and an operation button right outer decoration board behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of the 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light of the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the tubular inner tubular portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. It is located so that the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. ..

Further, the effect operation unit 400 has a plurality of frame top lens decorative substrates 437 in the base unit 430 arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 and mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437. The frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from the LED. From the lower side of the portion of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached, a flat plate-shaped light-shielding wall portion 431c projects forward to the vicinity of the lower end rear of the frame top lens 418, and the frame. The light from the LED of the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

[3-4 g. Overall configuration of the second embodiment of the production operation unit]
Next, the second effect operation unit 400A, which is the second embodiment of the effect operation unit 400, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 64 to 71 and the like. FIG. 64 (a) is a front view of the second effect operation unit having a different embodiment from the effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 63, and FIG. 64 (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. FIG. 65 (a) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 (b) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. 64 (a). FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line HH in FIG. 64 (b). FIG. 69 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line I-I in FIG. 64 (b), and FIG. 69 (b) is an enlarged view of part A in FIG. 64 (a). FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is a figure.

The second effect operation unit 400A can be attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit 320 in place of the above effect operation unit 400. Similar to the effect operation unit 400, the second effect operation unit 400A can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. Hereinafter, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the same components as the effect operation unit 400 will be described with the same reference numerals.

The second effect operation unit 400A has a circular outer shape and a transparent central side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed and operated by the player, and the plate unit cover 326 that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit mounting portion 326a, and a decorative board unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415. The second base unit 450, which is mounted on the rear side of the frame unit 415 and has the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 mounted on the front side, and the second base unit 450, which is visible from the player side through the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display device 460A, which is attached to the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and the buffer unit 510 attached to the lower surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A are provided.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A covers the surfaces of the second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the second effect operation unit relay board 515 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the front view. A relay board cover 516 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A so as to cover it is provided. The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the front view.

The second production operation unit relay board 515 includes an operation button left outer decorative board 422, an operation button right outer decorative board 423, a vibration motor 424, a pressure detection sensor 454, a frame top lens decorative board 482, a switching drive motor 492, and a projector 500. The purpose is to relay the connection between the rotation detection sensor 507 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100.

[3-4g-1. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72 and the like. FIG. 72 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 72 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is a figure. The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparently formed. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer circumference is circular and the central side bulges forward, and the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It is provided with an annular button frame 412 attached to the front side and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It has substantially the same configuration as the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400.

The specific difference is that the operation button 410 of the second production operation unit 400A and the operation button 410 of the production operation unit 400 have the pattern of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the guide boss of the button base 413. The shape of the portion 413c is different.

More specifically, as shown in the figure, the first button decorative portion 411a of the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A has one apex toward the center side of the button lens 411 at a portion in contact with the inner circumference of the button frame 412. A truss-like pattern in which a triangle facing the triangle and a triangle having one apex facing the opposite side of the center are arranged alternately over the entire circumference in the circumferential direction, and a button lens 411 in the truss-shaped pattern. A right-angled triangular pattern composed of a base facing the center side, a side extending from both ends of the bottom side to the center side of the button lens 411, and a hypotenuse extending from the tip of the side to the center of the bottom side. And the hypotenuse of the right-angled triangle pattern, the side extending from the center of the base of the triangle of the truss-like pattern to the center side of the button lens 411 longer than the right-angled triangle pattern, and the right-angled triangle shape from the tip of that side. It is formed by a variable isosceles triangular pattern composed of a side extending to the tip of the hypotenuse of the pattern of.

That is, the first button decoration portion 411a is composed of a combination of a plurality of triangles. Although not shown, each triangle constituting the first button decorative portion 411a has its own surface facing in a different direction and is formed in a polyhedral shape. As a result, the front surface side of the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape, whereas the back surface side is formed in a polyhedral shape at the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, so that the first button decoration portion 411a is formed. The plate thickness of the button lens 411 changes in a complicated manner at this portion, and the light passing through this portion is diffusely refracted. Therefore, at the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, it is possible to show the player a geometric pattern in which a plurality of triangles are combined, and at the same time, it is possible to make the rear member difficult to see due to diffuse refraction.

The guide boss portion 413c in the button base 413 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a cylindrical shape with the rear open. The guide boss portion 413c is inserted into the holding hole 451d of the second base unit 450, and the button shaft 452 is held in the holding hole 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 inside the tubular shape. Is slidably inserted. In this example, the operation button 410 is attached to the guide boss portion 413c so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction by the button shaft 452 of the second base unit 450 inserted from the rear.

[3-4g-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer circumference from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in a shape whose outer shape matches the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, and is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[3-4g-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 57, 69 to 71 and the like. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the second base unit 450 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. , The second effect operation unit 400A can be made to vibrate.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the board base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the board base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The decorative board unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the decorative board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400, and is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[3-4g-4. Second base unit]
The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 73 and the like. FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the second base unit of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A has an operation button 410 attached so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, and a door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached and attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415. It is something that can be done.

The second base unit 450 protrudes from the front surface of the unit base 451 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and the rear of the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c in the button base 413 of the operation button 410. An operation button spring through which four cylindrical button shafts 452 and four button shafts 452, which are slidably inserted from each other, are inserted and the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410 is urged forward. (Not shown), and three pressure detection sensors 454, which are attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 and detect each of the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410.

The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 has an annular main body 451a, a cover portion 451b that hemispherically protrudes rearward from the inner peripheral edge of the main body 451a, and a direction perpendicular to the front surface of the main body 451a. A through-hole 451c that penetrates the cover portion 451b back and forth in a substantially quadrangular shape extending vertically when viewed, four holding holes 451d that are recessed from the front surface to the rear of the main body portion 451a in a blind hole shape, and the main body portion 451a. The upper bearing portion 451e, which is recessed in a semicircular shape (U-shape) from the front to the rear in the upper part of the main body portion 451a, and the upper bearing portion 451e, which is vertically recessed from the front to the rear in the lower part of the main body portion 451a, are semicircular in coaxial with the upper bearing portion 451e. A pair of rotation restricting portions 451g that are formed on both the left and right sides of the upper bearing portion 451e on the upper front surface of the main body portion 451a and the lower bearing portion 451f that is recessed in a (U shape) shape to regulate the rotation of the screen unit 470. And have.

The annular main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 has an inner circumference and an outer circumference formed in substantially the same size as the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420 formed in a C shape. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a. The cover portion 451b is formed in a size that can be accommodated without contact when the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A, which is rotatably attached by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, rotates. There is. The through-hole 451c is formed in a size that allows the projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A to pass through from behind.

The four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 are formed at the four corners of the front surface of the main body portion 451a at the upper, lower, left, and right corners at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The inner diameter of these holding holes 451d is larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted. A button shaft 452 is mounted coaxially with the central axis of these four holding holes 451d. The front end of the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d protrudes forward from the front surface of the main body portion 451a. By inserting the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d into the tubular guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410, the operation button 410 can be slidably attached in the front-rear direction via the guide boss portion 413c. Can be done.

The upper left holding hole 451d of the four holding holes 451d is counterclockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the direction. Further, the holding hole 451d on the upper right side of the four holding holes 451d is clockwise from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410) with respect to the center of the unit base 451. It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 451d arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 451d are formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 451 with respect to the two upper holding holes 451d. ..

Further, operation button springs (not shown) are inserted into the four holding holes 451d, respectively, and the front ends of these operation button springs come into contact with the rear ends of the guide boss portion 413c, so that the operation buttons are inserted through the guide boss portion 413c. The 410 is being urged forward.

The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 are formed in a U shape with the front open and extending rearward. The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f are coaxially located at the center of a portion extending in a semicircular shape. In the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A are inserted from the front side, and then the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are inserted from the front side. Is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a, so that the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be rotatably supported.

The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 pass through the central axis of the semicircular portion of the upper bearing portion 451e in which the extension line (face) thereof is recessed rearward in a U shape on the front surface thereof. It is formed so as to be separated from each other in a predetermined angle circumferential direction with the central axis as the center. The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g regulate the rotation range of the screen unit 470 by abutting the stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 in a state of being assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. There is. In the present embodiment, the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted to an angle range of 90 degrees by a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

Although not shown, magnets are embedded in each pair of rotation restricting portions 451g, and by magnetically adhering to an iron plate attached to the stopper 475b, they come into contact with the rotation restricting portions 451g. The stopper 475b is made difficult to separate from the rotation restricting portion 451g. Therefore, the magnet in the rotation restricting portion 451g and the iron plate of the stopper 475b allow the screen unit 470 to be in the first position with the main screen 471 facing forward, or the second with the sub screen 472 facing forward. The screen unit 470 can be held in any of the positions, and the movement of the screen unit 470 to rotate due to the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the vibration by the vibration motor 424 is suppressed on the door frame side. The effect image by the second effect display device 460A can be enjoyed in a good state.

The three pressure detection sensors 454 are attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410. More specifically, the three pressure detection sensors 454 remain on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 451d and the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 451d. One of them is attached to the lower right side of the lower left holding hole 451d, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 454 are mounted at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 451. These three pressure detection sensors 454 can detect the three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

[3-4g-5. Door frame side second production display device]
The door frame side second effect display device 460A of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached to the second base unit 450 and can show the effect image to the player through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display device 460A includes a screen unit 470 rotatably attached around an axis extending vertically by an upper bearing portion 451e and a lower bearing portion 451f of the second base unit 450, and a second base. The upper bearing member 480, which is mounted on the upper front surface of the unit 450 and rotatably mounts the upper side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450, and the lower front surface of the second base unit 450 are mounted. It includes a lower bearing member 485 that rotatably attaches the lower side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450.

Further, the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side rotates the screen unit 470 and is installed in the rotation drive unit 490 attached to the upper part of the second base unit 450 and in the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450. A projector 500 that is arranged and capable of projecting an effect image onto the screen unit 470 from the rear, and a projector 500 are attached, and the rear surface of the unit base 451 is attached so as to cover the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450 from the rear side. The box-shaped projector mounting member 505 whose front is open and the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 are mounted so as to cover from above on the left side of the rotation drive unit 490 in the upper part of the second base unit 450 when viewed from the front. The upper cover 506 is provided, and two rotation detection sensors 507 attached to the upper cover 506 and detecting the rotation position (rotation position) of the screen unit 470 are provided.

[3-4g-5a. Screen unit]
The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is rotatably attached to the second base unit 450 around an axis extending vertically, and the effect image is projected from the projector 500. The effect image can be displayed (projected) so as to be visible to the player.

The screen unit 470 has a semi-cylindrical shape, a milky white and translucent main screen 471, and a disk shape having one end side in the axial direction of the main screen 471 as a part of the outer circumference, and the central portion is an axis. The sub-screen 472, which is curved so as to bulge outward in the direction, is milky white and has translucency, and the main screen 471 protrudes in a columnar shape from the center of both ends in the axial direction to the outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. Penetrates the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474, the operating gear member 475 attached to the tip of the upper shaft member 473 and having gear teeth 475a formed over substantially half of the outer circumference, and the sub-screen 472. A sub-screen decorative member 476 (see FIGS. 74 and 75, etc.) formed in a relief shape that is transparent and imitates a predetermined character (skull), and a sub-screen 472 that is attached to the back surface side of the sub-screen 472. The sub-screen decorative substrate 477 (see FIG. 75, etc.) on which a plurality of LEDs 477a are mounted on the surface facing the screen and the end of the main screen 471 opposite to the sub-screen 472 toward the central axis of the main screen 471. It is provided with a semi-arc-shaped peripheral decorative member 478 that extends shortly.

The semi-cylindrical main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is formed to have a radius smaller than the inner diameter of the annular main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The length of the main screen 471 in the axial direction is formed to be about 4/3 times the radius of the semi-cylindrical shape. The main screen 471 is decorated so that both ends in the axial direction are bordered by the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub screen 472 and the peripheral decoration member 478.

The sub-screen 472 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape coincides with the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 when viewed from the direction in which the central axis extends (see FIG. 74 (b)). .. The sub-screen 472 is formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width from the outer circumference to the center side, and the peripheral decoration portion 472a in which a plurality of square pyramid-shaped irregularities are arranged in the circumferential direction and the inside of the peripheral decoration portion 472a are closed. It is provided with a curved surface-shaped screen general portion 472b. The peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472 is formed in a truncated cone shape as a whole so that the inner peripheral side projects in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen general portion 472b bulges in a spherical shape having a radius larger than the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 in the direction away from the main screen 471. A through hole is formed in the general screen portion 472b of the sub screen 472, and a sub screen decorative member 476 is attached so as to close the hole.

The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are respectively inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 and are rotatably attached.

The operating gear member 475 protrudes outward from one of the gear teeth 475a formed over substantially half a circumference by meshing with the second transmission gear 495 of the rotary drive unit 490 and the circumferential end of the gear teeth 475a. The stopper 475b is provided with a detection piece 475c that protrudes outward in a flat plate shape from the side opposite to the stopper 475b at the circumferential end of the gear tooth 475a. The stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 is located in the recess 481a of the upper bearing member 480 which is recessed in an arc shape about the axis of the upper shaft member 473 in the state of being assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A. The rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted by contacting the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 located at both ends in the recess 481a.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, an iron plate is attached to a portion of the stopper 475b that comes into contact with the rotation restricting portion 451g, and this iron plate can be magnetized with a magnet embedded in the rotation restricting portion 451g. It has become like.

The screen unit 470 can rotate between a first position with the main screen 471 facing forward and a second position with the subscreen 472 facing forward. The detection piece 475c is detected by the rotation detection sensor 507 attached to the upper cover 506.

The sub-screen decorative member 476 is attached to the screen general portion 472b of the sub-screen 472. The sub-screen decorative member 476 is formed in a relief shape imitating a skull by a transparent member, and since the plate thickness thereof changes in a complicated manner, the transmitted light is intricately refracted and the rear can be visually recognized. It's getting harder. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the sub-screen decorative member 476 has the characters "PUSH" formed in a relief imitating a skull.

The sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is attached to the back surface side of the sub-screen 472 so as to form a gap between the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 and the sub-screen 472, and a plurality of LEDs 477a are attached to the front surface side (the side facing the sub-screen 472). Is implemented. The outer shape of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is smaller than that of the sub-screen decorative member 476, and the surface of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is white. By emitting light from the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477, the sub-screen decorative member 476 and the sub-screen 472 can be light-emitting and decorated. More specifically, the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 can strongly illuminate the "eyes" portion of the skull and the character portion of "PUSH" by emitting light from the LED 477a.

Further, since the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is arranged relatively close to the sub-screen 472 and does not have a member for diffusing light between the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 and the sub-screen 472, the LED 477a is made to emit light. , The player can recognize the point light source of the LED 477a. Further, the subscreen decorative substrate 477 can block the light from the projector 500. Therefore, the projector 500 can project the shadow of the subscreen decorative substrate 477 on the subscreen 472.

The peripheral decoration member 478 is formed in the same shape as a part of the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472, and similarly to the peripheral decoration portion 472a, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped irregularities are provided in a row in the circumferential direction of the arc. ..

As described above, the screen unit 470 includes two different screens, such as the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. The main screen 471 is intended to display an effect image that is projected from the projector 500 over the entire semi-cylindrical shape and attracts the attention of the player by the projection from the projector 500. On the other hand, the sub-screen 472 has a narrow range (narrower than the main screen 471) in which the effect image from the projector 500 forms the periphery of the central sub-screen decorative member 476 due to the presence of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 in the center on the back side. The purpose is to display an effect image that is projected onto the sub-screen decorative member 476 and brightly colors the surroundings of the sub-screen decorative member 476, and the operation button 410 is pressed by the player by the light emitting decoration of the sub-screen decorative member 476 using the LED 477a. The purpose is to encourage people.

[3-4g-5b. Upper bearing member and lower bearing member]
The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are the main body portions of the unit base 451 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f which are open to the front in the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. It is attached to the front surface of the 451a. Further, in the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 are inserted into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 from the front, respectively. By attaching to the front surface of the unit base 451 the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 can be rotatably attached to the second base unit 450.

The upper bearing member 480 is a bearing member 481 attached to the upper portion of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e whose front side is open, and the bearing member. It includes a frame top lens decorative substrate 482 attached to the upper front surface of the 481. The bearing member 481 has a recess 481a that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear surface to the front so that the center in the left-right direction is the deepest. The recess 481a of the bearing member 481 in the upper bearing member 480 is recessed in an arc shape centered on the shaft core of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470 in a state of being assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A, and the screen is internally formed. A stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 in the unit 470 is inserted and arranged, and a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 are located at both ends of the arc of the recess 481a. The arc-shaped recessed 481a allows the stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 to rotate satisfactorily between the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

The frame top lens decorative substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface side, and is located behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 in a state of being assembled to the second production operation unit 400A. ing. As a result, the frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting the LED of the frame top lens decoration substrate 482.

The lower bearing member 485 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front of the lower bearing portion 451f. By attaching the lower bearing member 485 to the front surface of the unit base 451 in a state where the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 is inserted into the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, the lower shaft member 474 Can be mounted rotatably.

[3-4g-5c. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 490 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The rotation drive unit 490 is attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, and can rotate the screen unit 470. The rotary drive unit 490 includes a unit case 491 that is mounted on the upper surface of the unit base 451 and has a hollow inside, and a switching drive motor 492 that is mounted on the lower surface of the unit case 491 and whose rotary shaft projects into the unit case 491. , A spur gear-shaped drive gear fixed to the rotating shaft of the switching drive motor (not shown) and a spur gear-shaped first spur gear that meshes with the drive gear and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. The transmission gear (not shown) meshes with the first transmission gear and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491 so that it can mesh with the gear teeth 475a of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470. It is provided with a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 495.

The rotation drive unit 490 is assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A, and the second transmission gear 495 meshes with the gear teeth 475a of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470. The rotary drive unit 490 rotates the switching drive motor 492 to rotate the screen unit 470 around the axis extending back and forth via the drive gear, the first transmission gear, the second transmission gear 495, and the gear teeth 475a. It can be rotated.

[3-4g-5d. projector]
The projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The projector 500 is arranged in the hemispherical cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 via the projector mounting member 505. The projector 500 can project and display the effect image on the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 by irradiating the effect image toward the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470.

The projector 500 includes a cubic projector body 501 that is attached to the projector mounting member 505, and a lens unit 502 that projects forward in a columnar shape from the projector body 501 and irradiates an effect image forward from the front end.

In this projector 500, the rear portion of the projector main body 501 is attached to the projector mounting member 505, and the lens portion 502 and the projector main body 501 are arranged in the cover portion 451b through the through hole 451c of the unit base 451 from the rear side. It is installed like this.

The projector 500 can project an effect image over substantially the front surface of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470, and can project and display a still image or a moving image as the effect image. The projector 500 is a commercially available liquid crystal projector and has an autofocus function.

[3-4g-5e. Projector mounting member]
The projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The projector mounting member 505 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the projector 500 is mounted inside and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. By mounting the projector mounting member 505 on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, it is possible to cover the cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 and the rear side of the projector 500.

The projector mounting member 505 has a bottom wall extending in the horizontal direction and a rear wall extending in the vertical direction, so that the projector 500 can be mounted in a state of being tilted so as to match the tilt of the operation button 410. .. A plurality of slits 505a penetrating the front and rear are formed on the rear wall of the projector mounting member 505, and the heat released from the projector 500 can be discharged to the outside through the slits 505a.

The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are mounted on the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 when viewed from the front.

[3-4g-5f. Top cover and rotation detection sensor]
The upper cover 506 and the rotation detection sensor 507 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper cover 506 is attached to the upper surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 so as to cover the upper side of the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotation detection sensor 507 is for detecting the rotation position of the screen unit 470, and is attached to the lower surface of the upper cover 506 in a state of being separated from each other.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are mounted at positions separated from each other by a rotation angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction about the rotation axis of the screen unit 470, and the operating gear in the screen unit 470. The detection piece 475c of the member 475 can be detected. Specifically, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are the detection piece 475c when the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is in the first position facing forward, and the detection piece 475c in the second position where the sub screen 472 is facing forward. The time detection piece 475c and the time detection piece 475c can be detected respectively. The rotation drive of the switching drive motor 492 of the rotation drive unit 490 is controlled based on the detection signals of the detection piece 475c by these two rotation detection sensors 507.

[3-4g-6. Buffer unit]
The buffer unit 510 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The buffer unit 510 is attached to the lower surface of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side, and cushions the impact when the second effect operation unit 400A is hit from above to reduce the impact of the dish unit cover in the dish unit 320. It is transmitted to the bottom plate portion 326i of 326.

The cushioning unit 510 is in contact with the elastically deformable flat cushioning member 511, whose upper surface is in contact with the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and the lower surface of the cushioning member 511. It includes a cushioning base 512 that is mounted so as to be relatively accessible to the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505.

The cushioning base 512 of the cushioning unit 510 includes a flat plate-shaped main body 512a that abuts on the lower surface of the cushioning member 511, and leg pieces that project downward from both left and right sides of the main body 512a and extend in the front-rear direction. 512b and. The leg piece portion 512b of the cushioning base 512 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

In this cushioning unit 510, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the projector mounting member 505 attached to the base unit 430 compresses the cushioning member 511 in the cushioning unit 510. Move down to. The impact is absorbed by compressing the cushioning member 511. Then, when the projector mounting member 505 moves further downward, the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 comes into contact with the upper surface side of the main body portion 512a of the cushioning base 512. Since the left and right leg pieces 512b form a gap between the main body 512a and the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the dish unit cover 326, the projector mounting member is in contact with the upper surface side of the main body 512a. When the 505 moves further downward, the flat plate-shaped main body portion 512a bends, and the impact can be absorbed by the bending of the main body portion 512a. Further, when the projector mounting member 505 moves downward, the lower surface of the main body portion 512a that is bent downward comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, and further bending of the main body portion 512a is restricted. , The impact will be transmitted to the dish unit cover 326. In this way, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly hit from above, the impact can be absorbed in multiple stages, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 or the effect operating unit mounting portion of the dish unit cover 326 can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent the 326a and the like from being subjected to an unreasonable force and prevent their damage.

[3-4g-7. Action effect of the second production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77 and the like. FIG. 74 (a) is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and FIG. 74 (b) is a sub of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which saw the 2nd effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends with the screen facing forward. Further, FIG. 75 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK in FIG. 74 (b). FIG. 76 (a) shows the second effect operation unit hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the view seen from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button with the main screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is trying to show, (b) shows the part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd effect operation unit in the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing. In FIG. 77 (a), the second effect operation unit is hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the view seen from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button with the sub screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is trying to show, (b) shows the part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd effect operation unit in the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing.

The second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment changes the decoration in the operation button 410 or changes the operation button according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. The effect image can be displayed in the 410 to entertain the player, and the player can be made to operate the operation button 410 to participate in the effect presented to the player. is there.

The total height of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed to be substantially the same as the height of the portion below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Further, the total width of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the total width of the door frame 3. The second effect operation unit 400A is arranged in the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

In the second effect operation unit 400A, the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The second effect operation unit 400A is between the lower end of the leg piece portion 512b of the cushioning base 512 of the cushioning unit 510 and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 in a state of being attached to the dish unit 320. A gap is formed in. That is, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed so that it becomes. As a result, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the central axis CL (see FIG. 67) of the transparent operation button 410 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) becomes a vertical line. It is tilted at an angle of 63 degrees so that it moves upward as it moves forward. As a result, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is arranged above the plate unit 320 (second production operation unit 400A). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the second effect operation unit 400A (operation button 410), the operation button 410 can be viewed from the front (projected view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). The operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

In the second effect operation unit 400A, the button shaft 452 held in the four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 is slid on the four tubular guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410, respectively. It is movably inserted and is urged forward by an operation button spring (not shown). In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the second effect operation unit 400A causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be the frame unit 415 due to the urging force of the operation button spring. It is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface of the frame body 416 of the above.

In the normal state, the second effect operation unit 400A has the center side (central axis CL side) from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. It is protruding. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the shape of a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , The frame unit 415 projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 67 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (front end) is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of the 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is formed to be much larger than that of the operation button for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. It is likely to be done. More specifically, the operation buttons for effect in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment is performed. Since the central axis CL of the button 410 is attached at an angle with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, the button 410 is separated from the central axis CL of the operation button 410. The part will be pressed (see FIG. 61).

By the way, in the operation buttons for directing in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface to be pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the part to be pressed is a flat surface. , If you press a part that is off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed will tilt so that the pressed part will retract first, and the operation button will not be able to retract straight, so you can press the operation button. There is a risk that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which the portion (button lens 411) to be pressed by the player is bulged forward. Because of the shape), when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. You can fully enjoy the production of operation.

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, the second effect operation unit 400A is suspended. Since only the upper part is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the mounted part. Since it is generated, the entire second effect operation unit 400A can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is in contact with the second effect operation unit 400A. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly under the position (near the upper part of the operation button 410) where the player can press the operation button relatively easily, the vibration is strong against the player who is pressing the operation button 410. Can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. A buffer unit 510 is arranged between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface of the portion 326i. The cushioning unit 510 includes a cushioning member 511 that is elastically deformable, and forms a gap between the main body portion 512a in which the cushioning member 511 is in contact with the upper surface and the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the impact is applied in multiple stages due to elastic deformation (compression) of the cushioning member 511, bending of the main body 512a of the cushioning base 512, and the like. It can be absorbed, and it is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the effect operating unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., and the second effect operating unit 400A, etc. is damaged. Can be prevented. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation is performed. Since the button 410, the second production operation unit 400A, etc. are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the deterioration of the player's interest, and make it difficult to be damaged. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses and operates is formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) that protrudes forward, it is compared with the case where the button lens is flat. The strength and rigidity are high, and even if the lens is hit hard, the impact can be dispersed throughout the button lens 411, making it less likely to be damaged.

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, and the frame top lens 418 are made of transparent members, the first button decoration portion formed on the back surface side thereof. The decoration due to the unevenness of the 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the like can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) (see FIG. 63). In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to see the rear side through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. ..

Since the second effect operation unit 400A includes a first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, a plurality of the first button decoration portions 411a are provided. By decorating the unevenness by combining the triangles of the above, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear part at the outer peripheral edge portion of the portion inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rearward in the CL direction of the central axis), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the second effect display device on the door frame side. A gap is located between the 460A and the outer periphery of the screen unit 470, but the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap allows the front side (player side) to be seen from the front side (player side) to the outside or rear side of the screen unit 470. It is possible to make the members of the door difficult to see. As a result, even if the door frame side second effect display device 460A is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating, and the player who sees the operation button 410 can see the operation button 410. It is possible to prevent discomfort, and the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be arranged without any problem in the transparent operation button 410, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

More specifically, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the door frame side second effect display device 460A by the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. The second base unit 450, the upper shaft member 473, the lower shaft member 474, etc., which are located on the rear side (back side) outside the outer circumference of the main screen 471, the sub screen 472, etc., pass through the transparent button lens 411 from the player side. It is formed so that it cannot be seen. Specifically, in the state of the first position with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the upper and lower outer sides of the main screen 471, the left outer side of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472, and the right side of the peripheral decorative member 478. The outer part (the part of the crosshatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 76) is hidden from the player side.

On the other hand, in the state of the second position with the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the outer portion of the annular peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 (in FIG. 76, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line). ) Is hidden from the player's side. As described above, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, it is difficult to see the outside and the back side of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. It can be hidden, and the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the second production operation unit 400A as a whole can be improved.

Further, in the state of the first position where the main screen 471 faces forward, the screen general part of the sub screen 472 is formed by the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, the button frame 412, etc. of the button lens 411. The 472b and the sub-screen decorative member 476, and the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are difficult to see (see FIG. 76). This makes it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the sub screen 472 and the fact that the main screen 471 can be rotated. Therefore, when the screen unit 470 is rotated to switch from the main screen 471 to the sub screen 472, the operation is performed. A movement exceeding the player's expectation can be performed in the button 410 to give a strong impact to the player, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, in the state of the second position in which the sub screen 472 faces forward, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft are formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like of the button lens 411. The member 474 is difficult to see (see FIG. 77). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the sub-screen 472 (sub-screen decorative member 476) is rotatable, so that the impact when the sub-screen 472 (screen unit 470) is rotated can be increased. It can entertain the player.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is a button lens 411 capable of visually recognizing the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged on the rear side of the operation button 410, from the inner circumference to the center side of the button frame 412. A polyhedral first button decorative portion 411a that combines a plurality of triangular surfaces within a predetermined width is provided, and a door frame side second effect display arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410 is provided. The device 460A is provided with a peripheral decoration portion 472a of a sub-screen 472 in which a plurality of square weights are arranged in a row, and a peripheral decoration member 478. As a result, the triangular decoration (first button decoration portion 411a) arranged on the front side and the quadrangular decoration (peripheral decoration portion 472a and peripheral decoration member 478) arranged on the rear side overlap each other so as to intersect with each other. It is possible to show the complicated geometric pattern to the player, improve the appearance, and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, as described above, since the first button decoration portion 411a mainly composed of a triangle, the peripheral decoration portion 472a mainly composed of a quadrangle, and the peripheral decoration member 478 are separated in the front-rear direction, the player's eyes As the position moves, the degree of overlap between them changes, so the geometric patterns that appear to overlap change, making it possible to show the player a moving decoration, and at the same time, the player can create a deep, three-dimensional decoration. It can be shown to the player and can entertain the player.

Further, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410, the screen unit 470 is rotated by the driving of the switching drive motor 492 to turn the main screen 471 forward, or the sub screen. The 472 can be turned forward, and the decoration consisting of a plurality of squares can be changed. More specifically, when the main screen 471 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the peripheral decorative portion 472a and the peripheral decorative member 478 are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and are vertically extended. A geometric pattern decoration in which the decoration consisting of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a row traverses the decoration consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a in the button lens 411. It can be shown to the player. On the other hand, when the sub-screen 472 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the peripheral decorative portion 472a is in a state in which the peripheral decorative portion 472a is elongated in an annular shape, and the decoration is composed of a plurality of square weights arranged in a circular shape. However, it is possible to show the player the decoration of the geometric pattern that overlaps with the decoration consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Therefore, by rotating the screen unit 470, the decoration (physical decoration) of the operation button 410 can be changed, so that the player's interest can be attracted to the operation button 410 by the change of the decoration, or the decoration can be changed. The change can make the player suggest the arrival of an opportunity, etc., and can entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is a screen having different screens (main screen 471 and sub screen 472) that can be switched to the door frame side second effect display device 460A provided in the operation button 410. Since the unit 470 and the projector 500 for projecting and displaying the effect image on the screen unit 470 are provided, it is possible to display an effect image completely different from the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device, which has a strong impact on the player. Can be given and entertained. More specifically, in the screen unit 470, the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 having the disk-shaped and relief-shaped sub-screen decorative member 476 in the center are the centers of the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474. It is provided so as to be separated from the axis by a rotation angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction.

Then, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, in the state of the first position where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the semi-cylindrical central axis is positioned so as to extend in the left-right direction. When viewed from the front, it looks like a quadrangle (rectangle) extending vertically (see FIG. 74 (a)). When the effect image is projected forward from the projector 500 arranged behind the main screen 471, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the main screen 471 (see FIG. 75 (a)), and is milky white having translucency. Through the main screen 471 of the above, the effect image projected from the front side can be visually recognized. Since the surface of the main screen 471 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a smooth surface, the display screen of the effect image is also curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. As a result, while the display screen of a general liquid crystal display device is flat, the display screen of the main screen 471 is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape, so that the player can see the conventional display screen at first glance. It is possible to recognize that it is different from the above, to surprise the player, and to draw the player's attention to the main screen 471, and to entertain the effect image projected on the main screen 471. be able to.

On the other hand, in the state of the second position in which the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the disk-shaped central axis substantially coincides with the central axis of the operation button 410, and the circular operation button 410 is viewed from the front. A sub-screen decorative member 476 that imitates a skull appears to be located in the center (see FIG. 74 (b)). When the effect image is projected forward from the projector 500 arranged at the rear in this state, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the sub screen 472. By the way, since the flat and translucent sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is attached to the rear side of the sub-screen 472, the effect image (light) emitted from the projector 500 at the portion of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477. Is blocked, and the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected on the central portion of the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 (see FIG. 75 (b)). Therefore, on the sub-screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 is projected and displayed on the outer peripheral portion excluding the central portion where the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected. At this time, when the LED 477a mounted on the front surface of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is made to emit light, the central portion of the sub-screen 472 can be light-emitting and decorated by the light, and the sub provided in the center of the sub-screen 472 is provided. The screen decoration member 476 can be light-emitting decorated. Further, by emitting the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477, the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 by the light from the projector 500 can be made difficult to see, and the front surface of the sub-screen 472 can be made difficult to see. The entire side can be brightly decorated with light emission.

The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side emits LED 477a of the sub screen decorative substrate 477 with the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, and displays the effect image (moving image) forward from the projector 500. When irradiated, the effect image is displayed on the part of the subscreen 472 where the shadow of the subscreen decorative substrate 477 is not projected, that is, the part outside the subscreen decoration member 476 made of decoration imitating a skull. The sub-screen decorative member 476, which is inside the sub-screen decorative member 476, is luminescently decorated by the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477. In this state, the outside of the light emitting decoration of the fixed sub-screen decorative member 476 is decorated with the effect image (moving image), and the decorative effect is completely different from the light emitting decoration of the decorative member in the conventional pachinko machine. It can be shown to the player, can give a strong impact to the player, and can strongly draw the player's attention to the sub-screen 472. Further, in this state, the light of the LED 477a shines brighter (with higher brightness) than the brightness of the production image inside the production image, so that the production image is partially bright, which cannot be achieved by the conventional liquid crystal display device. Can be displayed, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and a production image that makes the player more entertaining can be displayed.

Further, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, the screen facing forward is rotated in an appropriate direction in a state where the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500, and the main screen 471 is changed to the sub screen 472. When the sub-screen 472 is changed to the main screen 471, the part located in the projection range of the projector 500 on the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 while the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 are rotating. The effect image is projected and displayed on the screen. That is, the effect image is displayed so as to straddle the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. Therefore, when the main screen 471 is slowly changed to the sub screen 472, a mysterious visual effect is produced in which the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the sub screen decoration member 476 rotate and move on the effect image projected from the projector 500. It can be shown to the player and can entertain the player.

As described above, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the decoration of the screen unit 470 in the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A (peripheral decoration portion 472a and peripheral decoration member 478). As a result, it is possible to show the player a moving and three-dimensional decoration, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A can irradiate the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 on which the LED 477a is mounted on the front surface and the light such as the effect image to the front behind the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412). The door frame side second effect display device 460A is provided with the projector 500, and the inside of the operation button 410 can be satisfactorily light-emitting and decorated by the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

Further, behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410, the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 of the decorative substrate unit 420 The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are arranged, and by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are light-emitting and decorated. be able to. As shown in FIG. 68, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. It is located between the tubular inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d, and the operation is performed. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outside. The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light of the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the tubular inner tubular portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. It is located so that the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. ..

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the frame top lens decorative substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and the frame. By emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the top lens decoration substrate 482, the frame top lens 418 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has display screens having different forms from each other by rotating the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410. The effect image can be displayed by switching to the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472, and the player can be presented with an effect that the shape of the display screen changes (switches), which is not possible with a conventional pachinko machine. , Can give a strong impact to the player and entertain.

[3-4h. Overall configuration of the third embodiment of the production operation unit]
Next, the third effect operation unit 400B, which is the third embodiment of the effect operation unit 400, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 78 to 85 and the like. 78 (a) is a front view of the third effect operation unit having a different embodiment from the effect operation unit and the second effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 77, and FIG. 78 (b) is a right side surface of the third effect operation unit. It is a figure. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the third effect operation unit. FIG. 80A is a perspective view of the third effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 80B is a perspective view of the third effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an explanatory view of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 82 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 79 (a). FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 78 (b). FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the third effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the third effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is a figure.

The third effect operation unit 400B can be attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit 320 in place of the above-mentioned effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A. The third effect operation unit 400B can be pressed by the player in the same manner as the effect operation unit 400. Hereinafter, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the same components as the effect operation unit 400 will be described with the same reference numerals.

The third effect operation unit 400B has a circular outer shape and a transparent central side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed and operated by the player, and the plate unit cover 326 that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit mounting portion 326a, and a decorative substrate unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415. , The third base unit 520 which is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front side, and the third base unit 520 which can be visually recognized from the player side through the operation button 410. It is provided with a decorative rotating body unit 530 attached to the.

[3-4h-1. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. The operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparently formed. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer circumference is circular and the central side bulges forward, and the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It includes an annular button frame 412 attached to the front side and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411.

The operation button 410 of the third carry-out operation unit 400B has the same configuration as the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, has the same reference numerals, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[3-4h-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer circumference from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in a shape whose outer shape matches the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 has a circular central opening 416a, a plurality of outer peripheral openings 416b arranged in a row along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a, and a notch formed by a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. The frame-shaped frame body 416 having the portion 416c and attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320, and the frame main body 416 so as to close the outer peripheral opening 416b are attached from the rear side. It includes a pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame body 416 from the front side so as to close the notch 416c.

The frame unit 415 of the third effect operation unit 400B has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, and is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[3-4h-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the third base unit 520 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. , The third effect operation unit 400B can be made to vibrate.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the board base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the board base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are the first LED 422a and the first LED 423a capable of emitting and decorating only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410, and the frame side of the frame unit 415. It includes a second LED 422b and a second LED 423b that can illuminate and decorate only the lens 417.

The decorative board unit 420 of the third effect operation unit 400B has the same configuration as the decorative board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400, and is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[3-4h-4. Third base unit]
The third base unit 520 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86 is a perspective view of the third base unit of the third effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The third base unit 520 of the third effect operation unit 400B has an operation button 410 attached so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, and a decorative rotating body unit 530 is attached and is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415. ..

The third base unit 520 is composed of a housing wall portion 521a that is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and is hemispherically recessed rearward in the central portion, and a blind hole that is opened forward on the outside of the housing wall portion 521a. An annular unit base 521 having one holding hole 521b, a frame top lens decorative substrate 522 attached to the upper front surface of the unit base 521, and four inserted into each of the four holding holes 521b of the unit base 521. The operation button spring 523, the three sensor holders 524 attached to the front surface of the unit base 521, the three pressure detection sensors 525 attached to each sensor holder 524 to detect the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the unit. The third effect operation unit relay board 526 attached to the rear side of the base 521 and the relay board cover 527 attached to the rear side of the unit base 521 so as to cover the rear side of the third effect operation unit relay board 526. And have.

Further, the third base unit 520 has a spur gear shape attached to the rotation shafts of the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 attached to the left side surface of the unit base 521 and the effect operation unit first drive motor 528. It includes a first drive gear (not shown) and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 529 that meshes with the first drive gear and is rotatably attached to the unit base 521. The first transmission gear 529 meshes with the rotating body gear 531a of the decorative rotating body unit 530 described later.

The unit base 521 has a substantially circular outer shape, and is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. In addition to the accommodating wall portion 521a and the holding hole 521b, the unit base 521 accommodates the accommodating wall portion 521c, which projects forward in a flat plate shape from the lower side of the portion where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 is attached at the upper front surface. A plurality of ventilation ports 521d penetrating the wall portion 521a, a left protruding portion 521e protruding forward from substantially the center in the vertical direction on the left outer side of the accommodating wall portion 521a, and accommodating so as to face the left protruding portion 521e. 521g of the right protruding portion 521f projecting forward from the right outer side of the wall portion 521a and substantially the center in the vertical direction, 521g of the left shaft portion extending in a columnar shape from the left protruding portion 521e to the right, and an extension of the left shaft portion 521g. A right bearing portion 521h that coaxially penetrates the right protruding portion 521f with respect to the axis (first axis CL1) is provided.

The accommodating wall portion 521a that is hemispherically recessed to the rear of the unit base 521 is formed so that substantially half of the rear side of the decorative rotating body unit 530 can be accommodated on the recessed front surface side without contact.

The four holding holes 521b of the unit base 521 are formed at four corners on the outer side of the housing wall portion 521a at the upper, lower, left, and right corners corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The inner diameter of these holding holes 521b is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be slidably inserted.

More specifically, the holding hole 521b on the upper left side of the four holding holes 521b is from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 521 (the center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 521. It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. Further, the holding hole 521b on the upper right side of the four holding holes 521b is clockwise from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 521 (the center of the operation button 410) with respect to the center of the unit base 521. It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 521b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 521b are formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 521 with respect to the two upper holding holes 521b, respectively. ..

The light-shielding wall portion 521c of the unit base 521 can prevent the light from the frame top lens decorative substrate 522 from leaking downward, so that the frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting and decorated only by the frame top lens decorative substrate 522. It is for doing.

The left end of the unit base 521 g is rotatably inserted into the rotating body side left bearing portion 531b of the decorative rotating body unit 530 from which the left end extending horizontally is fixed to the left protruding portion 521e. It is a thing. Further, in the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521, the cylindrical right shaft portion 531c on the rotating body side of the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotatably inserted into the inside. The left shaft portion 521g and the right bearing portion 521h are arranged coaxially with respect to the first axis CL1 (see FIG. 83) extending in the horizontal direction. The left shaft portion 521g and the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521 allow the decorative rotating body unit 530 to be rotatably attached around the first axis CL1 extending in the horizontal direction.

A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 522, and the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from these LEDs. Further, the front surface of the lame top lens decorative substrate 522 is white, and the mounted LED is a full-color LED.

The operation button spring 523 is a coil spring, and is inserted from the front into the four holding holes 521b in the unit base 521. When the operation button spring 523 is assembled to the third effect operation unit 400B, the rear end is in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 521b, and the front end protrudes rearward from the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. It is in contact with the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c. These operation button springs 523 urge the operation button 410 forward.

The three pressure detection sensors 525 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410. More specifically, in the front surface of the unit base 521, one of the three pressure detection sensors 525 is on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 521b, the other is on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 521b, and the other one is on the lower left side. It is attached to the lower right side of the holding hole 521b of the above via the sensor holder 524, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 525 are mounted at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 521. These three pressure detection sensors 525 can detect the three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

The third effect operation unit relay board 526 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 521 on the left outer side (right side of the front view) of the accommodating wall portion 521a in a rear view. The third effect operation unit relay board 526 includes an operation button left outer decorative board 422, an operation button right outer decorative board 423, a vibration motor 424, a frame top lens decorative board 522, a pressure detection sensor 525, and an effect operation unit first drive motor 528. , The effect operation unit of the decorative rotating body unit 530, the second drive motor 534, the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535, the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536, and the door body relay substrate of the door frame base unit 100 (not shown). It is for relaying the connection of.

The relay board cover 527 extends from the lower end of the portion covering the rear side of the third effect operation unit relay board 526 to the left in the front view, and includes a leg portion 527a attached to the lower rear surface of the unit base 521. The leg portion 527a of the relay board cover 527 extends substantially horizontally on the lower surface when assembled on the door frame 3, and is between the leg portion 527a and the bottom plate portion 326i forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320. A slight gap is formed in (see FIG. 26). As a result, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the frame unit 415 is used until the lower surface of the leg portion 527a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. After the lower surface of the leg portion 527a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the movement of the third effect operation unit 400B is restricted downward, and the effect operation unit of the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the dish unit cover 326. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the mounting portion 326a or the like and prevent their damage.

The first drive motor 528 of the effect operation unit is attached to the left side surface of the unit base 521, and the left shaft portion 521 g of the unit base 521 and the left shaft portion 521 g of the unit base 521 via the first drive gear (not shown) and the first transmission gear 529. The decorative rotating body unit 530 rotatably attached by the right bearing portion 521h can be rotated around the first axis CL1 extending in the horizontally direction.

[3-4h-5. Decorative rotating body unit]
The decorative rotating body unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85 and 87. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the decorative rotating body unit of the third effect operating unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the decorative rotating body unit of the third effect operating unit as viewed from the rear. The decorative rotating body unit 530 is attached to the third base unit 520, and can show the player a movable effect through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. As shown in the figure, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is formed to have a substantially spherical outer surface shape as a whole.

The decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotatably attached to the unit base 521 of the third base unit 520, and is one of the rotating body base unit 531 formed in a disk shape and the disk-shaped rotating body base unit 531. The first decorative surface portion 532 rotatably attached to the outside of the surface and the first decorative surface portion 532 rotatably attached to the outside of the surface opposite to the first decorative surface portion 532 of the rotating body base unit 531. The second decorative surface portion 533, which has a different decoration from the 532, and the second drive motor 534 of the effect operation unit, which is mounted in the rotating body base unit 531 and for rotating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 ( (See FIG. 83).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is attached to one surface of the rotating body base unit 531 and has a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the first decorative surface portion 532. It is attached to the surface opposite to the mounted first decorative surface decorative substrate 535 and the first decorative surface decorative substrate 535 of the rotating body base unit 531 and can irradiate light toward the second decorative surface 533. It includes a second decorative surface decorative substrate 536 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

The rotating body base unit 531 has a disk shape having a predetermined thickness, and the inside is hollow. The rotating body base unit 531 is attached to a predetermined position on the outer peripheral surface and penetrates the spur gear-shaped rotating body gear 531a that meshes with the first transmission gear 529 of the third base unit 520 and the center of the rotating body gear 531a. The left bearing portion 531b on the rotating body side into which the left shaft portion 521g is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable and the left bearing portion 531b on the rotating body side are cylindrically projected from the outer peripheral surface on the opposite side to the rotating body gear 531a so that the left shaft portion 521g can be relatively rotated in the right bearing portion 521h. It includes a right shaft portion 531c on the rotating body side to be inserted, and a stopper 531d protruding outward on the base end side of the right shaft portion 531c on the rotating body side.

The rotating body gear 531a, the rotating body side left bearing portion 531b, and the rotating body side right shaft portion 531c are orthogonal to the second axis CL2 passing through the disk-shaped center of the rotating body base unit 531 and pass through the axial center of the outer peripheral surface. It is arranged coaxially with respect to the uniaxial line CL1. The stopper 531d is formed so as to abut on the front surface of the unit base 521 of the third base unit 520. The stopper 531d regulates the rotation range around the first axis CL1 extending in the horizontal direction of the decorative rotating body unit 530 with respect to the third base unit 520 to a predetermined angle range (here, 180 degrees).

Further, the rotating body base unit 531 includes a bearing cylinder portion 531e that extends concentrically with the second axis CL2 passing through the disk-shaped center and extends in a cylindrical shape, and a plurality of peripheral surface decorative portions 531f that decorate the outer peripheral surface. , Is equipped. The bearing cylinder portion 531e has a shaft member 532d protruding from the first decorative surface portion 532 inserted therein, and the shaft member 532d can be rotatably attached by bushes attached to both ends. The peripheral surface decoration portion 531f penetrates the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 so that the heat inside the rotating body base unit 531 can be released to the outside and decorates the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531. It can improve the appearance.

Although not shown, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is mounted inside the rotating body base unit 531 and has a peripheral surface on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the peripheral surface decorative portion 531f are mounted. A decorative substrate may be provided. By appropriately emitting the LED of the peripheral surface decorative portion decorative substrate, the peripheral surface decorative portion 531f of the rotating body base unit 531 can be light-emitting and decorated.

The entire first decorative surface portion 532 is formed in a substantially hemispherical shape. The first decorative surface portion 532 has a logo decoration portion 532a composed of predetermined characters provided in the center of the bulging surface and a translucent first decorative portion 532a formed radially around the logo decoration portion 532a. A translucent first sub-decoration that is formed so as to fill the outer periphery of the first main decorative portion 532b and the first main decorative portion 532b, and the outer peripheral end forms the circular outer peripheral end of the first decorative surface portion 532. A portion 532c and a shaft member 532d projecting from the back surface in a columnar shape along the center are provided.

The logo decoration portion 532a and the first main decoration portion 532b are light-emitting and decorated by the light from the LED mounted on the first decoration surface portion decoration substrate 535. The shaft member 532d is rotatably inserted into the bearing cylinder portion 531e via a bush. The shaft member 532d is formed to have a length that penetrates the bearing cylinder portion 531e of the rotating body base unit 531 and extends to the opposite side in a state of being assembled to the decorative rotating body unit 530, and the central axis is the first axis. The state coincides with the second axis CL2 orthogonal to CL1.

The entire first decorative surface portion 532 can rotate around the second axis CL2 by attaching the shaft member 532d to the bearing cylinder portion 531e of the rotating body base unit 531.

The second decorative surface portion 533 is arranged between the rotating decorative portion 533a attached to the tip of the shaft member 532d of the first decorative surface portion 532, the rotating decorative portion 533a, and the rotating body base unit 531 and the rotating body base unit. It is provided with a fixed decorative portion 533b attached to 531. Since the rotary decoration portion 533a is attached to the shaft member 532d, it can rotate together with the first decorative surface portion 532 via the shaft member 532d, and can rotate around the second axis CL2. On the other hand, since the fixed decorative portion 533b is attached to the rotating body base unit 531, it does not rotate together with the first decorative surface portion 532 via the shaft member 532d, and does not rotate around the second axis.

The rotary decoration portion 533a is formed in a decorative shape having a plurality of fins (blades) in the circumferential direction, and has a plurality of decorations extending concentrically in the circumferential direction. The rotating decorative portion 533a can generate wind by rotating. The fixed decoration portion 533b is formed with a decoration having a plurality of lines extending radially. The rotating decorative portion 533a and the fixed decorative portion 533b are partially translucent, and are light-emitting decorated by the light from the LED mounted on the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536.

As shown in FIG. 83, the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 is installed in the rotating body base unit 531 so that the rotating shaft projects rearward. A spur gear-shaped second drive gear 534a is attached to the rotating shaft of the second drive motor 534 of the effect operation unit. The second drive gear 534a meshes with a spur gear-shaped decorative surface gear 534b fixed in the middle of the shaft member 532d. Therefore, the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 connects the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 (rotary decorative portion 533a) via the second drive gear 534a, the decorative surface portion gear 534b, and the shaft member 532d. Can be rotated together.

The front surface of the first decorative surface decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface decorative substrate 536 is white, and the mounted LEDs are full-color LEDs.

In the decorative rotating body unit 530 of the present embodiment, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 having different decorations are arranged in a row in the circumferential direction with the second axis CL2 as the center. Specifically, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are provided at a distance of 180 degrees in the circumferential direction.

[3-4h-6. Action effect of the third production operation unit]
Next, the operation and effect of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 78, 81, 88 and the like. FIG. 88 (a) is a front view of the third effect operation unit showing the second decorative surface portion of the decorative rotating body unit facing forward, and FIG. 88 (b) shows (a) with the central axis of the operation button extended. It is explanatory drawing seen from the direction. FIG. 89A is an explanatory view showing the rotation of the first decorative surface portion in the third effect operation unit with the first decorative surface portion facing forward, and FIG. 89B is an explanatory view showing the rotation of the first decorative surface portion in the third effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the rotation of the 2nd decorative surface part in the state which turned forward.

The third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player. It is possible to entertain the player by having the player operate the operation button 410 to participate in the player participation type production presented to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 197 and 198, the height of the third effect operation unit 400B is substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through port 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. It is formed at a height. Further, the total width of the third effect operation unit 400B is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the total width of the door frame 3. The third effect operation unit 400B is arranged in the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

In the third effect operation unit 400B, the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. When the third effect operation unit 400B is attached to the plate unit 320, the lower surface of the leg portion 527a of the relay board cover 527, which is the bottom surface, is between the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. , A gap is formed. That is, the third effect operation unit 400B is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

Further, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed so that it becomes. As a result, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the central axis CL (see FIG. 82) of the transparent operation button 410 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) becomes a vertical line. It is tilted at an angle of 63 degrees so that it moves upward as it moves forward. As a result, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is arranged above the plate unit 320 (third effect operation unit 400B). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the third effect operation unit 400B (operation button 410), the operation button 410 can be viewed from the front (projected view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). The operation button 410 and the decorative rotating body unit 530 in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

In the third effect operation unit 400B, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 521b of the third base unit 520, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 523. Has been done. In the normal state (the state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the third effect operation unit 400B is operated by the urging force of the operation button spring 523, similarly to the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A. The front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the 410 is in contact with a portion of the frame unit 415 on the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In the normal state, the third effect operation unit 400B has the center side (central axis CL side) from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. It is protruding. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the shape of a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , The frame unit 415 projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 82 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (front end) is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of the 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 523. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 521 of the third base unit 520, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is formed to be much larger than that of the operation button for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. It is likely to be done. More specifically, the operation buttons for effect in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation of the third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment Like the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A, the button 410 is attached with the central axis CL tilted with respect to the vertical line, so that the player can operate the button 410 from above like a conventional pachinko machine. When the 410 is pressed, a portion away from the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is pressed as shown by the white arrow in FIG.

By the way, in the operation buttons for directing in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface to be pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the part to be pressed is a flat surface. , If you press a part that is off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed will tilt so that the pressed part will retract first, and the operation button will not be able to retract straight, so you can press the operation button. There is a risk that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which the portion (button lens 411) to be pressed by the player is bulged forward. Because of the shape), when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. You can fully enjoy the production of operation.

Further, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, the third effect operation unit 400B is suspended. Since only the upper part is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the mounted part. Since it is generated, the entire third effect operation unit 400B can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is in contact with the third effect operation unit 400B. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly under the position where the player is relatively easy to press, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player who is pressing the operation button 410, and the game can be played. You can surprise people and entertain the production.

Further, the third effect operation unit 400B is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 527a of the relay board cover 527 forming the lower surface and the dish unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the bottom plate portion 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or hit, the lower surface of the leg portion 527a is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. , The mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like can be bent downward to absorb the impact. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 527a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the third effect operation unit 400B is restricted, and the effect operation of the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the dish unit cover 326 is performed. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the unit mounting portion 326a or the like, and it is possible to prevent damage to the third effect operation unit 400B or the like. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B, the operation button 410 or the first Since the three-effect operation unit 400B and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the deterioration of the player's interest, and make it difficult to damage the game hall side. The increase in burden can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses and operates is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, it is made flat. The strength and rigidity are higher than in the case, and even if the lens is hit strongly, the impact can be dispersed over the entire button lens 411, and the lens is less likely to be damaged.

Further, since the third effect operation unit 400B includes a first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, the first button decoration portion 411a is provided. Due to the uneven decoration of the button lens 411, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear part at the outer peripheral edge portion of the portion inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rear in the central axis CL direction), there are an inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and an outer peripheral surface of the decorative rotating body unit 530. Although the gap between them is located, the gap on the outer circumference of the decorative rotating body unit 530 can be made difficult to see from the front side (player side) by the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap. .. As a result, even if the rotating decorative rotating body unit 530 is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating, and the player who sees the operation button 410 feels uncomfortable. The decorative rotating body unit 530 can be arranged without any problem in the transparent operation button 410, and the appearance of the operation button 410, the decorative rotating body unit 530, and the pachinko machine 1 as a whole can be improved. Can be improved.

Further, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the decorative rotating body unit 530 arranged in the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412) is provided with the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536. By emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on them, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be light-emitting and decorated in the operation button 410. Then, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are light-emitting decorated, so that the inside of the operation button 410 can be light-emitting decorated. At this time, since the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is provided with a tubular main body portion 413a that surrounds the outer periphery of the decorative rotating body unit 530, the light from the decorative rotating body unit 530 is emitted to the outside of the main body portion 413a. There is no leakage, and only the inside of the operation button 410 can be luminescent and decorated satisfactorily.

Further, the third effect operation unit 400B is behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left outer decorative substrate in the decorative board unit 420. The first LED 422a of the 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are arranged, and by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are light-emitting and decorated. Can be made to. The first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are a tubular main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a cylinder in the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415. It is located between the shape of the inner cylinder portion 416d (see FIGS. 52 and 83, etc.), and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a is emitted from the inside of the main body portion 413a (on the decorative rotating body unit 530 side) and the inner cylinder. It does not leak to the outside of the part 416d, and only the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

Further, the third effect operation unit 400B is behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outside. The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light of the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the tubular inner tubular portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. It is located so that the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. ..

Further, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the frame top lens decorative substrate 522 in the third base unit 520 is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and is mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative substrate 522. The frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from the plurality of LEDs. A flat plate-shaped light-shielding wall portion 521c projects forward from the lower side of the portion of the third base unit 520 to which the frame top lens decorative substrate 522 of the unit base 521 is attached to the vicinity of the lower end rear of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED of the frame top lens decoration substrate 522 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

The third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment can visually recognize the decorative rotating body unit 530 arranged on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 from the front. In the normal state, the third effect operation unit 400B is in a state in which the first decorative surface portion 532 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 is directed forward as shown in FIGS. 78 and 80. In this state, the central axis of the shaft member 532d (second axis CL2) of the first decorative surface portion 532 substantially coincides with the central axis CL of the operation button 410 (see FIG. 82). Further, in a normal state, the logo decoration portion 532a having a directional rotation position around the second axis CL2 on the first decorative surface portion 532 is rotated and stationary in a state of facing the correct direction.

Further, in a normal state, the stopper 531d of the rotating body base unit 531 in the decorative rotating body unit 530 is in contact with the front surface above the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521 in the third base unit 520. That is, in a normal state, the stopper 531d restricts the rotation of the decorative rotating body unit 530 in the direction in which the upper portion moves backward with respect to the horizontally extending first axis CL1.

In this normal state, the rotating body gear 531a of the decorative rotating body unit 530 is passed through the first driving gear (not shown) and the first transmission gear 529 by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 in the third base unit 520. Is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the right side view, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated around the first axis CL1 so that the upper portion thereof moves forward. Then, when the decorative rotating body unit 530 rotates 180 degrees around the first axis CL1 from the normal state, the stopper 531d comes into contact with the front surface below the right bearing portion 521h of the unit base 521, and further rotation occurs. Is regulated, and the rotary drive by the first drive motor 528 of the effect operation unit is stopped.

Although not shown, the third base unit 520 is provided with a rotation detection sensor that detects the rotation position of the decorative rotating body unit 530, and the decorative rotating body unit 530 is based on the detection by the rotation detection sensor. The rotation position is controlled.

When the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated 180 degrees around the first axis CL1 from the normal state, the second decorative surface portion 533 faces forward as shown in FIG. 88. Therefore, the second decorative surface portion 533 is in a state of being well visible through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. In this state, the second axis CL2 of the second decorative surface portion 533 substantially coincides with the center axis CL of the operation button 410.

Further, the third effect operation unit 400B extends coaxially with the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 in the decorative rotating body unit 530 via the second drive gear 534a and the decorative surface gear 534b. When the shaft member 532d is rotated, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 attached to both ends of the shaft member 532d can be rotated at the same time (see FIG. 89). In other words, the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 rotates the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis CL2 that is orthogonal to the horizontally extending first axis CL1. Can be done.

Although not shown, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is provided with a rotation detection sensor that detects the rotation positions of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533. The decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be stopped at arbitrary rotation positions. Therefore, even if the logo decoration portion 532a having directionality is provided like the first decorative surface portion 532, the rotation can be stopped at a position corresponding to the directionality, so that the decoration of the first decorative surface portion 532 is impaired. It is possible to ensure that the decorativeness is exhibited.

Further, the third effect operation unit 400B uses the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 provided on the decorative rotating body unit 530 to form the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533. Each can be luminescent and decorated. The light emitting decoration of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 by the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 rotates around the first axis CL1 in which the decorative rotating body unit 530 extends horizontally. This can be performed even when the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotating around the second axis CL2 which is orthogonal to the first axis CL1.

Since the second decorative surface portion 533 includes a rotating decorative portion 533a and a non-rotating fixed decorative portion 533b, the second decorative surface portion 533 is mounted on the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 when the rotating decorative portion 533a is rotated. When a plurality of LEDs are made to emit light, a part of the light radiated forward by hitting the fixed decorative portion 533b is a non-transmissive portion of the rotating rotating decorative portion 533a, a colored portion, or the like. It will be interrupted periodically by the above, and the flickering and blinking light emitting decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

[3-4h-7. Movable production in the third production operation unit]
Next, the movable effect in the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91. FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the movable effect of rotating the decorative rotating body unit in the third effect operation unit. FIG. 91 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the movable effect of rotating the decorative rotating body unit in a state where the first decorative surface portion and the second decorative surface portion are rotated in the third effect operation unit. First, with reference to FIG. 90 and the like, a movable effect of the decorative rotating body unit 530 using only the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 will be described. In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 90A and the like, the first decorative surface portion 532 having the logo decoration portion 532a is directed forward.

As an example of the movable effect of rotating only around the horizontally extending first axis CL1, the first drive gear (not shown) is changed from the normal state (state of FIG. 90 (a)) by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528. (Omitted) Through the first transmission gear 529 and the rotating body gear 531a, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated counterclockwise in the right side view by 180 degrees at a stretch without stopping in the middle, and the first decoration It is assumed that the second decorative surface portion 533 arranged on the opposite side of the surface portion 532 faces forward (see FIG. 90 (d)). As a result, it is possible to show the player a movable effect in which the second decorative surface portion 533 moves from above and appears while rotating so that the first decorative surface portion 532 moves downward. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the first decorative surface portion 532 suddenly switches to the second decorative surface portion 533 having a different decoration, which can surprise the player and change the decoration. It is possible to make the player think that there is something good, raise the expectation for the game, and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, as a movable effect different from the above, the effect operation unit is such that the decorative rotating body unit 530 reciprocates in the counterclockwise direction within an angle range of 0 to 60 degrees in the right side view from the normal state. The first drive motor 528 is rotated forward and backward a plurality of times. As a result, when the first decorative surface portion 532 is rotated so as to face downward, a part of the second decorative surface portion 533 can be slightly seen with the plurality of peripheral surface decorative portions 531f sandwiched above the first decorative surface portion 532. (See FIG. 90B), the player can strongly attract the attention of the player to the second decorative surface portion 533 that appears and disappears when the decorative rotating body unit 530 reciprocates. (Ii) Depending on whether or not the decorative surface portion 533 faces forward, the player's expectation for the arrival of an opportunity can be increased. After that, by returning the decorative rotating body unit 530 to the original state (the state shown in FIG. 90A), it is possible to make the player suggest that the chance does not come. On the other hand, by further rotating the decorative rotating body unit 530 so that the second decorative surface portion 533 is facing forward (the state shown in FIG. 90 (d)), it is possible to suggest that an opportunity will come, and the game can be played. It is possible to entertain people and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as a movable effect different from the above, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction in the right-angled view from the normal state, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 is directed forward. (See FIG. 90 (c)). As a result, the first decorative surface portion 532 faces downward and the second decorative surface portion 533 faces upward with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 facing forward in between. Since they are located in their respective states and the decorations of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 become unclear, a plurality of circumferences provided on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 are relatively present. The decoration of the surface decoration portion 531f can be clearly shown, and the decoration of the peripheral surface decoration portion 531f can be enjoyed. Further, the decorative rotating body unit 530 stops rotating at an intermediate position with the plurality of peripheral decorative portions 531f facing forward, so that the player can feel a change in the gaming situation, and the player's game can be predicted. It is possible to raise the expectation for. After that, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction so that the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward as in the base, or the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward. , The same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction in the right-angle view from the normal state (see FIG. 90C), and a predetermined angle is centered on the rotation angle. The effect operation unit first drive motor 528 is rotated forward and reverse a plurality of times so as to reciprocate within a range. As a result, the first decorative surface portion 532 side can be seen more or the second decorative surface portion 533 side can be seen more often across the rotating body base unit 531 (plural peripheral surface decorative portions 531f). Whether the first decorative surface portion 532 faces the front or the second decorative surface portion 533 faces the front can be exciting and exciting, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. After that, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction so that the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward or the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward, as described above. Can produce the effects of.

Further, as a movable effect different from the above, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated 180 degrees from the normal state, and the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward (see FIG. 90D). It is also possible to perform a movable effect that operates in the opposite direction to the above based on the state, and it is possible to achieve the same action and effect as described above. In this case, the second decorative surface portion 533 facing forward rotates so as to move upward, and the first decorative surface portion 532 appears from below, so that the player feels an ascending momentum. This makes it possible to raise expectations for the game, and the upward rotation of the second decorative surface portion 533 causes the player's line of sight to be directed into the game area 5a above the third effect operation unit 400B. It is possible to entertain the game, the production, and the like in the game area 5a, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

When executing the above-mentioned movable effect, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 are appropriately made to emit light, and the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 532 and the second are appropriately emitted. The decorative surface portion 533 is appropriately luminescent and decorated. As a result, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 that can be seen through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be more easily seen, so that the player can clearly recognize the difference between the decorations. , The premium feeling due to the difference in decoration can be fully exhibited, and those decorations can be enjoyed, and the deterioration of the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. Further, by illuminating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 to illuminate the operation button 410, the player's attention can be directed to the operation button 410, so that the player participation type production in which the operation button 410 is pressed is executed. At times, it is possible to urge the player to press the operation button 410, and the player can be made to participate in the player participation type production to entertain.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 91 and the like, the movable effect of the decorative rotating body unit 530 using the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 and the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 will be described. In the initial state, as shown in FIG. 91A, the first decorative surface portion 532 having the logo decorative portion 532a is directed forward, and the first decorative surface portion 532 is the effect operation unit second drive motor. By 534, it is rotated around the second axis CL2 (here, in the clockwise direction) extending so as to coincide with the central axis CL of the operation button 410. In this state, since the first decorative surface portion 532 rotates around the second axis CL2, it is difficult for the player to recognize the logo of the directional logo decorative portion 532a.

Effect operation unit As an example of a movable effect performed in a state where the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated by the second drive motor 534, the first decorative surface portion 532 (second decorative surface portion 533) is set to the second axis. While rotating around CL2, the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 rotates the decorative rotating body unit 530 in the counterclockwise direction in the right side view by 180 degrees at a stretch without stopping in the middle. The second decorative surface portion 533 rotating on the opposite side of the one decorative surface portion 532 is in a state of facing forward (see FIG. 91 (d)). As a result, the first decorative surface portion 532 that was rotating clockwise is suddenly switched to the second decorative surface portion 533 with a different decoration, and the second decorative surface portion 533 (rotating decorative surface portion 533a) becomes the first decorative surface portion 532. Is rotating counterclockwise in the opposite direction, so it can have a strong impact on the player, attract the player's attention, and something to the player. It is possible to make people think that there is something good, raise expectations for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as a movable effect different from the above, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is in a state where the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534. However, the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 is rotated forward and reverse a plurality of times so as to reciprocate in the counterclockwise direction within an angle range of 0 to 60 degrees in the right side view. As a result, when the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 rotates around the first axis CL1 so as to face downward, it rotates around the second axis CL2 on the upper side of the first decorative surface portion 532. A plurality of peripheral decorative surfaces 531f that are not used can be seen, and a part of the second decorative surface portion 533 rotating around the second axis CL2 can be slightly seen above the plurality of peripheral decorative portions 531f. (See FIG. 91 (b)). Therefore, the decorative rotating body unit 530 reciprocates around the first axis CL1 to strongly attract the player's attention to the hidden second decorative surface portion 533, and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be attracted to the player. Whether or not the 533 faces forward can raise the player's expectation for the arrival of a chance. After that, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction with respect to the circumference of the first axis CL1, and the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward (state of FIG. 91A), or the second decoration. When the face portion 533 is turned forward (the state shown in FIG. 91 (b)) and the player is in the desired state, it is possible to convince the player that an opportunity has arrived, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest. Can be made to. After turning the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 forward, the rotation may be stopped so that the logo decorative portion 532a of the first decorative surface portion 532 is in the correct direction. As a result, the player can clearly recognize the logo decoration portion 532a of the first decorative surface portion 532, which can suggest the arrival of an opportunity and raise the player's expectation for the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as a movable effect different from the above, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is changed from the state in which the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534. Is rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction in the right side view with respect to the circumference of the first axis CL1 so that the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 faces forward (see FIG. 91 (c)). .. As a result, the first decorative surface portion 532 faces downward and the second decorative surface portion 533 faces upward with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 facing forward in between. The decorations of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 should be obscured because they are located in the same state and are moving so as to move in the same direction. Therefore, it is possible to clearly show a plurality of peripheral decorative portions 531f on the outer peripheral surface of the stationary rotating body base unit 531 sandwiched between them. Therefore, in the operation button 410, the stationary peripheral surface decorative portion 531f can be made to stand out, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the peripheral surface decorative portion 531f to enjoy the decoration. After that, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction so that the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward as in the base, or the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward. , The same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, while the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated around the first axis CL1 to move the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 forward. In the state facing toward (see FIG. 91 (c)), the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 is rotated a plurality of times so as to reciprocate within a predetermined angle range around the first axis CL around that state. To rotate forward and reverse. As a result, the first decorative surface portion 532 side, each of which is rotating around the second axis CL2, can be seen more or the second decorative surface portion 533 side can be seen more, sandwiching the rotating body base unit 531 (plural peripheral surface decorative portions 531f). Therefore, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether the first decorative surface portion 532 faces the front or the second decorative surface portion 533 faces the front, which entertains the player and suppresses the deterioration of the interest. Can be made to. After that, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a predetermined direction with respect to the circumference of the first axis CL1, and the first decorative surface portion 532 is directed forward (state of FIG. 91A), or the second decoration. By setting the surface portion 533 to face forward (the state shown in FIG. 91B), the same effects as described above can be obtained.

Further, as a movable effect different from the above, after rotating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis CL2 from a normal state, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is moved around the first axis CL. Rotate 180 degrees to rotate the rotating second decorative surface 533 forward, or from a normal state, rotate the decorative rotating unit 530 180 degrees around the first axis CL to perform the second decoration. After the surface portion 533 is turned forward, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2, and based on this state (see FIG. 91 (d)), the above Can also perform a movable effect that performs the opposite operation, and can produce the same effect as described above. In this case, the rotating second decorative surface portion 533 facing forward rotates around the first axis CL1 so as to move upward, and is opposite to the second decorative surface portion 533 with respect to the second axis CL2. Since the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating in the direction appears from below, the player can feel the ascending momentum, the expectation for the game can be increased, and the second axis line. By moving the second decorative surface portion 533 rotating around CL2 upward, the player's line of sight can be directed into the game area 5a above the third effect operation unit 400B, and within the game area 5a. It is possible to entertain the game and the production in the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

When executing the above-mentioned movable effect, the rotation of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 is set to reverse rotation in the middle. Alternatively, it may be reciprocated within a predetermined angle range. Further, the rotation speed of the decorative rotating body unit 530 by the first drive motor 528 of the effect operation unit around the first axis CL1 and the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 by the second drive motor 534 of the delivery operation unit. The rotation speed may be the same as the rotation speed around the biaxial line CL2, or may be different. By appropriately combining these, it is possible to increase the number of patterns of the movable effect by the third effect operation unit 400B, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest by making it difficult for the player to get bored due to the abundant variations of the movable effect. it can.

Further, when executing the above-mentioned movable effect, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 are appropriately made to emit light, and are rotated around the second axis CL2. The first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are appropriately luminescent and decorated. As a result, when the first decorative surface portion 532 rotating around the second axis CL2 is directed forward, the entire transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be light-emitting and decorated with uniform light. On the other hand, when the second decorative surface portion 533 rotating around the second axis CL2 is directed forward, the transparent button lens 411 is blinking due to the periodic light blocking by the rotating decorative portion 533a. It can be luminescent and decorated with light. In this way, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be luminescently decorated in various ways, the player's attention can be directed to the operation button 410, and the player participation type production in which the operation button 410 is pressed and operated. It is possible to urge the player to press the operation button 410 at the time of execution, and it is possible to entertain the player by participating in the player participation type production.

[3-4h-8. Heat exhaust action of the third production operation unit]
Next, the heat exhausting action of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 92 and the like. FIG. 92 is an explanatory view showing an air flow due to the rotation of the second decorative surface portion in the third effect operation unit. In the third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment, the decorative rotating body unit 530 arranged behind the operation button 410 is the unit base 521 (accommodation wall portion 521a) of the operation button 410 and the third base unit 520. The front and rear are arranged in the closed button space AS (see FIG. 92). A plurality of ventilation ports 521d penetrating the front and rear are formed in the accommodating wall portion 521a that forms the rear portion of the button inner space AS and covers the rear side of the decorative rotating body unit 530. Therefore, the button interior space AS communicates with the inside of the mounting space 326j of the dish unit cover 326 to which the third effect operation unit 400B is mounted through the plurality of ventilation ports 521d. Although not shown, the mounting space 326j communicates with the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through an exhaust port formed in the bottom plate portion 326i and the lower plate cover 340.

Further, in the third effect operation unit 400B, in the decorative rotating body unit 530, one shaft member 532d rotatably attached to the bearing cylinder portion 531e of the rotating body base unit 531 coaxially with the second axis CL. A first decorative surface portion 532 and a second decorative surface portion 533 having different decorations are attached to both ends, respectively, so that the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can rotate together. The effect operation unit second drive motor 534 that rotates the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 is mounted in the hollow rotating body base unit 531. On the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531, a plurality of peripheral surface decorative portions 531f made of through-hole-shaped decorations are formed, and through the peripheral surface decorative portions 531f, the inside and the outside of the rotating body base unit 531 are formed. Are communicating with each other.

Of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 rotatably attached around the second axis CL in the decorative rotating body unit 530, the second decorative surface portion 533 rotates around the second axis CL. The decorative portion 533a is formed in a shape capable of generating wind when rotated.

In the third effect operation unit 400B having the above configuration, with the first decorative surface portion 532 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 facing forward, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are placed on the effect operation unit No. When the two drive motors 534 rotate in a predetermined direction with respect to the circumference of the second axis CL, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating decorative portion 533a on the second decorative surface portion 533 causes a plurality of accommodating wall portions 521a covering the rear. Through the ventilation port 521d, it will come out to the rear side of the accommodating wall portion 521a (see FIG. 92 (a)). By this flow of wind, the air in the space AS in the button in which the decorative rotating body unit 530 is housed can be forcibly discharged to the outside to be ventilated. Since the space inside the button AS and the inside of the rotating body base unit 531 communicate with each other through the plurality of peripheral surface decorative portions 531f, the heat released from the second drive motor 534 of the effect operation unit is transferred to the plurality of circumferences. It can be discharged to the rear of the third effect operation unit 400B (inside the mounting space 326j of the dish unit 320) through the surface decoration portion 531f, the space inside the button AS, and the ventilation port 521d. As a result, it is possible to suppress an abnormal rise in the temperature inside the decorative rotating body unit 530 and the operation button 410, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects due to heat.

Further, in the third effect operation unit 400B of the present embodiment, with the second decorative surface portion 533 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 facing forward, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are placed on the effect operation unit No. 533. When the two drive motors 534 rotate in a predetermined direction with respect to the circumference of the second axis CL, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating decorative portion 533a on the second decorative surface portion 533 is guided backward along the inner surface of the operation button 410. Then, through the plurality of ventilation ports 521d of the accommodating wall portion 521a covering the rear of the decorative rotating body unit 530, the interior rotating body unit 530 escapes to the rear side of the accommodating wall portion 521a (see FIG. 92 (b)). Due to this wind flow, the air in the button interior space AS in which the decorative rotating body unit 530 is housed can be forcibly discharged to the outside and ventilated, so that the air is installed in the rotating body base unit 531. The heat released from the second drive motor 534 of the effect operation unit is passed through the plurality of peripheral decoration portions 531f, the space inside the button AS, and the ventilation port 521d to the rear of the third effect operation unit 400B (mounting space 326j of the dish unit 320). Can be discharged to the inside). As a result, it is possible to suppress an abnormal rise in the temperature inside the decorative rotating body unit 530 and the operation button 410, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects due to heat.

The exhaust heat discharged into the mounting space 326j through the plurality of ventilation ports 521d of the accommodation wall portion 521a in the unit base 521 is passed through the exhaust ports (not shown) formed in the bottom plate portion 326i and the lower plate cover 340, and the pachinko machine 1 It is discharged to the outside of.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 540 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. FIG. 93A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 93C is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 96 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 93 (a). The door frame left side unit 540 is a door frame base unit that covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 (door frame left side decorative substrate 160) on the upper side of the dish unit 320. It is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 540 is for decorating the front left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110.

The door frame left side unit 540 is a strip-shaped left unit base 541 extending vertically and attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the front view of the through hole 111, and the left unit base 541. It has a transparent strip-shaped left unit diffuser lens member 542 attached to the front surface and a translucent one that is arranged in front of the left unit diffuser lens member 542 and has a polyhedron-like decoration at the front end. On the left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and on the left unit which is attached to the upper front surface of the left unit base 541 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a tubular frame shape and extends vertically. The decorative base 544, the left unit lower decorative base 545, which is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the left unit base 541 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, is shorter than the left unit upper decorative base 544 and protrudes forward in a frame shape. A transparent left unit decorative cover 546 attached to the front side of the left unit base 541 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 544 and the left unit lower decorative base 545, and the left unit. It includes a plurality of decorative members 547 attached to the front side of the decorative cover 546.

The left unit base 541 of the door frame left side unit 540 is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear side open, and has a plurality of openings 541a penetrating the front and rear in the front surface. As shown in the figure, the plurality of openings 541a have a circular hole and a quadrangular hole extending vertically. In the left unit base 541, LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 (door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162) are formed from a plurality of openings 541a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 541a of the left unit base 541 is formed so that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located substantially in the center in the vertical direction when assembled into the door frame 3. The left unit base 541 is formed of a translucent member.

The left unit diffusing lens member 542 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusing lens member 542A and a lower diffusing lens member 542B. The left unit diffuser lens member 542 has a circular lens portion 542a with a circular front view corresponding to the circular opening 541a in the left unit base 541 and a square front view quadrangle corresponding to the quadrangular opening 541a. It includes a lens unit 542b. The door frame left side unit 540 is assembled on the door frame 3 so that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 542a and the square lens portion 542b. It is formed.

The circular lens portion 542a of the left unit diffusion lens member 542 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. The circular lens portion 542a can irradiate the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged at the rear to the front in a point shape. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be luminescently decorated by the light radiated forward from the circular lens portion 542a.

The square lens portion 542b of the left unit diffuser lens member 542 includes a central diffuser reflection portion 542c that is recessed rearward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface and a front diffuser lens portion 542d formed outside the central diffuser reflection portion 542c on the front surface. The input lens portion 542e that bulges rearward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffusion reflection portion 542c) and the input lens portion 542e on the rear surface as a whole toward the front as the distance from the input lens portion 542e increases. It is provided with a front reflecting portion 542f that is inclined so as to move.

The front diffusion lens portion 542d of the square lens portion 542b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centered on the central diffusion reflection portion 542c. More specifically, in the front diffusion lens portion 542d, the groove portion is recessed rearward in an arc shape in the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. Further, the front diffusion lens portion 542d is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

The front reflection portion 542f of the square lens portion 542b is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 542e. These plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 542f has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, in which the mountain portion between the grooves is formed in a triangular shape with a pointed rearward portion, and is formed in a saw shape. The front reflecting portion 542f is formed so that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 542f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction coincides with the dividing line extending radially in the front diffusion lens portion 542d.

The square lens portion 542b is assembled on the door frame 3, and the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 542e.

In the square lens unit 542b, the light radiated forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens unit 542e into the square lens unit 542b. Since the input lens unit 542e bulges rearward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel parallel to the front, and the input light is transmitted. Almost everything can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflector 542c. Then, the light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 542c is perpendicular to the axis extending in the front-rear direction (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) due to the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 542c. It is reflected so as to be diffused in the above direction), and travels in the square lens portion 542b from the center side to the outside along the front surface thereof. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection portion 542c travels from the central side to the outside (direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection portion 542c) over the entire thickness of the square lens portion 542b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected from the center side to the outside in the square lens portion 542b substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 reaches the saw-shaped front reflecting portion 542f, it is forward by the surface of the front reflecting portion 542f. It reflects to the side. At this time, since the rear surface of the front reflecting portion 542f is inclined so as to move forward as the distance from the central diffuse reflection portion 542c increases, the thickness of the square lens portion 542b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as the distance from the center increases. (See FIG. 96). As a result, the light reflected outward by the central diffuse reflection portion 542c over the entire thickness of the square lens portion 542b in the front-rear direction is sequentially forwarded by the front reflection portion 542f from the center side to the outside. Can be reflected.

Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 542f is emitted forward from the square lens portion 542b through the front diffusion lens portion 542d. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 542d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 542f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 542b It is possible to irradiate the front surface (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the lens.

In the front diffuser lens portion 542d and the front reflection portion 542f, the square lens portion 542b divides a plurality of concentric grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then divides a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves with the dividing line as a boundary. Is arranged in the radial direction so that the concentric arcuate grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction. Therefore, the light emitted from the front surface to the front of the square lens portion 542b has a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to avoid becoming light, and it is possible to irradiate a more uniform shade of light forward. As a result, the multi-faceted decorative portion in front of the square lens portion 542b in the left unit decorative lens member can be lightly and uniformly decorated.

The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 546. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular decorative portion formed in the front position of the circular lens portion 542a of the left unit diffuser lens member 542 and the square lens portion 542b of the left unit diffuser lens member 542. It has a multi-faceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer circumference of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly before and after. In the polyhedral decoration part, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts are arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a polyhedron consisting of a plurality of triangles is arranged in the vertical direction on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in a shape like that. The circular decorative portion and the multifaceted decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multifaceted decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 546. Further, in the left unit decorative lens member, the multifaceted decorative portion is forward from the square lens portion 542b of the left unit diffuser lens member 542 by the light radiated forward from the circular lens portion 542a of the left unit diffuser lens member 542. Each lens is decorated with light emitted from the lens.

The decorative base 544 on the left unit is a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically, and is formed in a square tubular shape extending back and forth. The portion of the outer peripheral surface of the decorative base 544 on the left unit is inclined so as to project downward from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The decorative base 544 on the left unit is formed of a translucent member.

The front view of the decorative base 545 under the left unit is formed in a U shape that is open upward. The lower decorative base 545 of the left unit is inclined from substantially the center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves rearward as it goes upward. The decorative base 545 under the left unit is formed of a translucent member.

The left unit decorative cover 546 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 540. The left unit decorative cover 546 is bent so that the middle portion in the vertical direction is recessed rearward, and the lower portion is bent rearward along the front end of the upper decorative base 544 of the left unit, and the left It connects the dogleg-shaped part whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the unit lower decoration base 545, the lower end of the upper dogleg-shaped part, and the upper end of the lower doglegged part. It is composed of a linear part.

The upper and lower ends of the left unit decorative cover 546 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 544 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 545, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 546 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 547 extends shortly in the vertical direction and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 546 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 547 is formed of a translucent member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 97 to 101 and the like. FIG. 97A is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 97B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 97C is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 100 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 97 (a). FIG. 101 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 97 (a), and FIG. 101 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ in FIG. 97 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the upper side of the dish unit 320 and to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the right side of the front view of the through hole 111, and the front surface of the right unit base 551. It is attached to the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and the door frame right side decorative board 552, and is attached to the left side from the center of the front view on the front side of the right unit base 551 and extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left diffusing lens member 553, a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decorative member. It includes a transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left cover 555 attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the 554.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the front view of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553. It is attached to the member 553 and is attached to the right side surface of the transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right diffusion lens member 556 extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and is decorated. It is provided with a sheet-shaped right unit right decorative member 557 and a transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. There is.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is arranged between the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and is shallow extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction in which the front and right sides are open. The box-shaped, opaque right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 are attached so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped right unit right light-shielding member 560.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a translucent right having a polyhedron-like decoration at the front end. The unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561, the right unit left diffuser lens member 553, and the front end side of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decorative base 562 that penetrates back and forth, a transparent right unit cover 563 that is attached to the front side of the right unit decorative base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562, and a right unit cover. It includes a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of the 563. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to penetrate the right unit base 551 vertically, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangle whose front view is elongated vertically, is short in the front-rear direction and extends in a square tube shape, and is formed in a box shape in which the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction is closed. Has been done. The right unit base 551 is formed of a translucent member.

The decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is mounted on a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a center in the left-right direction on the front surface. It is provided with a plurality of medium LEDs 552c and the like. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is for causing the right unit left decorative member 554 to emit light and decorate via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Further, the right LED 552b is for illuminating and decorating the right unit right decorative member 557 via the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for illuminating and decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The front and rear sides of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although not shown, the decorative substrate 552B on the lower right side of the door frame is connected to the relay substrate of the door body of the door frame base unit 100, and the decorative substrate 552A on the upper right side of the door frame is the decorative substrate 552B on the lower right side of the door frame. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffuser lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, and a rear wall portion 553b protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in the front view. The rear wall portion 553b is cut out in a quadrangular shape from the right end side in the front view to the left, and a plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the right unit left decorative member on the left surface side in the front view of the main body portion 553a. A housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate 554, an input lens portion 553e that protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a and is provided in a plurality of vertical directions, and a front view right side of the main body portion 553a, respectively. A plurality of side reflecting portions 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is centered in the vertical direction are provided.

The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the main body portion 553a is entirely moved to the right in the front view from the rear end side to the front with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. It is slightly tilted. The front end of the main body portion 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 540 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its right end extends to substantially the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

A plurality of the plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. In the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 553d is formed on a flat surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 553e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed substantially in the center of each of the vertical direction when the left diffuser lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 553e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a site and. These input lens portions 553e are respectively located immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. As a result, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 553a.

A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 553e. In each of these concentric arcuate grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface on the main body portion 553a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side when cut in the radial direction about the input lens portion 553e. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 553f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, the light radiated forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 flows from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Being incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the curved surface refracts the light from the left LED 552a so as to spread, and in the main body portion 553a, each input lens portion 553e It will diffuse radially forward around the center.

Since the main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole body moves to the right in the front view toward the front, the door frame The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a hits the flat left surface in the main body portion 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 553f side on the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected to the left in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflecting portion 553f, and is reflected outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted from the right surface (side reflection portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a to the outside (right side when viewed from the front), but the right unit left light shielding member 559 arranged on the right side of the main body portion 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light-shielding member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body portion 553a. .. Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side reflecting portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the light irradiated to the right from the side reflecting portion 553f to the left on the left surface of the right unit left shading member 559. Since the light that reflects toward the main body and passes through the main body 553a is emitted to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a can be light-emitting and decorated with good brightness. it can.

Further, in the side reflecting portion 553f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form a concentric arc-shaped groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside (left side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shades. It is possible to irradiate more uniform light to the left. As a result, the left decorative member 554 of the right unit housed in the storage recess 553d on the left side of the main body 553a can be lightly decorated substantially uniformly.

Since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, side reflections formed on the opposite side from the front left side (the side where the accommodating recess 553d is formed) of the main body portion 553a. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit left decorative member 554 is transparent. Can be decorated by the side reflecting portion 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in the shape of a thin sheet, and decorations such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the production concept presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, and a rear wall protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left in the front view. The portion 556b and the rear wall portion 556b are notched from the left end side in the front view to the right in a quadrangular shape, and a plurality of cutout portions 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the right side of the main body portion 556a in the front view. Front view of the housing recess 556d, which is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, the input lens portion 556e, which protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a and is provided in the vertical direction, and the main body portion 556a. On the left side, each input lens unit 556e is provided with a plurality of side reflection units 556f arranged in the vertical direction so as to be centered in the vertical direction.

Right unit The main body of the right diffusion lens member 556a has a side view shape in which the upper corner of the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the main body portion 556a is entirely moved to the left in the front view from the rear end side to the front with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. It is slightly tilted. The front end of the main body portion 556a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 540 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its left end extends to substantially the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 comes into contact with the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

A plurality of the plurality of notches 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. These plurality of notch portions 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notch portions 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the cutout portion 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch portion 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 have a square opening penetrating back and forth. Is formed, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 556d is formed on a flat surface, and the shape of the outer circumference substantially matches the outer shape of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 556e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially in the center of each of the vertical directions when the right diffusion lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 556e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from the rear surface of a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a site and. These input lens portions 556e are respectively located immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. As a result, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 556a.

A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of these concentric arcuate grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface on the main body portion 556a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side when cut in the radial direction about the input lens portion 556e. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, the light radiated forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 flows from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Being incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the curved surface refracts the light from the right LED 552b so as to spread, and in the main body portion 556a, each input lens portion 556e It will diffuse radially forward around the center.

Since the main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole body moves to the left in the front view toward the front, the door frame The light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a hits the flat right surface in the main body portion 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside due to the angle of incidence with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 556f side on the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected to the right in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflecting portion 556f, and is reflected outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted from the right surface (side reflection portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a to the outside (left side when viewed from the front), but the right unit right shading member 560 arranged on the left side of the main body portion 556a is white. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is irradiated to the right side through the main body portion 556a. .. Therefore, from the right side of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side reflecting portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the light emitted to the left from the side reflecting portion 556f are emitted to the left on the right side of the right light shielding member 560 of the right unit. Since the light that reflects toward the body and passes through the main body 556a is emitted to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be light-emitting and decorated with good brightness. it can.

Further, in the side reflecting portion 556f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form a concentric arc-shaped groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated from the right surface of the main body portion 556a to the outside (right side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shades. It is possible to irradiate more uniform light to the right. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 housed in the storage recess 556d on the right side of the main body 556a can be lightly and uniformly decorated.

Since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the front view right side (the side where the accommodating recess 556d is formed) of the main body portion 556a. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 556f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right decorative member 557 of the right unit, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 556f of the right diffuser lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit is transparent. Can be decorated by the side reflecting portion 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in the shape of a thin sheet, and decorations such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the production concept presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decorations applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed so that the side view shape is substantially the same as the side view shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 559a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 559b protruding from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in the front view in a short flat plate shape, and rear. The wall portion 559b is cut out in a quadrangular shape from the right end side to the left in the front view, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the main body portion 559a extends from the right side to the right and is rearward. It includes a plurality of flat plate-shaped reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

The main body 559a of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main bodies 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

The rear wall portion 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its left end extends to the right side of the right unit base 551 substantially in the left-right direction. The left surface of the right unit right shading member 560 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

A plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. These plurality of notched portions 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notched portions 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LEDs 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 face forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a set of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d separated in the vertical direction at substantially the same height as the left and right widths, and three sets separated in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance. The reinforcing portion 559d of each set is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563, respectively. These plurality of reinforcing portions 559d enhance the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

The right light-shielding member 560 has a side view shape such that the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side moves upward as it moves forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559a in the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light-shielding member 560 closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are each formed of white members. As shown in FIG. 101, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are assembled into the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body 559a and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are the right units. The left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are arranged so as to be close to the main bodies 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 and the right unit right shading member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. .. The light radiated forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 and the right unit right shading member 560 is used to decorate the right unit. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are formed of a translucent member, and illuminate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative substrate 552, respectively. The left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and the right LED 552b corresponding to the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 are prevented from interfering with each other. The light emitting decoration can be made only by the medium LED 552c.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are arranged behind each of the divided spaces because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. The LED 552c in the right side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame can prevent light from interfering with each other, and the portion of the right unit decorative lens member 561 located in front of each space can be prevented. , Each can be independently luminescent and decorated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to divide the door frame into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction and independently illuminate each region.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape that follows the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and forming a plurality of polyhedra. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly in the front-rear direction. In the polyhedral decorative portion 561b, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped portions are arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of rows of polyhedrons composed of a plurality of triangles are vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in a shape as if it were installed.

More specifically, in the right unit decorative lens member 561, a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and multifaceted decorative portions 561b are divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. Among the parts located in the front, one multi-faceted decorative portion 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decorative portion 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction in the three parts from the top, and one multi-faceted decorative portion 561b is arranged in the lowermost part. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is light-emitting decorated by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged at the rear.

The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to cover both the left and right outer sides of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 near the front end and the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. In the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 protrudes slightly forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed of a translucent member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 564 extends shortly in the vertical direction and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of a translucent member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four in the vertical direction.

The door frame right side unit 550, in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes forward in a large plate shape from the door frame left side unit 540, and slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 is independent of the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the left and right protruding sides, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end. It can be luminescent and decorated.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It can exert an action effect like a partition between them. As a result, the player playing the pachinko machine 1 can be made to have the illusion that he / she is playing in a private room, and other players around him / her can play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation. Can be done.

Further, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, in the game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if the pachinko machines 1 are not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, the island equipment It can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out in the game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are lined up. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are light-emitting decorated, the book can be viewed from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to notify the existence of the pachinko machine 1 and to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player.

Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both the left and right sides are used. By illuminating and decorating the member 561 and the like in a peculiar manner, it is possible to immediately notify and recognize the occurrence of a defect to the staff of the game hall, and it becomes possible to quickly respond to the defect. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be resolved at an early stage, and the player can be frustrated and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 102 to 105 and the like. FIG. 102 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 102 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is a perspective view. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line RR in FIG. 102. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the central base 571 which is attached to the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to both the left and right sides of the central base 571. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and a pair of upper speakers 573 extending to the left and right and the center in the left-right direction protruding forward. From the position closer to the center in the left-right direction to the vicinity of the center than the pair of openings 574a and the pair of openings 574a, which are box-shaped with the rear part open and penetrate the front and rear of the pair of upper speakers 573. It has a plurality of slits 574b (three on each side) that extend and penetrate each other in the front-rear direction and are separated from each other in the vertical direction, and are attached to the front side of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572. It includes a unit body 574 and a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal, which is arranged on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear side of the unit body 574 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. ing.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction and has translucency, and is attached to the rear side of the top middle decoration member 576 and the top middle decoration member 576. The door frame top middle decoration board 577 on which multiple LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576, which are attached to the front of the unit body 574 and close the plurality of slits 574b respectively. A plurality of transparent flat plate-shaped light guide members 578 (three on each side) extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of both left and right ends of the unit body 574 straddling the opening 574a, and a top middle decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 574. Top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580, top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decoration, which are attached to both the left and right sides and cover the front surfaces of a plurality (three) light guide members 578, respectively. The top middle left decorative member 581 and the top middle left decorative member 581, which are attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front side of each of the lens members 580 and extend from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to the vicinity of the central side end of the opening 574a, respectively. It is provided with a top middle right decorative member 582.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of each of the left and right side surfaces of the unit body 574, and LEDs are mounted on the portions of the plurality (three) light guide members 578 facing the left and right outer ends. The door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top right decorative board 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the unit body 574 penetrate. A pair of board bases 585 that are attached to each part, and a door that is attached to the front surface of the pair of board bases 585 and has a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slit 574b of the unit main body 574. The frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587, and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 are attached to the rear side of the unit body 574, respectively. It includes a pair of light-shielding members 588.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the door frame top unit relay board 589 mounted on the front surface of the center base 571 in the unit main body 574 and the center base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The unit so as to close the attached relay board cover 590, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 574 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 574, and the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 574. It includes a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 574.

The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends to the left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached obliquely so that the front surfaces of the door frame top unit 570 move rearward on the side closer to the center in the left-right direction in the state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 574 is formed so that the shape of the front view is such that the lower portion of the quadrangle extending to the left and right near both left and right ends bulges downward. In other words, the unit main body 574 is formed in a shape such that a quadrangle extending to the left and right is cut out in a trapezoidal shape narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit body 574 has a quadrangle whose shape in a plan view extends to the left and right, and a portion having about 1/2 of the total width (length in the left and right direction) centered on the center in the left and right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle as the base. It is formed in a shape that combines a trapezoid that protrudes forward and a quadrangle that protrudes forward shortly with the front end side of the trapezoid as the long side. Therefore, in the unit main body 574, both sides of the portion protruding forward in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface connect the left-right end portion of the unit main body 574 and the left-right end portion of the front end of the portion protruding forward. It is located behind (recessed).

The unit main body 574 is formed with openings 574a penetrating back and forth, respectively, at a portion on the front surface from both ends in the left-right direction to a position outside the portion protruding forward. Further, the unit main body 574 has a plurality of slits extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined height to the left and right and penetrating in the front-rear direction in a portion extending diagonally in a portion protruding forward in a trapezoidal shape on the front surface. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend left and right from the vicinity of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 574 that extends diagonally forward to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 574 in the left-right direction, three each vertically separated from each other.

Further, the unit main body 574 has an upper opening 574c notched from the rear end to the front in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d notched from the rear end to the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. , Is equipped. The upper opening 574c of the unit body 574 is closed by the upper cover 591. Further, the lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

Further, the unit main body 574 includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at a position substantially the same in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed so that the front surface thereof is located in front of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit body 574 is formed of a translucent member.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit body 574 that projects forward in the center in the left-right direction. The top middle decorative member 576 has a deformed pentagon whose front view shape is bent so that the central part in the left-right direction of the lower side of the substantially square is located downward, and the deformed pentagon extends outward in the left-right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the modified pentagon. It is formed in a shape that looks like a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tip of the side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined so that the variable pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole, and has translucency.

The front surface of the door frame top interior decorative substrate 577 is tilted so as to move backward as it goes downward so as to be along the front surface of the modified pentagonal portion of the top interior decorative member 576. Attached to the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, and by making these LEDs emit light, the top middle decoration member 576 can be light-emittingly decorated.

The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that follows the shape on both the left and right sides of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 574 that protrudes forward. Explaining that the side of the unit body 574 near both ends in the left-right direction is the end side and the side near the center is the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight portion extending straight to the left and right from the end side toward the center side. It is composed of 578a and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end side on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction in the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be larger than the height in the vertical direction in the arc portion 578b. Further, the light guide member 578 is formed so that the height in the vertical direction is constant in the straight portion 578a and the height in the vertical direction becomes smaller in the arc portion 578b toward the center side. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 574, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 574 from the front. There is.

The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and a diffusion input portion 578d composed of a plurality of irregularities formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b. It has.

When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both outer ends in the left-right direction face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both outer ends in the left-right direction, the light is emitted from the straight portion 578a. As it advances toward the center side, it is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of them in front of the straight portion 578a is light-emitting decorated.

Further, the light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b due to the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is radiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. As a result, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be light-emitting decorated.

As described above, the light guide member 578 is the LED 583a, 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. Light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided to illuminate and decorate the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 574 so as to cover the front of three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 574. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that independently accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that resembles the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, the unevenness of the square pyramid protruding forward is arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 574. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is light-emittingly decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via three light guide members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 574. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that independently accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that resembles the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, irregularities of a square weight stand protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit main body 574. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is light-emittingly decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587 of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via three light guide members 578.

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 574 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top left. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 579. The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of a translucent member.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 574 and the top middle right decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top right. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 580. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of a translucent member.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing to the right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, the LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 574 (see FIG. 105). ). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. The LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 allows a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the left opening 574a of the unit body 574 via the straight portion 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminescent and decorated.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. In the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, the LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 574 (see FIG. 105). ). Each of the three LEDs 584a can emit light independently. The LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 allows a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the right opening 574a of the unit body 574 via the straight portion 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminescent and decorated.

The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion where the plurality of slits 574b are formed in the unit main body 574. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 is formed from a side wall having a substantially square side view having sides extending vertically and front and back, a rear wall of a front view square extending outward at right triangles from the rear side of the side wall, and the front end of the upper side of the side wall. An abbreviation that connects the upper wall of a substantially right triangle that connects the side wall and the upper side of the rear wall with the line connecting the upper side of the side wall as a hypotenuse, and the lower side of the side wall and the rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall. It is formed in the shape of a triangular columnar box with a right triangle lower wall and an open space between the upper and lower hypotenuses. The board base 585 is attached to the unit body 574 so that the open portion is closed by the unit body 574. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so that the open portion is closed.

The middle left decorative board 586 of the door frame top is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the rear side on the left side from the center of the left and right in the unit main body 574. Be done. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 with respect to the surface extending to the left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 574. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state in which a plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 574 in a state of being assembled on the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 586a to illuminate and decorate a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 close to the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The middle right decorative board 587 of the door frame top is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the rear side on the right side from the center of the left and right in the unit main body 574. Be done. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 with respect to the surface extending to the left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 574. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is in a state in which a plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 574 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 587a to illuminate and decorate a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 close to the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The pair of light-shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 574 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 574. The pair of light-shielding members 588 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other by a translucent member. The light-shielding member 588 is placed between the upper and lower sides of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 arranged in rows corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit main body 574. It is partitioning. With this light-shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587 located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated in an independent state.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. The connection between the right decorative board 587 on the top of the frame and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided on the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 that protrudes forward in the center in the left-right direction, and is curved so that the front surfaces of the top middle decoration member 576 on both the left and right sides are hollowed out rearward. Therefore, the player can be illusioned that only the decorative member 576 in the top protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged in the center, and left and right of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to the top left decorative portion 574e and the top right decorative portion 574f formed on the left and right ends of the unit main body 574. Thereby, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be totally decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 near both ends in the left-right direction. Since the upper speaker 573 is provided and the speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are vertically separated from the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in a good state, and a high-quality stereo sound can be enjoyed.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and a door frame top right decoration by a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member. The entire front surface of the 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can illuminate and decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Door frame action effect]
The operation and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the through holes 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 are made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than those of the conventional pachinko machine. The height of the dish unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction is reduced in accordance with the expansion of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 540 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the horizontal direction. Is made smaller. As a result, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , Corresponds to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

The door frame 3 is an effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 in the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward under the through-hole 111. The front surface (front surface of the front and lower decorative portion 326c of the plate) of the lower half (the portion below the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 is recessed so as to be recessed rearward (dish unit). It is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 are located rearward from the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the effect operation unit 400). ing. As a result, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the player is made to stand out and emphasize the effect operation unit 400. It is possible to draw a strong attention to the effect operation unit 400.

The door frame 3 tilts the effect operation unit 400 arranged in front of the plate unit 320 below the through hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces diagonally upward and forward. Since it is installed in the state, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is in a state of facing the player's head (face), and the player drops his / her line of sight to operate the production operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state close to the front, and the large and round operation button 410 can be strongly visually recognized, and the expectation for the production using the operation button 410 can be raised. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be fully enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with an operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the total height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward in a round shape, when operating the operation button 410, a short distance of hand movement is required. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the "quick press" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward in a round shape, is attached in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation buttons of a conventional pachinko machine, and it can be pressed to the left or right. It can be operated satisfactorily from the front or the front, and the operation button 410 having good operability makes it possible to further enjoy the production using the operation button 410.

Further, since the door frame 3 is attached with the effect operation unit 400 in a suspended state by the plate unit 320 and is provided with a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at the lower part of the effect operation unit 400, the game is played. When the vibration motor 424 is rotated according to the state to generate vibration, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, which surprises the player and operates the operation button. The production using 410 can be further enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (directing operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with the conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 underneath is less noticeable, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is accustomed to seeing a conventional pachinko machine to recognize that it is clearly different, and an appeal that strongly attracts the player's attention. It can be a powerful pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d which is opened on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be secured. Further, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand in the lower plate 322 or puts his left hand finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and the size of the lower plate opening 326d is large. It is possible to recognize by touch that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than that of the lower plate 322.

Further, the door frame 3 is a lower portion for pulling out the lower plate ball supply port 323c at which the game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322 and the game balls of the lower plate 322 into a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The countersunk ball extraction holes 322a are arranged in a straight line in the front-rear direction, and are arranged on the right outer side of the lower plate opening 326d (on the right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400) in the front view. That is, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are provided with the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Since it is arranged behind the side, etc., the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, since the door frame 3 has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged below the front (direct front) of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened. Then, the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 is immediately discharged from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like as soon as it enters the lower plate 322. At this time, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, the flow of the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like through the lower plate 322 to the dollar box also I can't see it. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 and the game ball paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 is full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (driving operation of the game ball, directing image, etc.) and suppress the deterioration of the interest. it can.

Further, in the door frame 3, the lower plate ball supply port 323c has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged at a position on the front left side of the lower plate 322, and the lower plate 322 stands on the right side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since the raised wall portion is curved diagonally so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 can be directly fed to the lower plate ball. It can be guided to the punching hole 322a, or can be reflected on the right wall portion and indirectly guided to the lower plate ball punching hole 322a. As a result, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied to the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is in the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without invading (lower plate first region A1), the lower plate 322 does not show the game balls circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 with the lower plate 322 facing forward between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his / her hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his / her hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be satisfactorily output forward, and the sound produced by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his or her hand on or approaches the lower plate 322, the player can feel the vibration due to the deep bass from the speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e, and the game can be played. It is possible to entertain people and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and greatly protrudes forward from the right side of the through hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door is opened. Since the right side unit 550 of the frame can exert an action effect like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing with the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. You can make the player feel as if you are there, and you can let other players around you play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about it.

Further, since the door frame 3 can be light-emittingly decorated on the front end and the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, a game hall in which the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side. Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified even from a distance such as from the lateral direction along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. It can be machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decoration member 576 that protrudes forward in the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through opening 111, and fronts on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576. The shape is recessed so as to be hollowed out to the rear (the top middle decoration member of the door frame top unit 570 is more than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576. The front surface of both the left and right sides of the 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so as to be located rearward. As a result, only the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 seems to protrude greatly forward, so that the top middle decoration member 576 can be highlighted and emphasized to the player. The interior decorative member 576 can be strongly noticed.

By the way, in the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, a pair of upper speakers separated to the left and right are provided, and the two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is a pair of upper parts of the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal on both left and right ends. A top with a speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from both left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to both ends in the left-right direction through the front of the speaker cover 575, and a top. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be luminescently decorated. As a result, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be decorated as a whole, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 becomes inconspicuous at the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. At first glance, the player can be made aware of the fact that the pachinko machine 1 has a high appeal to the player, and the pair of upper speakers 573 can entertain the player with high-quality stereo sound. it can.

As described above, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top interior decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are formed below and above the through hole 111. Since each of them protrudes greatly forward in the center of the left-right direction, it is possible to show the player a unified decoration at the top and bottom where the virtual line passing through the center of the left-right direction stands out, and the decoration has a sophisticated feel. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent than other pachinko machines and has high appeal.

Further, in the door frame 3, since the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 and the effect operation unit 400, which are arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction, are projected forward, the top middle decoration member 576. And when the effect operation unit 400 is light-emittingly decorated, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting line extending vertically at the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the line of sight of the player is arranged in the center of the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 109. FIG. 106 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 107 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside. The main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. It can be installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. It includes a main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600. ..

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and has a ball launching device 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and a right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. The locking unit 700 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the main body frame base 600 are attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 that pays out the game ball to the player side, a board unit 900 that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and an openable and closable attachment to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. It includes a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 106 to 109, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape in which the front view shape extends vertically. The main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth within a height range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and the game board insertion port 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and a game. The game board mounting portion 602, which forms the lower side of the board insertion port 601 and on which the game board 5 is mounted, and the game board mounting portion 602 project upward from the center in the left-right direction and are left and right at the lower end of the game board 5. And a game board regulation unit 603 that regulates the movement to the rear.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided on the right side of the front view of the launcher mounting portion 604 for mounting the ball launcher 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 and the launch device mounting portion 604. The cylinder insertion port 605 through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and the door of the board unit 900 which penetrates back and forth from the center of the front view of the game board mounting portion 602 to the left and below. A circular shape that penetrates back and forth between the connection opening 606 that allows the frame relay board 911 to face forward and the lower left side of the front view of the game board mounting part 602 so that the speaker unit 920 in the board unit 900 faces forward. The speaker opening 607 and the like are provided.

Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the right side of the game board insertion port 601 to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 980 can be rotated at the rear end. It includes a rear extension 608 that can be attached. Further, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 is formed near the upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface, and the upper hinge member 620 for attaching the upper hinge member 620 on the main body frame side and the upper hinge member 640 for attaching the lower hinge member 640 on the main body frame side A portion 609 and a lower hinge mounting portion 610 are provided.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is rotatably attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be openable and closable, and a position slightly lower on the left side of the front left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602. A game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 601 is provided.

[4-2. Main body frame side upper hinge member and main body frame side lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 109. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 609 and the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

The upper hinge member 620 on the main body frame side has an upper hinge main body 621 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 621 protrudes upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side, and the upper hinge main body 621, which penetrates the upper hinge main body 621 on the left side of the front view of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, pivotally support the upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side. It is provided with an upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame for the purpose. The downwardly bent portion of the upper hinge main body 621 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 609 of the main body frame base 600.

The lower hinge member 640 on the main body frame side penetrates vertically through the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L shape and the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641. A lower hinge hole for the outer frame (not shown) that is pivotally supported by the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2, and a flat plate that is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 641 and extends horizontally. The lower hinge second main body 643 in which the rear portion of the shaped plate is bent upward in an L shape, and the lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side of the door frame 3 which penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643. The hinge hole 644 for the door frame for axially supporting the door frame and the hinge hole 644 for the door frame at the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643 extend upward from the left end on the rear side of the door frame 3 It is provided with a regulation piece 645 for restricting the rotation range of the.

In the lower hinge second main body 643, the horizontally extended portion is above the horizontally extended portion of the lower hinge first main body 641 with a certain interval, and the portion bent upward is the lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of the upwardly bent portion of the main body 641. In the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, the portions of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 that are bent upward are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 109. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U-shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. Further, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 601 of the main body frame base 600 from moving forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending from the front end to the right. A set of left positioning members 661 are attached vertically separated from each other.

This reinforcing frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side when viewed from the front) of the main body frame base 600, and also enters the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106, 108 and 109. The ball launcher 680 is a device for driving a game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In this ball launching device 680, the driving strength of the game ball changes according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 680 has a flat plate-shaped launch base 681 attached to the launcher attachment portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and a launch base 681 mounted on the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 681 when viewed from the front. A launch solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid that penetrates and extends forward, a ball hammer 683 whose base end is attached to the rotation axis of the launch solenoid 682, and a ball hammer 683 that extends diagonally upward to the left from the vicinity of the tip. It is equipped with a launch rail 684, which is attached to the front surface of the launch base 681 so that the game ball can roll.

In this ball launching device 680, a game ball is supplied from the ball feed unit 250 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and the game ball is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684. Then, when the handle 302 is rotated, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting mallet 683. Then, the game ball struck by the ball hammer 683 is guided through the launch rail 684 by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and is driven into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball, etc., between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002). Then, it falls into the rail ball receiving port 275 of the lower rail cover unit 270, passes through the inside of the rail cover unit 270, and is discharged to the lower plate 322.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 109. The locking unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4, and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 includes a unit base 701 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lock units 701 that protrude forward from the unit base 701 and can be locked to the door frame 3. The door frame hook 702, a plurality of outer frame hooks 703 that project rearward from the unit base 701 and can be locked to the outer frame 2, and a columnar project from the lower part of the unit base 701 to the front. A protrusion protrudes from the front end in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and the rotation of the cylinder lock 211 is transmitted by engaging with the rotation transmission member 212 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame 3, and the door is transmitted according to the rotation direction of the key. It includes a key cylinder 710 that unlocks either the frame hook 702 or the outer frame hook 703.

[4-6. Payout unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 128. FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 114 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 114 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guidance unit. Further, FIG. 116 (a) is a perspective view of the payout device of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 116 (b) is a perspective view of the payout device as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the payout device disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the payout device disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 119 (a) is a front view of the payout device, and FIG. 119 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line SS in (a). Further, FIG. 120 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is closed by the ball pulling movable piece in the payout device, and FIG. Is.

Further, FIG. 121 (a) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 121 (b) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 122 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 122 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. is there. Further, FIG. 123 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full-filled ball path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full-filled ball path unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 126 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank path unit, and FIG. 126 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. .. Further, FIG. 127 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full tank path unit. FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball in the payout unit.

As shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment is attached to the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the upper part of the payout unit base 801. It is attached to the ball tank 802 that stores the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall (not shown) in the shape of a box that extends upward and to the left and right, and the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802. It is equipped with a tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 to the left in the front view. In the tank rail 803, while guiding the game ball to the left, the ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 128) that hangs swingably from above aligns the game balls in two rows in the front-rear direction.

Further, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner. A payout device 830 that is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 and pays out game balls guided by the ball guidance unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. And have. Game balls are distributed in two rows from the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, and the game balls are paid out one by one from the payout device 830.

Further, the payout unit 800 guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 downward, and also guides the game balls downward according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. A normal taxiway 861 that guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3, and guides the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e forward and guides the game ball forward from the front end of the door frame 3. A taxiway opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the full taxiway 862 that guides to the full taxiway receiving port 274, and the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. The lower full tank path unit 860 and the like are provided.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115. The ball guidance unit 820 has a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has an open rear side, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and has an open front side, and a front case. A flat partition plate 823 that is attached between the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and separates the front case 821 and the rear case 822, and the front and rear ends are connected to the front case 821 and the rear case 822 through the partition plate 823. A pair of movable piece members front 825 and rear movable piece members that are rotatably attached by the attached rod-shaped shaft member 824 and are arranged in the front case 821 and the rear case 822, respectively. It includes an 826 and a ball breakage detection sensor 827 that is mounted in the front case 821 and can detect the rotation positions of a pair of movable piece member front 825 and movable piece member rear 826.

The front case 821 has a ball guidance inlet 821a that is open so that the game ball can pass in the upper part of the right side surface, and a ball guidance outlet that is open so that the game ball can pass through at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface. The 821b is provided with a guide passage 821c that communicates the ball guide inlet 821a and the ball guide outlet 821b and allows the game ball to circulate. The guide passage 821c has an introduction portion 821d extending diagonally from the ball guidance inlet 821a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introduction portion 821d. It is composed of a detection unit 821e that extends straight downward to the vicinity and a meandering unit 821f that extends from the detection unit 821e in a meandering manner with the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 is provided with a notch 821g on the wall on the right side of the front view of the detection unit 821e in the guidance passage 821c.

The rear case 822 has a ball guidance inlet 822a that is open so that the game ball can pass in the upper part of the right side surface, and a ball guidance outlet that is open so that the game ball can pass through at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface. It is provided with a guide passage 822c that communicates the 822b, the ball guidance inlet 822a, and the ball guidance outlet 822b, and allows the game ball to circulate. The guide passage 822c has an introduction portion 822d extending diagonally from the ball guidance inlet 822a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d. It is composed of a detection unit 822e that extends straight downward to the vicinity and a meandering unit 822f that extends from the detection unit 822e in a meandering manner with the left and right widths of the rear case 822. Further, the rear case 822 is provided with a notch 822g on the wall on the right side of the front view of the detection unit 822e in the guidance passage 822c.

After this, the rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821, and in a state of being assembled to the ball guidance unit 820, the guidance passage 821c and the guidance passage 822c are formed so as to coincide with each other in the front-rear direction. There is.

The shaft member 824 has front and rear ends attached below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

The movable piece member front 825 has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 825a extending vertically, a shaft hole 825b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right-angled surface of the movable piece 825a and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 825a. The extension portion 825c extending to the right at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 825a from the upper end of the movable piece 825c, and the extending portion 825c and the movable piece 825a are connected to each other and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. The connecting portion 825d, the weight mounting portion 825e having a through hole protruding outward from the vicinity of the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d and penetrating back and forth, and the extending portion 825c. The detection piece 825f, which extends outward from the tip on the right side and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and the movable piece 825a on the outer circumference of the connecting portion 825d, extend outward in a flat plate shape. It is provided with a stopper piece of 825 g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece member front 825 rotates so that the weight mounting portion 825e protruding from the outer circumference of the connecting portion 825d is located directly below the shaft hole 825b due to its own weight. Then, the movable piece 825a is in a state of extending diagonally downward from the portion of the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in the state where the ball guidance unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, the lower end of the movable piece 825a protrudes into the guidance passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g is provided. It is in a state of being in contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 821c (detection unit 821e). When the stopper piece 825g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from further rotating in the direction of projecting into the guidance passage 821c (leftward in front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 825a is rotated in the direction (to the right in the front view) of the movable piece member front 825 so as to approach the wall of the guide passage 821c, the left surface of the movable piece 825a becomes the guide passage 821c. Match the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f in front of the movable piece member 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 821c, the ball breakage detection sensor 827 does not detect it.

The movable piece member rear 826 has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 826a extending vertically, a shaft hole 826b penetrating back and forth at the upper end of the right-angled surface of the movable piece 826a through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 826a. 826c extending to the right at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a from the upper end of the The connecting portion 826d, the weight mounting portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d and penetrates back and forth, and the extending portion 826c. The detection piece 826f, which extends outward from the tip on the right side and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and the movable piece 826a on the outer circumference of the connecting portion 826d, extend outward in a flat plate shape. It is provided with a stopper piece of 826 g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 826b, the movable piece member rear 826 rotates so that the weight mounting portion 826e protruding from the outer circumference of the connecting portion 826d is located directly below the shaft hole 826b due to its own weight. Then, the movable piece 826a is in a state of extending diagonally downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in the state where the ball guidance unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch portion 822g of the rear case 822, the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guidance passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g It is in a state of being in contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 822c (detection unit 822e). When the stopper piece 826g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotating in the direction of projecting into the guidance passage 822c (leftward in front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 826a is rotated in the direction (to the right in the front view) of the movable piece 826a so as to approach the wall of the guide passage 822c, the left side surface of the movable piece 826a becomes the guide passage 822c. Match the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 826f of the movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 822c, the ball out detection sensor 827 is not detected.

The ball guidance unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls arranged in a row in the front-rear direction by a tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case are in a state in which the plurality of game balls are arranged in a row. The 822 can guide the lower payout device 830 in two rows back and forth (see FIG. 128). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are separated by a partition plate 823, the game balls circulating in the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and are satisfactorily distributed. Can be done.

Further, when the game ball circulates in the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guidance unit 820, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a come into contact with each other. The front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member rotate in the direction corresponding to the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. As a result, the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are not detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that the game balls are in the guide passages 821c and 822c.

Then, when the game balls are paid out by the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guidance unit 820, the game balls in the guidance passages 821c and 822c flow downstream. When the game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d becomes stronger, and the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d becomes a movable piece at the upper part of the detection units 821e and 822e. It bounces toward the 825a and 826a sides and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the contact of the game balls, the movable pieces 825a and 826a are sandwiched or intruded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. It is possible to remove dust and dirt, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be satisfactorily rotated by their own weight or the like.

Further, the ball guidance unit 820 detects the game balls circulating in the guide passages 821c and 822c by the separate movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and also detects the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826. Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member 826 is detected by one ball breakage detection sensor 827, when the game balls in any of the guide passages 821c and 822c are exhausted, the movable piece member is in front. The movable pieces 825a and 826a of the 825 or the movable piece member 826 rotate so as to protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball has disappeared are detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827. To. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the out of the game ball at an early stage, it is possible to quickly replenish the game ball, and by shortening the time during which the game is interrupted as much as possible, the interest of the player is reduced. It can be suppressed.

Further, by screwing a metal screw as a weight into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, the weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 and the weight of the weight Therefore, the lower end side of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the direction of projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c so that the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is formed. And dust do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a rotate toward the wall side of the guide passages 821c, 822c, dust, dirt, etc. do not get caught between the lower end of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the wall. It is possible to rotate satisfactorily, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

As described above, the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment has the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 whose lower end side protrudes into the guiding passages 821c and 822c through which the game ball flows due to its own weight. By attaching a weight made of metal screws to the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface that comes into contact with the game ball, the movable piece depends on the weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 and the weight of the weight. The lower end side of the 825a and 826a can be easily rotated (protruded) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c so that the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is formed. And dust do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a rotate toward the wall side of the guide passages 821c, 822c, dust, dirt, etc. do not get caught between the lower end of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the wall. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a (825 in front of the movable piece member and 826 after the movable piece member) do not rotate.

Further, since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e which are the through holes, the weight is attached even if the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 rotate frequently. The front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member (weight mounting portions 825e, 826e) do not come off, and the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member can be maintained in good condition for a long period of time. .. Further, the weight can be easily attached to the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member simply by screwing the metal screws into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, so that the time and effort for attaching the weight can be simplified. This makes it possible to reduce the cost associated with assembling the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the introduction portions 821d and 822d for guiding the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a and 826a are provided on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 826a project inward in the guide passages 821c and 822c. As the game ball flows in the guide passages 821c and 822c, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Therefore, due to the vibration of the movable pieces 825a and 826a, dust and dirt that are sandwiched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be removed, and the movable pieces can be moved by their own weight or the like. The front 825 of one member and the rear 826 of a movable piece can be made to rotate satisfactorily.

Therefore, since the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member can be satisfactorily rotated, the state (presence or absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected, and the game ball can be reliably detected. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects due to false positives and the like. Further, even if the game ball supplied to the payout device 830 disappears from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that the presence or absence of the game balls can be quickly detected. By replenishing the game balls and shortening the time during which the game is interrupted as much as possible, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. Payout device]
The payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 120. The payout device 830 has a box shape with an open rear side, and has a payout entrance 831a that opens in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction so that the game ball can pass through, and a payout entrance 831a that opens so that the game ball can pass through near the left end of the front view on the bottom surface. The payout outlet 831b, the ball outlet 831c that is open so that the game ball can pass near the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, and the payout passage 831d that communicates the payout entrance 831a and the payout outlet 831b and allows the game ball to circulate. , And a front box 831 having a ball removal passage 831e, which branches from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball removal outlet 831c and allows game balls to circulate, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. A box-shaped with an open front side, a payout entrance 832a that opens in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction so that the game ball can pass through, and a payout that opens so that the game ball can pass near the left end of the front view on the bottom surface. The exit 832b, the ball ejection outlet 832c that is open so that the game ball can pass near the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, the payout passage 832d that communicates the payout entrance 832a and the payout outlet 832b, and the payout passage 832d that allows the game ball to circulate. It is provided with a rear box 832 having a ball-extracting passage 832e, which branches from the middle of the passage 832d and communicates with the ball-extracting outlet 832c to allow game balls to circulate.

Further, the payout device 830 has a shallow box-shaped front cover 833 mounted on the front side of the front box 831 and the rear side is open, and a rotating shaft mounted in the front box 831 so that the rotating shaft penetrates the front box 831. The payout motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, the drive gear 835 attached to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834, and the drive gear 835 mesh with each other and can rotate with the front box 831 and the front cover 833. The spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836 attached to the intermediate gear 836, the driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and the driven gear 837 rotatably penetrate, and the front end is attached to the front cover 833 and the rear end is attached. The shaft member 838 whose end penetrates the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and the shaft member 838 which is rotatably attached through the shaft member 838 and the payout passages 831d and 832d of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. It is equipped with a payout blade 839 that is arranged inside and rotates integrally with the driven gear 837, and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detects the rotation of the payout blade 839. ing.

Further, the payout device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and has a flat plate-shaped partition plate 841 that separates the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832, and the front box 831. The payout detection sensor 842, which is attached between the box and the rear box 832 and detects the game ball that is paid out by the rotation of the payout blade 839 and is discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b, and the payout passages 831d, 832d and the ball removal passage. A movable ball removal piece 843 that is rotatably attached by the front box 831 and the rear box 832 at the portion where the 831e and 832e are branched and can close the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, and the front box 831 and the rear. The box 832 is provided with a ball pulling lever 844 that is slidably attached up and down on the upper right side of the front view and makes the ball pulling movable piece 843 rotatable or non-rotatable.

The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends diagonally to the lower right of the front view from the payout entrance 831a toward the ball ejection port 831c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It bends so that it extends vertically to, and after bending so that it extends almost horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, it extends vertically again downward about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right width of the front box 831. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be located directly above the payout outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831 and extends vertically to the payout outlet 831b. The payout blade 839 is arranged at a crank-shaped bent portion in the payout passage 831d.

On the other hand, the ball removing passage 831e is a form in which the portion of the payout passage 831d extending diagonally from the payout entrance 831a to the lower right is further extended, and is about 1/3 of the total height of the front box 831 from the upper surface. It branches up to the height near the center.

Further, the front box 831 is formed on a guide shelf 831f that protrudes rearward as it goes downward at a portion of the payout passage 831d that extends vertically toward the payout outlet 831b, and on the upper part of the right side surface in the front view. It is provided with a lever mounting portion 831 g for slidably mounting the ball pulling lever 844 up and down.

The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends diagonally to the lower right of the front view from the payout entrance 832a toward the ball ejection port 832c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It bends so that it extends vertically to, and after bending so that it extends almost horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, it extends vertically again downward about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right width of the rear box 832. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be located directly above the payout outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832, and extends vertically to the payout outlet 832b. The payout blade 839 is arranged at a crank-shaped bent portion in the payout passage 832d.

On the other hand, the ball removing passage 832e is a form in which the portion of the payout passage 832d extending diagonally to the lower right from the payout entrance 832a is further extended, and is about 1/3 of the total height of the rear box 832 from the upper surface. It branches up to the height near the center.

Further, the rear box 832 is formed on a guide shelf 832f that protrudes forward as it goes downward at a portion of the payout passage 832d that extends vertically toward the payout outlet 832b, and on the upper part of the right side surface in the front view. It is provided with a lever mounting portion 832 g for mounting the ball pulling lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

The payout passages 831d, 832d and the ball removal passages 831e, 832e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream of the portion where the payout blade 839 is arranged. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f, 832f and the payout outlets 831b, 832b. That is, the game ball that circulates through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game ball that circulates through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are before and after the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the guide shelves 831f and 832f, respectively. It is brought close to the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

The driven gear 837 protrudes radially from the rear surface of the spur gear-shaped gear portion 837a that meshes with the intermediate gear 836 and the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an interval of 60 degrees in the circumferential direction, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. It includes a plurality of detection pieces 837b, and a connecting portion 837c that projects rearward from the center of the gear portion 837a in a cylindrical shape and has irregularities formed on the peripheral surface of the rear end so that it can be connected to the payout blade 839. ..

The payout blades 839 extend in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction and project from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a through which the shaft member 838 is inserted and the base cylinder portion 839a in the direction perpendicular to the axis at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The plurality (three) front blades 839b and the plurality of (three) front blades 839b project from the rear end of the base cylinder 839a in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be staggered. (3) The rear blade 839c and the connected portion that protrudes forward from the front end of the base tubular portion 839a in a tubular shape and has irregularities that can be connected to the connecting portion 837c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. It is equipped with 839d.

The front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c of the payout blades 839 are provided with three each at an interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blades 839c rotate with respect to the front blades 839b so as to be staggered. It is offset in the direction at an angle of 60 degrees and extends outward. In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) are connected by an arc recessed toward the center, and the diameter of the arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, a ball accommodating portion 839e capable of accommodating only one game ball is formed between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c).

Further, the diameter D1 of the outer circumferences of the three front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c centered on the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a is formed to be 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a up to the portion closest to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a in the arc portion (ball accommodating portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). Is formed to be about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the depth [(diameter D1-diameter D2) / 2] from the outer circumferences of the front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball accommodating portion 839e is 0.1 to 0. It is said to be four times.

Therefore, the arc portion (ball accommodating portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) can hold about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer circumference of the game ball. it can. In other words, it can accommodate a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be quickly accommodated between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (ball accommodating portion 839e).

In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 in a state where the payout device 830 is assembled. The game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be paid out, respectively. Further, the payout blades 839 are arranged in the payout passages 831d and 832d at locations where the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are bent in a crank shape below the center of the total height. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the rotation center of the payout blade 839 is located directly below the portion extending vertically downward from the vicinity of the center of the total height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. Then, at the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the payout blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the payout blade 839, and from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball accommodating portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. ..

As a result, when the game ball flowing down on the payout blade 839 comes into contact with the outer circumferences of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c, the payout device 830 passes through the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d. It cannot be discharged from the outlets 831b and 832b downward. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e, it moves with the rotation of the payout blade 839 and can pass through the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. It is released downward.

Further, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is set to about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the ball accommodating portion 839e makes the diameter 1 of the outer diameter of the game ball. Since the depth of / 7 to 1/4 is accommodated, the time required for accommodating the game ball can be shortened while the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 is made as small as possible. As a result, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated at high speed, the game ball can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Therefore, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased as compared with the conventional case, and the time required to pay out the game balls can be shortened.

The ball-pulling movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape in the vertical and front-rear directions, and has a main body portion 843a in which the lower portion is bent to form a front view shape and a tubular shape extending in the front-rear direction at the upper end of the main body portion 843a. A barrel portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a protruding portion 843c protruding from the upper part of the outer surface of the main body portion 843a which is bent in a dogleg shape, and a main body portion 843a. It is provided with a weight mounting portion 843d (see FIG. 120) formed of through holes penetrating back and forth at the lower portion bent in a dogleg shape.

In the state where the payout device 830 is assembled, the ball-extracting movable piece 843 is oriented so that the lower part of the main body part 843a extends diagonally to the lower left in the front view, and the upper end shaft tube part 843b pays out the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, the rotation is possible at a portion extending diagonally to the lower right of the front view from the outlets 831a and 832a and at a position outside the wall on the right side of the front view slightly above the portion that bends downward. It is attached to.

In the normal state, the payout device 830 of the present embodiment has the ball pulling lever 844 slid downward, and the lower portion of the ball pulling lever 844 hits the protruding portion 843c of the ball pulling movable piece 843 from the right side when viewed from the front. I'm in contact. As a result, the ball-extracting movable piece 843 is restricted from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 120 (a)).

In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a which is bent in a dogleg shape of the ball-extracting movable piece 843, the upper side extends vertically from the bent part, and the lower side of the bent part is diagonally lower left in the front view. Extends to. The lower end of the main body portion 843a is located in the vicinity of the portion where the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are branched. Therefore, the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball pulling movable piece 843 (main body portion 843a), and the surface of the main body portion 843a facing the left side forms a part of the wall of the payout passages 831d and 832d. doing.

The ball pulling movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed so that the center of gravity of the ball pulling movable piece 843 is located on the left side of the front view of the vertical line passing through the center of the barrel portion 843b under a normal state, and its own weight. A force is acting to rotate the ball counterclockwise when viewed from the front, but the ball pulling lever 844 regulates the rotation counterclockwise, so that the normal state is maintained.

When the ball pulling lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower part of the ball pulling lever 844 separates from the protruding portion 843c of the ball pulling movable piece 843, and the ball pulling movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front. The regulation of movement is lifted. Therefore, the ball-extracting movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise due to its own weight so that the center of gravity is located directly below the barrel portion 843b. The ball-extracting movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body portion 843a abuts on the left surface of the member forming the right side surface of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 120 (b)). As a result, the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game balls entering from the payout entrances 831a and 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removal movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are circulated and discharged downward from the ball removal outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

In the present embodiment, since the ball pulling movable piece 843 is provided with a weight mounting portion 843d, the ball pulling lever 844 is slid upward by screwing and mounting a weight made of a metal screw into the weight mounting portion 843d. When the restriction on the counterclockwise rotation in the front view is lifted, the lower end of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 protrudes into the ball-extracting passages 831e and 832e due to the weight of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It can be easily rotated in the direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front).

Further, in a normal state in which the ball pulling lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e, the game ball entering from the payout ports 831a and 832a enters the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843. Since they are in contact with each other, the ball-pulling movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Therefore, dust, dust, etc. that are sandwiched or invaded between the lower end of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball-extracting passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball-extracting movable piece 843, and the dust can be removed. It is possible to prevent the ball-extracting movable piece 843 from being unable to rotate due to biting dust or the like.

Further, since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d which is a through hole and mounted, even if the ball pulling movable piece 843 rotates frequently, the weight can be pulled out and the ball pulling movable piece 843. The ball-extracting movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long period of time without coming off from the (weight mounting portion 843d). Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball-extracting movable piece 843 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portion 843d, the time and effort for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. It is possible to reduce the cost related to.

By the way, when the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long period of time by the ball pulling movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotating shaft of the ball pulling movable piece 843 or the rotating shaft rusts, resulting in a ball. The pull-out movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game ball entering from the payout entrances 831a and 832a is brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843, the ball pulling passage 831e is provided by the ball pulling movable piece 843. , 832e is closed, and when the ball pulling lever 844 to release the closing is slid upward to unlock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 843, and the impact of the contact causes the game ball to come into contact with it. The ball pulling movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

Therefore, when the ball pulling lever 844 is operated to open the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e, the ball pulling movable piece 843 can rotate satisfactorily, so that the game ball can be pulled out reliably. , Workability at the time of maintenance etc. can be improved.

[4-6c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 at a position below the payout device 830. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 851 with the rear side open, and the upper full tank base 851 is attached to the rear side and the front side is open. It includes a box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a payout device pressing member 853 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full tank cover 852 and can press the payout device 830 upward.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 850 has an upper payout ball receiving port 850a that opens upward so that a game ball can pass through a portion on the left side from the center on the left and right in front view on the upper surface, and a right side from the center on the left and right in front view on the upper surface. It is formed between the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852, and is received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper ball storage passage 850c having a predetermined size through which game balls circulate, a normal discharge port 850d that opens downward at a portion directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c, and an upper ball storage. The full tank discharge port 850e, which is open downward at the lower end of the passage 850c except for the normal discharge port 850d, and the upper ball storage passage which protrudes upward from between the normal discharge port 850d and the full tank discharge port 850e. It is provided with a partition section 850f that partitions the lower part of the 850c to the left and right.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 850 has an upper ball pulling passage 850 g that guides the game ball that has entered from the upper ball pulling entrance 850b downward, and an upper portion that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball pulling passage 850 g. It is equipped with a ball removal outlet 850h. The upper full tank path unit 850 is opened downward with the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball extraction outlet 850h arranged in this order from the left side when viewed from the front. Further, the upper full tank path unit 850 is provided with a back cover mounting portion 854 for mounting the back cover 980 at the right end of the upper full tank base 851.

In the upper full tank path unit 850, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located directly under the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830 in a state of being assembled to the payout unit 800, and the upper ball ejection port 850b. Is located directly below the ball ejection ports 831c and 832c of the payout device 830. Further, in a state where the upper full tank path unit 850 is assembled in the payout unit 800, the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball ejection port 850h are the normal taxiways of the lower full tank path unit 860. Each of the 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower ball-extracting taxiway 865 opens directly above the rear end opening (see FIG. 128).

In the upper full tank path unit 850, the game balls discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b, which are paid out by the payout device 830, enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. When the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, the game ball that has entered the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a opens directly under the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. It is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d.

When the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with the game balls and the game balls cannot be stored, and the normal taxiway 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with the game balls, the door frame 3 is normally released. The exit 850d is closed. When a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is normally stored above the discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of the game balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than the partition 850f, the game balls newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c get over the partition 850f and become full. It will be discharged downward from the tongue discharge port 850e, and will be sent to the lower plate 322 through the full tank taxiway 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860.

In this way, the upper full tank path unit 850 automatically lowers the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 321 according to the amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the plate 322.

[4-6d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 123 to 127. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full tank path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower full taxiway unit 860 guides the game ball released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full taxiway unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 normal taxiway 861. And a full taxiway 862 that guides the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the full tank reception port 274 of the door frame 3, and usually. The taxiway opening and closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end opening of the taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the taxiway opening and closing door 863 are the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862. It is provided with a closing spring 864, which is urged in the direction of closing the front end opening of the door.

Further, the lower full tank path unit 860 guides the game ball discharged from the upper ball extraction outlet 850h of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward, and is above the substrate unit base 910 of the substrate unit 900 from the central right end in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a lower ball removal taxiway 865 for discharging to.

In the lower full tank taxiway unit 860, the normal taxiway 861, the full taxiway 862, and the lower taxiway 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in the front view. The rear ends of the normal taxiway 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower taxiway 865 are open upward. Further, the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are lined up on the left and right, and extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lowered. Further, the full taxiway 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal taxiway 861. The normal taxiway 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower taxiway 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be divided into upper and lower parts as shown in the figure.

The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867, and is rotatably attached in the front-view clockwise direction by the closing spring 864. Being urged. More specifically, at the front end of the lower full taxiway unit 860, the full taxiway 862, which is open to the right of the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861 in front view, is one game with respect to the normal taxiway 861. It is placed at a position lower than the height of the sphere. The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is normally attached below the taxiway 861 and at a position on the left side of the full taxiway 862 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth.

The taxiway opening / closing door 863 includes a disk-shaped base 863a that is rotatably attached, and a first door plate 863b that extends diagonally to the upper left from the base 863a in a flat plate shape and can normally close the front end opening of the taxiway 861. A second door plate portion 863c that extends from the base portion 863a to the right in a flat plate shape and can close the front end opening of the full taxiway 862, and an extension portion 863d that extends diagonally from the base portion 863a to the lower left side in a flat plate shape. The extension portion 863d is provided with an actuating protrusion 863e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the tip portion and is capable of contacting the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3.

Here, closing the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 means that it is not necessary to seal the openings and it is sufficient that the game ball cannot pass through. The actuating protrusion 863e is formed in a short arc shape centered on the base portion 863a in a front view, and is inclined so that the front end surface protrudes forward as it approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is urged in the clockwise direction in the front view by the closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863c is from the lower side of the front end opening of the full taxiway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867. By abutting on the boss portion 867a protruding forward, rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted.

The lower full tank path unit 860 of the present embodiment has the pachinko machine 1 assembled, and the front end thereof is the through ball passage 273, the full tank socket 274, and the door opening / closing contact in the foul cover unit 270 of the door frame 3. It is mounted at a position facing the contact portion 281 (see FIG. 127). When the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the taxiway opening / closing door 863 does not come into contact with the operating protrusion 863e. Therefore, the taxiway opening / closing door 863 has an urging force of the closing spring 864. The second door plate portion 863c is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, and stops in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 126). (A). Therefore, in this state, the game balls in the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 861 and the full taxiway are guided. No game ball spills from Road 862.

Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operating protrusion 863e of the taxiway opening / closing door 863 and operates. Due to the inclination of the front end surface of the protrusion 863e, a force that tends to rotate the taxiway opening / closing door 863 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front acts against the urging force of the closing spring 864. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c that closed the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 rotate in a direction away from the front end opening, and the normal taxiway 861 And the front end opening of the full taxiway 862 is opened (see FIG. 126 (b)). In this state, as shown, the first door plate portion 863b is located below the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861, and the second door plate portion 863c is located above the front end opening of the full taxiway 862. ..

In the state where the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 is opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 861 are filled. The through ball passage 273 and the full tank ball receiving port 274 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the taxiway 862, and penetrate from the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 side. The game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 side.

In this way, the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 are different in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 are opened by rotating the taxiway opening / closing door 863. Since the taxiway is opened and closed, the operating range of the taxiway opening / closing door 863 can be narrowed as much as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 can be miniaturized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

In the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, more game balls are released from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with the game balls and the game balls cannot be discharged to the upper plate 321. Is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal taxiway 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with the game balls. Then, when the taxiway 861 is further filled with the game balls and the game balls are further discharged from the payout device 830, the game balls are normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the section 850f, it will flow to the full tank discharge port 850e side, and from the full tank discharge port 850e, the full tank taxiway 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, The payout of the game ball is automatically switched to the lower plate 322 through the foul cover unit 270. After that, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 322 is filled with the game balls in addition to the upper plate 321 and the game balls cannot be supplied to the lower plate 322, the foul cover unit 270 The game ball is stored in the storage passage 277 of the above. Then, when the movable piece 278 rotates due to the game ball being stored in the storage passage 277 and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are full with the game ball. Is notified, and the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is canceled.

It should be noted that the payout device 830 stops the payout of the game ball in response to the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279, for example, the game ball is stored until the movable piece 278 is detected in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270. The number of storage passages 277 on the upstream side, the full taxiway 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, and the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850 can be filled in this state. When the game ball is paid out, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, more game balls can be stored than in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, in a game state in which a large number of game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are paid out by paying out the game balls. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being full of game balls, and it is possible to dedicate the player to the jackpot game and entertain it.

[4-7. Board unit]
The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 109. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the speaker for bass inside. The speaker unit 920 having 921, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodating the power supply board inside, and the power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and inside. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game balls are housed therein. The payout control board box 950 and the like are provided.

The board unit 900 includes a door frame relay board 911 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 910 so as to face forward from the connection opening 606 of the main body frame base 600. The door frame relay board 911 relays the connection between the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the door body relay board attached to the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Is for. The payout device 830 is controlled by the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 129 to 138. FIG. 129 is a front view of the game board in which the panel plate of the game panel is in an opaque state. FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of FIG. 129 as viewed from the front right, FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of FIG. 129 as viewed from the front left, and FIG. It is a perspective view. Further, FIG. 133 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line TT in FIG. 129, and FIG. 134 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line UT in FIG. 129. Further, FIG. 135 is a front view of the front unit of the game board cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area. Further, FIG. 136 is a front view of the game board in which the panel plate of the game panel is in a transparent state. Further, FIG. 137 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 by driving the game ball into the game area 5a. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. The peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side of the 1100, the game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front surface of the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 attached to the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110, which are formed to be slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and the front component 1000. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that game balls driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are played at different positions in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the ball can be received, the gate portion 2003, which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. The second start port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery, and the first special, which is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is provided with a first major winning opening 2005 and a second major winning opening 2006 that can accept game balls at either the lottery result or the second special lottery result.

Further, the front unit 2000 is a start port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1126 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002, and a front view left of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is mounted along the inner rail 1002 and has a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001, and a side slope that is mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit 2200. It is attached to the right side of the front view of the 2300 and the start port unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a, and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a first large winning opening. A frame attached to the attacker unit 2400 having 2005 and the second prize opening 2006, and slightly above the start opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and slightly upward in the center of the front view in the game area 5a. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600, an effect drive board 3031 attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and an effect drive board on the rear surface of the back box 3010. The panel relay board 3032 attached to the right side of the rear view of 3031, the lower left relay board 3033 attached to the right side of the panel relay board 3032 on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the production drive board on the rear surface of the back box 3010. The lower right relay board 3034 attached to the left side of the rear view of 3031 is provided.

Further, the back unit 3000 is a back front decoration unit 3100 attached to the left side and the lower side of the front view at the front end of the back box 3010, and the back unit 3000 attached so as to surround the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The middle movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 attached to the left and right sides of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the upper side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a back-up movable effect unit 3500 that is attached, and a back-bottom movable effect unit 3700 that is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 139. FIG. 139 (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 139 (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the back. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left in the front view, and the right side in the front view at the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with a game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of the portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1008 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1008 has a rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess 1008. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, although not shown, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions protruding rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning protrusions into the inner rail fixing holes formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

Further, although not shown, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses projecting rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses can be positioned between the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1011 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates these notches 1011 and 1127 and is a lower full ball path. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 139. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and which is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is formed with an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the front and rear and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of fitting holes arranged near the outer periphery and formed of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the panel plate 1110 is arranged near the outer periphery of the lower left and penetrates in the front-rear direction and penetrates in the vertical direction. It has a long hole that extends. These fitting holes and elongated holes are arranged outside the game area 5a and are positioned with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engaging step portions having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side, respectively. These engaging steps are notched to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a in the same manner as the fitting holes and the elongated holes, and the panel plate 1110. Is for engaging and fixing to the panel holder 1120.

Further, although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning protrusion (not shown) protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 to the inner rail fixing hole.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion (not shown) that holds the panel plate 1110 detachably and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the inside of the holding step portion is substantially the same size as the game area 5a. It is provided with a through-hole 1122 that penetrates in the front-rear direction.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion of the panel holder 1120 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion is substantially the same as the front surface of the panel holder 1120. It will be on the same side. Further, the holding step portion is formed so that the front inner peripheral surface thereof has a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and aging, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole and the elongated hole formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion, and is arranged forward from the front surface of the holding step portion. It extends toward and is provided with a plurality of protruding pins that can be fitted and inserted into the fitting and elongated holes of the panel plate 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins into the fitting holes and the elongated holes of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned with each other.

Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engaging claw and an engaging piece that engage with the engaging step portion at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claws are arranged above the holding step portion of the panel holder 1120, correspond to the upper engaging step portion of the panel plate 1110, and project forward from the front surface of the holding step portion. It is designed to elastically engage with the engagement step. The engaging claw has a size such that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engaging piece of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding step portion of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engaging step portion of the panel plate 1110. This engaging piece is placed on the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder in a state where a gap of a size that allows the engaging step portion of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted is formed between the engaging piece and the front surface of the holding step portion. It extends by a predetermined amount toward. By engaging the engaging step portion of the panel plate 1110 with these engaging claws and engaging pieces, the panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an out port 1126 that penetrates back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1126.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The cutout portion 1127 coincides with the cutout portion 1011 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the cutout portion 1127 penetrates the cutout portions 1011 and 1127 of the lower full tank path unit 860. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 face forward.

Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to a plurality of mounting bosses (not shown) in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss of the front component 1000 into these plurality of mounting holes, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the panel holder 1120 ( The game panel 1100) can be positioned.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a square insertion hole 1129 that penetrates in the front-rear direction on the upper side of the notch 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened on the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guide unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. As a result, all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged unit 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 houses a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 133) that controls game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to a board holder 1200. And have.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent force against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the payout control board 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 has a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second large winning opening sensor 2402, a first reception sensor 2434, a second reception sensor 2435, and a second start via a panel relay board 3032. Mouth sensor (not shown), first prize-winning mouth sensor (not shown), starting port solenoid (not shown), first attacker solenoid (not shown), second attacker solenoid (not shown), vibration It is connected to a minute solenoid (not shown), a general winning opening sensor 3111, a first starting opening sensor 3112, and a magnetic sensor (not shown).

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 129 and the like. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the outer side of the game area 5a in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 196). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator 1401 consisting of one LED for displaying the game status, and four LEDs for displaying the normal lottery result drawn by the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003. The normal symbol display 1402, the normal hold display 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, and the first start port 2002 are drawn by accepting the game ball. (1) The first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the special lottery, and the first special holding number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002. The second special symbol display 1405 consisting of the device 1404 and eight LEDs displaying the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004, and the game ball to the second starting port 2004. When the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit", etc., the second special hold number indicator 1406 consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holds related to the acceptance of It mainly includes a round indicator 1407 composed of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 and 138. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 133) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. ..

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 400, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect drive board 3031, and the like.

[5-7. Game board side production display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED. The game board side effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface in front view, and a right fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface in front view. The game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves opened on the left inner peripheral surface of the front view in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 into the 3010c diagonally from the rear of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock. The mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can accept game balls driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball can be received at different positions, the gate portion 2003, which is installed at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is a gate. A lottery is made by accepting game balls into the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing through the section 2003. It is provided with a first special winning opening 2005 and a second special winning opening 2006 that can accept game balls depending on the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

A plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and directly above the out port 1126. The gate portion 2003 is arranged below the center in the vertical direction near the right end of the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged directly below the gate portion 2003. The first large winning opening 2005 is arranged at a height between the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 on the right side of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction. The second major winning opening 2006 is arranged between the second starting opening 2004 and the first major winning opening 2005.

Further, the table unit 2000 is provided with a sub-out port 2007 for discharging a game ball from the game area 5a between the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006.

Further, the front unit 2000 is a start port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1126 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002, and a front view left of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is mounted along the inner rail 1002 and has three general winning openings 2001, a side slope 2300 that is attached above the left end of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front, and a starting port unit. Attacker unit 2400 which is attached to the right side of the front view of 2100 and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening 2006. And a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 attached to the substantially center of the game area 5a.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 (a) is a perspective view of the start port unit, the side unit, the side slope, and the attacker unit in the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 140 (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the back. is there. The start port unit 2100 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1126, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. At the top of the start port unit 2100, the first start port 2002 is always open upward with a size capable of accepting only one game ball at a time.

The start port unit 2100 is attached to the translucent unit main body 2101 to which the first start port 2002 is formed and attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and to the rear side of the unit main body 2101. It includes a start port decorative substrate 2102 (see FIG. 135) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. The start port unit 2100 can illuminate the lower side of the first start port 2002 by emitting the LED of the start port decorative substrate 2102.

By attaching the start port unit 2100 to the panel plate 1110, the first start port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and is opened upward, and the first start port 2002 will be described later. It is located directly below the chance exit 2536 at stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500. Therefore, when the game ball is released downward from the chance exit 2536 of the stage 2530, it is accepted by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability. The start port unit 2100 can guide the game ball received in the first start port 2002 to the rear of the panel plate 1110 and deliver it to the central delivery port 3135 of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 described later. it can.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 140. The side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 along the inner rail 1002 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 has three general winning openings 2001 that are always open upward.

The side unit 2200 is provided with three general winning openings 2001 arranged side by side, and the three general winning openings 2001 are provided so as to be higher toward the left side in the front view.

By attaching the side unit 2200 to the panel plate 1110, the three general winning openings 2001 are in a state of protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and are below the first starting port 2002 and started. It is in a state of being arranged between the mouth unit 2100 and the side slope 2300. The side unit 2200 guides the game ball received in each general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel plate 1110 and delivers it to the delivery port 3151 of the ball guidance unit 3150 in the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 described later. be able to.

[5-8c. Side slope]
Next, the side slope 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 140. The side slope 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front slightly downward from the center in the vertical direction in the upper left of the front view of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The side slope 2300 includes a shelf portion 2301 that projects forward and extends to the left and right so that the right end side in the front view is lowered.

When the side slope 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the left end of the shelf portion 2301 is close to the inner rail 1002, and the right end of the shelf portion 2301 is from the leftmost general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Is also located on the left. Further, in the state where the side slope 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the shelf portion 2301 is located above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. As a result, the side slope 2300 can guide the game ball that has flowed down along the inner rail 1002 to the right (center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a) by the shelf portion 2301, and is the first of the start port unit 2100. There is a possibility that the game ball will be accepted in any of the three general winning openings 2001 of the starting port 2002 and the side unit 2200.

[5-8d. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141. FIG. 141 is an explanatory view showing the attacker unit in the front unit cut from the front at a substantially center in the front-rear direction in the game area. The attacker unit 2400 is arranged in the game area 5a on the right side of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 from the front. This attacker unit 2400 has one of the four general winning openings 2001, the general winning opening 2001, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first major winning opening 2005, the second major winning opening 2006, and the sub-out opening 2007. It has.

As shown in FIG. 141 and the like, the attacker unit 2400 has a base in which the outer shape in front view is inclined so that the right end is located slightly upward, a right side that rises substantially vertically from the right end of the bottom, and an upper end of the right side. It is formed in a substantially triangular shape having a hypotenuse extending diagonally so as to connect the left end of the base. In the attacker unit 2400, a gate portion 2003 through which game balls flow up and down is arranged in the upper right corner, and a second starting port 2004 that can be opened forward is arranged directly below the gate portion 2003. .. In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a second large winning opening 2006 that can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting opening 2004, and is always open to the left at the lower left of the second large winning opening 2006. A sub-out port 2007 is arranged. Further, the attacker unit 2400 has a first large winning opening 2005 that can be opened upward slightly to the left of the sub-out opening 2007, and is always open upward to the lower left of the first large winning opening 2005. The general winning opening 2001 is arranged.

The attacker unit 2400 includes a gate sensor 2401 that detects a game ball passing through the gate unit 2003, a second start port sensor (not shown) that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2004, and the first large. The first big winning opening sensor (not shown) that detects the game ball received in the winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening sensor 2402 that detects the game ball received in the second big winning opening 2006. I have.

The attacker unit 2400 has a second start port door 2411 that opens and closes the second start port 2004 according to the result of a normal lottery drawn by passing the game ball of the gate portion 2003, and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. The first special winning opening door 2412 that opens and closes the first special winning opening 2005 according to the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball to, and the first starting opening 2002 or the second It is provided with a second special winning opening door 2413 that opens and closes the second special winning opening 2006 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball into the starting opening 2004.

The attacker unit 2400 has a gate passage 2420 extending vertically in the upper right corner of the gate passage 2420 to allow the game ball to flow, and a left side passage 2421 extending vertically to the left side of the gate passage 2420 to allow the game ball to flow. The right side passage 2422 extending up and down on the right side of the gate passage 2420 and through which game balls can flow, and the lower side of the right side passage 2422 to the lower left end side below the gate passage 2420, the left side passage 2421, and the right side passage 2422. The attacker passage 2423, which extends to the left of the left side passage 2421 and allows the game ball to flow, and the attack ball, which extends to the left so that the left end side is lower below the left side of the attacker passage 2423, guides the game ball. It is equipped with a possible attacker shelf 2424.

In the gate passage 2420, the gate portion 2003 is arranged near the upper part, and the second starting port 2004 is arranged at the lower part. The gate passage 2420 has both left and right walls penetrating between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 so as to communicate with the left side passage 2421 and the right side passage 2422, respectively. The gate passage 2420 extends vertically with a width slightly wider than the outer diameter of the game ball.

In the attacker passage 2423, the second prize opening 2006 is opened on the bottom wall on the left side of the left side passage 2421. In the attacker passage 2423, the second prize-winning door 2413, which closes the second prize-winning door 2006 so as to be openable and closable, forms a part of the bottom wall. Further, the attacker passage 2423 has the lowest left end side opening downward. The second big winning opening 2006 is opened with a width of about 1.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball.

The attacker shelf 2424 is partially formed by the first prize opening door 2412, which is open to the first prize opening 2005 and closes the first prize opening 2005 so as to be openable and closable. The first prize opening 2005 is opened with a width about three times the outer diameter of the game ball. At the right end of the attacker shelf 2424, the sub-out port 2007 is open. Further, one general winning opening 2001 is opened at the lower left side of the left end of the attacker shelf portion 2424.

The second starting port door 2411 allows the second starting port 2004, which is open forward, to be closed from the front, and is rotatable around an axis whose lower side extends to the left and right near the lower end of the second starting port 2004. It is installed. The second starting port door 2411 rotates (rotates) so that the upper side moves forward to open the second starting port 2004, close the gate passage 2420, and flow down the inside of the gate passage 2420. The game ball can be guided to the second starting port 2004 side and accepted into the second starting port 2004. The second starting port door 2411 is formed so as to rotate by driving a starting port solenoid (not shown), and when the starting port solenoid is OFF (when not energized), the second starting port 2004 is closed and the starting port is closed. When the solenoid is ON (when energized), the second starting port 2004 is opened.

The first large winning door 2412 is formed in a plate shape that extends forward and backward and extends left and right so that the left end is lowered, and the first large opening is opened upward by advancing and retreating back and forth. The winning opening 2005 can be closed. The first prize-winning door 2412 closes the first prize-winning door 2005 by moving forward, forms a part of the attacker shelf 2424, and causes the game ball that has flowed down onto the attacker shelf 2424 to the left. It is guided to and discharged downward from the left end of the attacker shelf 2424. In addition, the first prize opening door 2412 opens the first prize opening 2005 by retreating, and the game ball that has flowed down onto the attacker shelf 2424 via the attacker passage 2423 or the like is released into the first prize opening. It can be accepted in 2005. The first prize-winning door 2412 is formed so as to advance and retreat by driving a first attacker solenoid (not shown), and closes the first prize-winning door 2005 when the first attacker solenoid is OFF (when not energized). Then, when the first attacker solenoid is ON (when energized), the first prize opening 2005 is opened.

The second large winning door 2413 is formed in a plate shape that extends forward and backward and extends left and right so that the left end is lowered, and the second large winning door 2413 opens upward by advancing and retreating back and forth. The winning opening 2006 can be closed. The second prize-winning door 2413 closes the second prize-winning door 2006 by advancing and forms a part of the bottom wall of the attacker passage 2423, and forms a gate passage 2420, a left side passage 2421, and a right side passage. The game ball that has passed through any of 2422 is guided to the left and discharged downward from the left end of the attacker passage 2423. In addition, the second prize opening door 2413 opens the second prize opening 2006 by retreating, and the game ball that has entered the attacker passage 2423 can be accepted by the second prize opening 2006 with a high probability. it can. The second prize opening door 2413 is formed so as to advance and retreat by driving a second attacker solenoid (not shown), and closes the second prize opening 2006 when the second attacker solenoid is OFF (when not energized). Then, when the second attacker solenoid is ON (when energized), the second big winning opening 2006 is opened.

Further, the attacker unit 2400 includes an internal passage 2430 through which the game balls received in the second prize opening 2006 can be distributed, and the first entrance 2431 and the second entrance 2432 opened at the bottom of the internal passage 2430. , The distribution piece 2433 that distributes the game ball to either the first inlet 2431 or the second inlet 2432 in the internal passage 2430, and the first inlet sensor 2434 that detects the game ball received in the first inlet 2431. And a second inlet sensor 2435 that detects a game ball received at the second inlet 2432.

The internal passage 2430 is formed on the downstream side of the second large winning opening sensor 2402. The first entrance 2431 is arranged directly below the portion of the second large winning opening sensor 2402 through which the game ball passes, and the second entrance 2432 is arranged on the right side of the front view of the first entrance 2431. .. The distribution piece 2433 is arranged between the first receiving port 2431 and the second receiving port 2432 in the internal passage 2430, and is rotatably attached around an axis whose lower side extends back and forth. The distribution piece 2433 stands up vertically to communicate the second prize opening 2006 and the first entrance 2431, and the upper side moves to the left in the front view to the left side wall of the internal passage 2430. It is attached so as to rotate between the state in which the second special winning opening 2006 and the second receiving port 2432 are communicated with each other by abutting (or approaching). The distribution piece 2433 is formed so as to rotate by driving a distribution solenoid (not shown), and when the distribution solenoid is OFF (when not energized), the game ball is distributed to the first receiving port 2431 and distributed. When the solenoid is ON (when energized), the game ball is distributed to the second receiving port 2432.

When the attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the gate passage 2420 is located directly below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2540 in the center accessory 2500 described later, and the gate portion. 2003 is located above stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500. Further, the first large winning opening 2005 and the general winning opening 2001 are located below the first starting opening 2002 of the starting port unit 2100.

Subsequently, the flow of the game ball in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. Since the gate portion 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 is located above the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the gate portion 2003 is opened even if the game ball is released from the stage 2530. It never passes. Therefore, only the game ball that has flowed down on the right side of the center accessory 2500 may pass through the gate portion 2003. Since the upper end opening of the gate passage 2420 in which the gate portion 2003 is arranged is opened upward just below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2540 in the center accessory 2500, it is on the right side of the center accessory 2500. The game ball that has flowed down will enter the gate passage 2420 with a high probability and pass through the gate portion 2003.

Then, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged from the gate passage 2420 to the attacker passage 2423 through the front of the second start opening door 2411 that closes the second start opening 2004 directly below the gate portion 2003. At this time, if the second start door 2411 is rotated forward and is in the open position, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 comes into contact with the back surface of the second start door 2411 and is in the second position. It will be guided to the start port 2004 side and will be accepted by the second start port 2004. The second start door 2411 is in accordance with the normal lottery result drawn when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 (the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2401) (the normal lottery result is "normal hit"). Since it is driven (sometimes), by appropriately setting the lottery time of the normal lottery result, the opening / closing timing of the second start door 2411, etc., the game ball itself that has been drawn for "normal hit" is accepted into the second start door 2004. be able to.

After being detected by the second start port sensor, the game ball received in the second start port 2004 is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

In the gate passage 2420, since the left and right sides of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 communicate with the left side passage 2421 and the right side passage 2422, the game passing through the gate portion 2003. In rare cases, the ball may enter the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422 side through a communicating portion. That is, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 does not necessarily pass in front of the second starting door 2411.

If the game ball that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the gate passage 2420, it enters either the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422 arranged on the left and right sides of the gate passage 2420. It is discharged to the attacker passage 2423 through the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422.

The game ball released into the attacker passage 2423 from any of the gate passage 2420, the left side passage 2421, and the right side passage 2422 is guided to the left along the inclination of the attacker passage 2423, and is downward from the left end of the attacker passage 2423. Is released to. At this time, when the second prize opening door 2413, which closes the second prize opening 2006, is retracted and the second prize opening 2006 is opened, the game ball released into the attacker passage 2423 is released. There is a high probability that it will be accepted into the second prize opening 2006. The game ball received in the second large winning opening 2006 is sent to the internal passage 2430 after being detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2402, and is sent to the internal passage 2430 by the distribution piece 2433 to the first entrance 2431 or the second entrance 2432. It is distributed to any of.

The game ball received in the first reception 2431 or the second reception 2432 is detected by the first reception sensor 2434 or the second reception sensor 2435, and then downwards (board holder) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. It is discharged to 1200 above).

Since the width of the left and right sides of the second large winning opening 2006 is about 1.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball, the second large winning opening door 2413 retracts and the second large winning opening 2006 is opened. Even if it is open, depending on the speed and behavior of the game ball circulating in the attacker passage 2423, the game ball may jump over the second prize opening 2006 and may not be accepted by the second prize opening 2006. ..

The game ball released from the attacker passage 2423 flows down onto the attacker shelf 2424, is guided by the attacker shelf 2424, and is discharged downward from the left end of the attacker shelf 2424. At this time, if the first prize opening door 2412 is retracted and the first prize opening 2005 is opened, the game ball released from the attacker passage 2423 will be accepted by the first prize opening 2005. .. Therefore, when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a so as to circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500 when the first prize opening 2005 is open, there is a high probability that the game ball will be placed in the first prize opening 2005. Can be accepted.

The game ball received in the first prize opening 2005 is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the first prize opening sensor (not shown).

The game ball discharged downward from the attacker shelf 2424 may be accepted by one general winning opening 2001 arranged below. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is guided to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 and then delivered to the right delivery port 3136 of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. On the other hand, the game ball not accepted by the general winning opening 2001 passes through the out opening 1126 at the lower end of the game area 5a and is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 142 (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory as viewed from the back. The center accessory 2500 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, slightly above the center of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Has been done. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the effect unit and the like provided on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 are visually recognized from the front through the frame. be able to.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 except for the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball driven into the game area 5a is inside the frame. It cannot be invaded.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 that is open so that the game ball in the game area 5a can enter and a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view. It includes an open warp outlet 2522 and a stage 2530 that can roll the game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2522 in the left-right direction and then release it into the game area 5a (see FIG. 135 and the like). ..

The stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and the position corresponding to directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel plate). When attached to 1110), it is formed in a wavy shape so that the position at the substantially center in the left-right direction is slightly higher than that on both the left and right sides. The stage 2530 can discharge the game ball into the game area 5a from the lowest portion on both sides of the center formed in a wavy shape.

The center accessory 2500 has a chance entrance 2535 that is open forward at the highest position of the slightly elevated part in the center of the stage 2530 and allows the game ball to enter, and a game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2535. It is provided with a chance exit 2536 that is discharged into the game area 5a below the stage 2530. The chance exit 2536 is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. As a result, when the game ball is released from the chance exit 2536, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided with a right guide passage 2540 that guides the game ball that has flowed down along the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the front view slightly to the left and then discharges it downward. The right guide passage 2540 is formed so that the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540 is located directly above the gate passage 2420 (gate portion 2003) of the attacker unit 2400 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. Has been done.

The center accessory 2500 is formed so that the outer peripheral surface on the right side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball from the right rail 1005 on the front component 1000 when assembled on the game board 5. Therefore, when the game ball circulates on the right side of the center accessory 2500, it circulates along the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and all the game balls circulating on the right side of the center accessory 2500 are in the right guide passage 2540. You will be guided by entering. As a result, when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a (so-called right-handed) so as to circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball can be passed through the gate portion 2003 with an extremely high probability. it can.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 to 146. FIG. 143 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 144 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main component and viewed from the front, and FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main component and viewed from the rear. is there. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Further, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600, an effect drive board 3031 attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and an effect drive board on the rear surface of the back box 3010. The panel relay board 3032 attached to the right side of the rear view of 3031, the lower left relay board 3033 attached to the right side of the panel relay board 3032 on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the production drive board on the rear surface of the back box 3010. The lower right relay board 3034 attached to the left side of the rear view of 3031 is provided.

Based on the control signal from the peripheral control board 1510, the effect drive board 3031 has a back front decoration unit 3100, a back middle movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, a back right movable effect unit 3400, and a back upper movable effect unit. It controls the decorative substrate, drive motor, etc. provided in the 3500 and the lower back movable effect unit 3700. The panel relay board 3032 includes a main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second large winning opening sensor 2402, a first receiving port sensor 2434, a second receiving port sensor 2435, and a second starting port sensor (not shown). (Omitted), 1st prize opening sensor (not shown), starting port solenoid (not shown), 1st attacker solenoid (not shown), 2nd attacker solenoid (not shown), distribution solenoid (not shown) Is omitted), the connection with the general winning opening sensor 3111, the first starting opening sensor 3112, and the magnetic sensor (not shown) is relayed.

The lower left relay board 3033 relays the connection between the effect drive board 3031 and the back left movable effect unit 3300. The lower right relay board 3034 is a connection between the effect drive board 3031 and the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable effect unit 3200, the back right movable effect unit 3400, the back upper movable effect unit 3500, and the back lower movable effect unit 3700. Is being relayed.

Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear sides of the effect drive board 3031, the panel relay board 3032, the lower left relay board 3033, and the lower right relay board 3034, respectively. A board cover 3035, a panel relay board cover 3036, a lower left relay board cover 3037, and a lower right relay board cover 3038 are provided.

Further, the back unit 3000 is a back front decoration unit 3100 which is attached to the left side and the lower side of the front view at the front end of the back box 3010, and a back which is attached so as to surround the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The middle movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 attached to the left and right sides of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the upper side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a back-up movable effect unit 3500 that is attached, and a back-bottom movable effect unit 3700 that is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 to 146. The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a having an open front and a square penetrating rear wall, and a flat plate frame-shaped opening protruding rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and the two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside to the outside in the frame on the right side of the rear view of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is provided with a cutout portion 3010d in which the lock mechanism 3020 is mounted by being cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the game board side effect display device 1600 into the frame. The lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached to the back box 3010 on the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the movable effect units and the like at appropriate positions.

[5-9b. Back front decoration unit]
Next, the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 to 147. FIG. 147 (a) is a front view of the back front decoration unit in the back unit, and FIG. 147 (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view cut along the VV line in (a). The back front decoration unit 3100 is attached so as to cover the front end of the back box 3010 from the left side to the lower side in front view.

The back front decoration unit 3100 is formed in an L shape (crescent shape) along the left side and the lower side at the front end of the back box 3010, and has a transparent unit base 3110 attached to the front end of the back box 3010. The general winning opening sensor 3111 for detecting the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the table unit 2000, the first starting port sensor 3112 for detecting the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 of the table unit 2000, and the first starting port sensor 3112. A magnetic sensor (not shown) capable of detecting an illegal magnetism applied from the outside is provided in the game area 5a.

Further, the back front decoration unit 3100 extends vertically along the left side of the back box 3010 and is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3110. The back front left decoration unit 3120 and the back front left decoration unit 3120 are back from the lower end. The back front lower decoration unit 3130, which extends to the left and right along the side of the box 3010 and is attached to the front of the unit base 3110, and the back front lower decoration unit 3130, which is located at the lower part on the left side of the front view, is the unit base. It includes a ball guidance unit 3150 mounted on the front surface of the 3110.

As shown in the figure, the back front left decoration unit 3120 of the back front decoration unit 3100 includes a translucent flat back front left decoration decoration body 3121 having a decoration of the characters "Dodododo" and a back front left decoration. A transparent, flat plate-shaped back front left light guide lens 3122 attached to the rear side of the decorative body 3121, and a plurality of LEDs 3123a capable of irradiating light toward the left side surface of the back front left light guide lens 3122 are mounted. It is provided with a back front left decorative substrate 3123 (see FIG. 147 (b)).

The back front left light guide lens 3122 has a plurality of conical reflecting portions 3122a on the rear surface behind the "do" -shaped decoration in the back front left decorative ornament 3121. The light incident on the inside from the left side surface of the back front left light guide lens 3122 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions 3122a, and the back front left decorative decoration arranged in front of the back front left light guide lens 3122. The 3121 can be light-emitting decorated in a planar shape.

The back front lower decoration unit 3130 of the back front decoration unit 3100 is arranged so as to correspond to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, and the back front lower center lens 3131 and a predetermined three-dimensional decoration are formed on the front surface. The back front lower left lens 3132 and the back front lower right lens 3133, which are arranged on the left and right sides of the back front lower center lens 3131 and have a predetermined three-dimensional decoration formed on the front surface, and the back front lower center lens 3131. , A back front lower left lens 3132, and a back front lower decorative substrate 3134 arranged on the rear side of the back front lower right lens 3133 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. By appropriately emitting the LED of the back front lower decorative substrate, the back front lower center lens 3131, the back front lower left lens 3132, and the back front lower right lens 3133 can be light-emitting decorated independently.

Further, the back front lower decoration unit 3130 is open toward the front at the upper center of the back front lower center lens 3131, and the game ball received by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 and guided to the rear is A game ball that is open to the front at the central delivery port 3135 that can be entered and the lower right outside of the lower front lower center lens 3131 of the back front, and is accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 and guided to the rear enters. It is equipped with a possible left delivery port 3137. The game ball that has entered the central delivery port 3135 is discharged downward (above the board holder 1200) after being detected by the first start port sensor 3112. Further, the game ball that has entered the right delivery port 3136 is discharged downward (above the board holder 1200) after being detected by the general winning port sensor 3111.

The ball guidance unit 3150 of the back front decoration unit 3100 is attached to the unit base 3110 so as to be arranged below the back front lower left lens 3132 in the back front lower decoration unit 3130. The ball guidance unit 3150 is formed in a box shape as a whole, and opens forward at a position corresponding to the three general winning openings 2001 in the side unit 2200, and three delivery ports 3151 in which a game ball can enter. And a discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game ball that has entered the inside from the delivery port 3151 downward (above the substrate holder 1200). The game ball that has entered the inside from the delivery port 3151 is discharged downward from the discharge port after being detected by the general winning port sensor 3111.

[5-9c. Movable production unit in the back]
Next, the back-middle movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146. The back middle movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the rear wall in the back box 3010 so as to surround the opening 3010a. The back-middle movable effect unit 3200 is arranged on the left side in the front view, and extends vertically higher than the height of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 and has a predetermined decoration. The back middle right decorative body 3220 which is arranged on the right side of the back box 3010 and extends vertically higher than the height of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 and has a predetermined decoration, and the opening 3010a in the rear wall in the back box 3010. It is provided with a back center drive unit 3250 which is attached to both the upper and lower outer sides and moves the back center left decorative body 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 in the left-right direction.

The back middle left decorative body 3210 is arranged on the rear side of a flat plate-shaped back middle left decorative lens 3211 having a relief-like decoration formed on the front surface and a back middle left decorative lens 3211 on the front surface. The back middle left decorative substrate on which multiple LEDs are mounted (not shown) and the flat back middle left decorative lens 3211 attached to the rear side of the back middle left decorative lens 3211 so as to cover the rear surface of the back middle left decorative substrate. It is equipped with a left decorative base 3212. Although not shown, the back middle left decorative body base 3212 is provided with a rack gear at the lower end, which extends to the left and right and has gear teeth formed upward. The back middle left decorative body 3210 can illuminate the back middle left decorative lens 3211 by emitting the LED of the back middle left decorative substrate.

The back middle right decorative body 3220 is arranged on the rear side of a flat plate-shaped back middle right decorative lens 3221 having a relief-like decoration formed on the front surface and a back middle right decorative lens 3221 on the front surface. The back middle right decorative substrate on which multiple LEDs are mounted (not shown) and the flat back middle right decorative lens 3221 attached to the rear side of the back middle right decorative lens so as to cover the rear surface of the back middle right decorative substrate. It is equipped with a right decorative base 3222. Although not shown, the back middle right decorative body base 3222 is provided with a rack gear at the lower end, which extends to the left and right and has gear teeth formed downward. The back middle right decorative body 3220 can illuminate the back middle right decorative lens 3221 by emitting the LED of the back middle right decorative substrate.

The back middle left decorative lens 3210 and the back middle right decorative lens 3221 and the back middle right decorative lens 3221 are formed in a symmetrical shape with each other, and the game board is formed substantially in the center in the vertical direction. The side of 5 near the center in the left-right direction is formed in a shape as if it were hollowed out.

The back middle drive unit 3250 has an upper rail 3251 mounted on the upper side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and slidably supporting the upper ends of the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220, and the back. A flat plate-shaped unit base 3252 that slidably supports the lower ends of the middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220, and an opening 3010a in the back box 3010 that is attached to the rear side of the unit base 3252. A flat plate-shaped mounting base 3253 mounted on the lower side, a back-middle drive motor 3254 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3252 so that a rotating shaft protrudes between the mounting base 3253 and the unit base 3252, and a back-middle The rotation of the drive motor 3254 is transmitted and the rack gear of the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the rack gear of the back middle right decorative body 3220 mesh with each other so as to be rotatably mounted on the front surface of the mounting base 3253 and sandwiched from above and below. It is equipped with a pinion gear (not shown).

In the normal state, the back middle movable effect unit 3200 is in a state in which the left and right back middle left decorative bodies 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 are in the most separated retracted positions from each other. In this state, the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 are slightly visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 129 and the like). When the pinion gear is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by driving the back middle drive motor 3254 from the normal state, the rack gear of the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 meshing with the pinion gear With the rack gear, the back middle left decorative body 3210 moves to the right and the back middle right decorative body 3220 moves to the left.

As a result, the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220, which have been separated from each other, move so as to approach each other, and the movement stops immediately before they come into contact with each other. In this state, the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 are located substantially in the center (appearance position) of the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the back middle left decorative body 3210 The decorations with the back middle right decoration body 3220 are combined to form one large decoration (decoration imitating cherry blossom petals) (see FIG. 185).

[5-9d. Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the front left outer side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the back right movable effect unit 3400 with the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 in between.

The back left movable effect unit 3300 includes a back left decorative body 3310 formed in a triangular columnar shape, a back left rotating drive unit 3330 that rotates the back left decorative body 3310 around an vertically extending axis, and a back box 3010. The back left movement drive unit 3350, which is attached and moves the upper end side of the back left rotation drive unit 3330 in the left-right direction, and the back left rotation drive unit 3330, which is installed in the back box 3010, guides the lower end side of the back left rotation drive unit 3330 so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The back left lower guide rail 3370 and the back upper left decorative body 3390 attached to the front side of the back left moving drive unit 3350 and having a predetermined decoration are provided.

The back left decorative body 3310 is formed in a triangular columnar shape extending vertically, and extends shorter than the vertical height of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back left decorative body 3310 has a first decorative surface 3311 on which the relief of the Nio statue is formed, a second decorative surface 3312 on which a decoration of a predetermined character is formed, and a character different from the second decorative surface 3312. It includes a third decorative surface 3313 on which the decoration is formed. The back left decorative body 3310 is formed so as to have translucency. Further, although not shown, the back left decorative body 3310 is provided with a cylindrical shaft portion at the lower end.

The back left rotation drive unit 3330 is attached to a vertically extending movement base 3331 that is movable in the left-right direction by the back left movement drive unit 3350 and a back left decoration that is attached to the lower part of the movement base 3331 so as to project forward. A lower rotation base 3332 that rotatably supports the lower end of the body 3310, and an upper rotation base (not shown) attached to the upper part of the moving base 3331 so as to project upward from the back left decorative body 3310. With a back left rotation drive motor (not shown), which is attached to the upper rotation base so that the rotation shaft projects downward, and the rotation shaft penetrating the upper rotation base is attached to the upper end of the back left decoration 3310. , The motor cover 3333 attached to the moving base 3331 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back left rotation drive motor, and the lower end attached to the lower rotation base 3332 while being arranged inside the back left decorative body 3310. The back left decorative substrate 3334 (see FIG. 134) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is provided.

Although not shown, the moving base 3331 is provided with a rack gear extending to the left and right at the upper end. The lower rotation base 3332 rotatably supports the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical shaft portion of the back left decorative body 3310. Although not shown, the lower rotation base 3332 has a protrusion that projects downward from the lower surface and is guided by the back left lower guide rail 3370.

The back left decorative substrate 3334 is arranged inside the back left decorative body 3310 through the cylindrical shaft portion. Although not shown, the back left decorative substrate 3334 is relatively rotatably supported on the upper end side under the upper end of the back left decorative body 3310. As a result, only the back left decorative body 3310 is formed to be rotated by the drive of the back left rotation drive motor. Further, the LED of the back left decorative substrate 3334 always faces forward, and only the portion of the back left decorative body 3310 located in front of the back left decorative substrate 3334 (that is, the decorative surface facing forward) is luminescently decorated. be able to.

The back left movement drive unit 3350 has a unit base 3351 attached to the upper left corner above the opening 3010a on the front surface of the rear wall inside the back box 3010, and the rotation axis protrudes rearward through the unit base 3351. The back left movement drive motor 3352 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, the drive gear 3353 attached to the rotation shaft of the back left movement drive motor 3352, and the drive gear 3353 mesh with each other and rotate back left. A pinion gear (not shown) that meshes with the rack gear of the drive unit 3330 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3351, and a moving base of the back left rotation drive unit 3330 that is attached to the lower front of the unit base 3351. It is equipped with a slide rail (not shown) that mounts the 3331 so as to be movable in the left-right direction.

When the back left movement drive unit 3350 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view by the back left movement drive motor 3352 via the drive gear 3353, the back left movement drive unit 3350 is driven by the back left rotation drive by the rack gear meshing with the pinion gear. The unit 3330 (back left decorative body 3310) can be moved to the right.

The lower left guide rail 3370 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a on the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 near the left end. The lower left guide rail 3370 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The back left lower guide rail 3370 is slidably guided in the left-right direction by inserting a protrusion protruding from the lower surface of the lower rotation base 3332 of the back left rotation drive unit 3330 into the opening on the upper surface. Can be done.

The back upper left decorative body 3390 is attached to the rear side of the back upper left decorative lens 3391 having a predetermined decoration formed and the back upper left decorative lens 3391, and the unit base 3351 of the back left moving drive unit 3350. It is provided with a decorative body base 3392 mounted on the front surface, and a back upper left decorative board (not shown) mounted between the decorative body base 3392 and the back upper left decorative lens 3391 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing. The back upper left decorative body 3390 can illuminate the back upper left decorative lens 3391 by emitting the LED of the back upper left decorative substrate.

In the normal state, the back left movable effect unit 3300 is in a state where the back left rotation drive unit 3330 (back left decorative body 3310) is moved to the leftmost position (evacuation position) by the back left movement drive unit 3350. ing. In this normal state, the back left decorative body 3310 is located behind the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front decoration unit 3100, and is blocked by the back front left decoration unit 3120 so that it can be almost visually recognized from the front. Not possible (see FIG. 129 etc.).

In this normal state, by driving the back left movement drive motor 3352 of the back left movement drive unit 3350, the back left decorative body 3310 can be moved to the right via the back left rotation drive unit 3330, and the back left decoration body 3310 can be moved to the right. When the left end position (appearance position) of the slide rail of the left movement drive unit 3350 is reached, the movement stops. In the state of this appearance position, the back left decorative body 3310 is located on the right side of the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front decoration unit 3100 via the back left rotation drive unit 3330, and the game board side effect display is displayed. It is located near the left end on the front surface of the device 1600, and is visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIGS. 186 to 188).

In addition, the back left movable production unit 3300 can rotate the back left decorative body 3310 around by the back left rotation drive motor of the back left rotation drive unit 3330, or the first decorative surface 3311 and the second decoration of the back left decorative body 3310. The rotation can be stopped so that either the surface 3312 or the third decorative surface 3313 faces forward. The back left decorative body 3310 can be rotated at any of the retracted position and the appearance position.

[5-9e. Back right movable production unit]
Next, the back right movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146. The back right movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the right outside of the front view of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back right movable effect unit 3400 is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the back left movable effect unit 3300 with the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 in between.

The back right movable production unit 3400 is contained in a back right decorative body 3410 formed in a triangular columnar shape, a back right rotating drive unit 3430 that rotates the back right decorative body 3410 around an vertically extending axis, and a back box 3010. The back right movement drive unit 3450 that is attached and moves the upper end side of the back right rotation drive unit 3430 in the left-right direction, and the back right movement drive unit 3450 that is installed in the back box 3010 and guides the lower end side of the back right rotation drive unit 3430 in the left-right direction so as to be movable It is provided with a back right lower guide rail 3470 and a back upper right decorative body 3490 attached to the front side of the back right moving drive unit 3450 and having a predetermined decoration.

The back right decorative body 3410 is formed in a triangular columnar shape extending vertically, and extends shorter than the vertical height of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back right decorative body 3410 has a first decorative surface 3411 on which the relief of the Nio statue is formed, a second decorative surface 3412 on which a decoration of a predetermined character is formed, and a character different from the second decorative surface 3412. It includes a third decorative surface 3413 on which the decoration is formed. The back right decorative body 3410 is formed so as to have translucency. Further, although not shown, the back right decorative body 3410 is provided with a cylindrical shaft portion at the lower end.

The back right rotation drive unit 3430 is attached to a vertically extending movement base 3431 that is movable in the left-right direction by the back right movement drive unit 3450 and a back right decoration that is attached to the lower part of the movement base 3431 so as to project forward. A lower rotation base 3432 that rotatably supports the lower end of the body 3410, and an upper rotation base (not shown) attached to the upper part of the moving base 3431 so as to project upward from the back right decorative body 3410. With a back right rotation drive motor (not shown), which is attached to the upper rotation base so that the rotation shaft protrudes downward, and the rotation shaft penetrating the upper rotation base is attached to the upper end of the back right decoration body 3410. The motor cover 3433 attached to the moving base 3431 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back right rotation drive motor, and the lower end attached to the lower rotation base 3432 while being arranged inside the back right decorative body 3410, and the front surface. The back right decorative substrate 3434 (see FIG. 134) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is provided.

Although not shown, the moving base 3431 is provided with a rack gear extending to the left and right at the upper end. The lower rotation base 3432 rotatably supports the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical shaft portion of the back right decorative body 3410. Although not shown, the lower rotation base 3432 has a protrusion that projects downward from the lower surface and is guided by the back right lower guide rail 3470.

The back right decorative substrate 3434 is arranged inside the back right decorative body 3410 through the cylindrical shaft portion. Although not shown, the back right decorative substrate 3434 is relatively rotatably supported on the upper end side under the upper end of the back right decorative body 3410. As a result, only the back right decorative body 3410 is formed to be rotated by the drive of the back right rotation drive motor. Further, the LED of the back right decorative substrate 3434 always faces forward, and only the portion of the back right decorative body 3410 located in front of the back right decorative substrate 3434 (that is, the decorative surface facing forward) is luminescent and decorated. be able to.

The back right movement drive unit 3450 has a unit base 3451 attached to the upper right corner above the opening 3010a on the front surface of the rear wall inside the back box 3010, and the rotation shaft protrudes rearward through the unit base 3451. The back right movement drive motor 3452 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3451, the drive gear 3453 attached to the rotation shaft of the back right movement drive motor 3452, and the drive gear 3453 mesh with each other and rotate back right. A pinion gear (not shown) that meshes with the rack gear of the drive unit 3430 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3451, and a moving base of the back right rotation drive unit 3430 that is attached to the lower front of the unit base 3451. It is equipped with a slide rail (not shown) to which the 3431 is movably attached in the left-right direction.

In the back right moving drive unit 3450, when the pinion gear is rotated clockwise by the back right moving drive motor 3452 via the drive gear 3453, the back right rotation drive unit is driven by the rack gear meshing with the pinion gear. The 3430 (back right ornament 3410) can be moved to the left.

The back right lower guide rail 3470 is attached near the right end below the opening 3010a on the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The lower right guide rail 3470 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The back right lower guide rail 3470 guides the protrusion in the opening on the upper surface so as to be slidable in the left-right direction by inserting a protrusion protruding from the lower surface of the lower rotation base 3432 of the back right rotation drive unit 3430. be able to.

The back upper right decorative body 3490 is attached to the rear side of the back upper right decorative lens 3491 having a predetermined decoration formed and the back upper right decorative lens 3491, and the unit base 3451 of the back right moving drive unit 3450. It is provided with a decorative body base 3492 mounted on the front surface, and a back upper right decorative board (not shown) mounted between the decorative body base 3492 and the back upper right decorative lens 3491 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing. The back upper right decorative body 3490 can make the back upper right decorative lens 3491 emit light by emitting the LED of the back upper right decorative substrate.

In the normal state, the back right movable effect unit 3400 is in a state where the back right rotation drive unit 3430 (back right decorative body 3410) is moved to the rightmost position (evacuation position) by the back right movement drive unit 3450. ing. In this normal state, the back right decorative body 3410 is located behind the right side of the center accessory 2500, and a part of the back right decorative body 3410 can be visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500 (FIG. 129 and the like). reference).

In this normal state, by driving the back right movement drive motor 3452 of the back right movement drive unit 3450, the back right decorative body 3410 can be moved to the right via the back right rotation drive unit 3430, and the back right decoration body 3410 can be moved to the right. When the left end position (appearance position) of the slide rail of the right movement drive unit 3450 is reached, the movement stops. In the state of this appearance position, the back right decorative body 3410 is located on the left side of the right side side of the center accessory 2500 via the back right rotation drive unit 3430, and is on the front surface of the game board side effect display device 1600. It is located near the right end, and the whole is visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIGS. 186 to 188).

In addition, the back right movable production unit 3400 can rotate the back right decorative body 3410 around by the back right rotation drive motor of the back right rotation drive unit 3430, or the first decorative surface 3411 and the second decoration of the back right decorative body 3410. The rotation can be stopped so that either the surface 3412 or the third decorative surface 3413 faces forward. The back right decorative body 3410 can be rotated at any of the retracted position and the appearance position.

[5-9f. Overall configuration of the movable production unit on the back]
Next, the overall configuration of the back-up movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 148 to 173. FIG. 148 (a) is a perspective view of the back-up movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 148 (b) is a perspective view of the back-up movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 149 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up movable production knit mainly disassembled for each constituent unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. It is an exploded perspective view. The back-up movable effect unit 3500 is mounted in the back box 3010 on the front surface of the rear wall and above the opening 3010a.

The back-up movable effect unit 3500 includes a back-up first decorative unit 3510 having a predetermined character decoration and a back-up second decorative unit 3510 having a character decoration different from that of the back-up first decorative unit 3510. The 3530, the back upper third decorative unit 3550 having different character decorations from the back upper first decorative unit 3510 and the back upper second decorative unit 3530, and the back upper first decorative body in the center in the longitudinal direction. The unit 3510 is mounted so as to be rotatable relative to the axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the back-up second decoration unit 3530 and the back-up third decoration unit 3550 extend back and forth, respectively, near both ends in the longitudinal direction. The back-up rotation base unit 3570, which is rotatably attached around the axis, and the back-up rotation base unit 3570, and the back-up first decorative unit 3510 are non-rotatably attached. The back-up first decorative body unit 3510 and the back-up rotation base unit 3570 are raised and lowered, and the back-up elevating unit 3600 is mounted inside the back box 3010.

[5-9f-1. Back top first decorative unit]
Next, the back-up first decorative body unit 3510 in the back-up movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 154. FIG. 151 (a) is a perspective view of the back-up first decorative body unit in the back-up movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 151 (b) is a perspective view of the back-up first decorative body unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 152 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper first decorative body unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 153 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper first decorative body unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 154 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive system when the back upper first decorative body unit is in the closed position from the front, and FIG. 154 (b) shows the drive system when the back upper first decorative unit is in the open position. It is explanatory drawing which shows from the front. The rear end of the back-up first decorative body unit 3510 of the back-up movable effect unit 3500 is non-rotatably attached to the front surface of the movable side unit 3610 in the back-up elevating unit 3600.

The first decorative body unit 3510 on the back has a first left movable decorative lens 3511 and a first right movable decorative lens 3512, which have a one-to-one set of decorations that form predetermined characters and have translucency. After the first fixed decorative lens 3513, which is arranged behind the left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 and has a predetermined decoration, and has translucency, and the first fixed decorative lens 3513. It is attached to the rear side of the first fixed decorative lens 3513 so as to cover the rear surface of the back upper first decorative substrate 3514, which is arranged on the side and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the back upper first decorative substrate 3514. It is provided with a flat first decorative body base 3515 and a lens. The first fixed decorative lens 3513 is formed with a decoration that imitates lightning.

Further, the back-up first decorative unit 3510 extends in the left-right direction at the lower part of the rear side of the first decorative base 3515, and the left end is the left outer side of the first decorative base 3515 and the first left movable decorative lens 3511. A first lower arm 3516 and a first lower arm 3516, which are attached to the rear side and have a rack gear 3516a extending to the left and right on the upper side, and a slit 3516b penetrating the front and rear and extending to the left and right on the lower side of the rack gear 3516a. The lower arm retainer 3517, which is attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 through the slit 3516b of the above, and which attaches the first lower arm 3516 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction in cooperation with the first decorative body base 3515. It has.

Further, the back-up first decorative unit 3510 extends in the left-right direction at the upper part on the rear side of the first decorative base 3515, and the right end is the right outer side of the first decorative base 3515 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512. A first upper arm 3518 having a rack gear 3518a attached to the rear side and extending to the left and right on the lower side, and a slit 3518b extending to the left and right on the upper side of the rack gear 3518a, and a first upper arm 3518. The upper arm retainer 3519, which is attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 through the slit 3518b and which attaches the first upper arm 3518 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction in cooperation with the first decorative body base 3515. I have.

Further, the back upper first decorative unit 3510 is provided on the rear surface of a large-diameter transmission gear portion 3520a and a transmission gear portion 3520a that mesh with the rack gear 3516a of the first lower arm 3516 and the rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518, respectively. It has a small-diameter drive gear portion 3520b that is integrally formed, and includes a first opening / closing gear member 3520 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515.

Further, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 is flat and extends in the vertical direction on the left side of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 on the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 in the front view, and the first opening / closing gear member is on the right side. It has a vertically extending drive rack gear 3521a that meshes with the driving gear portion 3520b of the 3520, a receiving boss 3521b that protrudes rearward from the lower part of the rear surface in a columnar shape, and a slit 3521c that penetrates back and forth and extends vertically near the left side. It is attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 through the first opening / closing arm 3521 and the slit 3521c of the first opening / closing arm 3521, and cooperates with the first decorative body base 3515 to move the first opening / closing arm 3521 in the vertical direction. It is equipped with an open / close arm retainer 3522 that is slidably attached.

Further, the back upper first decorative unit 3510 has the left end attached to the rear side of the first decorative base 3515 and the right end attached to the first upper arm 3518, so that the first upper arm 3518 is viewed from the front left. The first opening / closing spring 3523 that is urged to move in the direction and the first mounting base 3524 attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 so as to cover the rear side of the first opening / closing gear member 3520. The horizontal lock hole 3525a, which is mounted on the rear side of the first mounting base 3524 and is open on the outer peripheral surface on the right side, is formed at the same position as the horizontal lock hole 3525a in the front-rear direction, and is formed on the lower outer peripheral surface. It has a vertical lock hole 3525b that is open to the rear and a mounting shaft portion 3525c that protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape on the rear side of the vertical lock hole 3525b, and the rear end of the mounting shaft portion 3525c is the back-up elevating unit 3600. It includes a first mounting shaft member 3525 that is mounted on the front surface of the movable side unit 3610.

Subsequently, the movement of the back-up first decorative unit 3510 will be described in detail. The back-up first decorative body unit 3510 is formed between a closed position in which the left and right first left movable decorative lenses 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in close contact with each other and an open position in which the left and right movable decorative lenses 3512 are separated from each other. It is formed so as to slide in the left-right direction.

In the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the first upper arm 3518 to which the first right movable decorative lens 3512 is attached is arranged above the first lower arm 3516 to which the first left movable decorative lens 3511 is attached. Each is attached so that it can slide in the left-right direction. The first lower arm 3516 is provided with rack gears 3516a extending to the left and right facing upward, and the first upper arm 3518 is provided with rack gears 3518a extending to the left and right facing downward. The rack gear 3516a of the arm 3516 and the rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518 face each other. Then, between the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518, the transmission gear portion 3520a of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 becomes a rack gear 3516a of the first lower arm 3516 and a rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518. They are in mesh with each other. As a result, when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 (transmission gear portion 3520a) is rotated, the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518 can be slid in different directions in the left-right direction.

Therefore, when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decoration are passed through the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518. The lens 3512 can be slid in the direction of approaching each other (the direction of the closed position), and when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated in the front view clockwise direction, the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518 The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 can be slid in a direction away from each other (in the direction of the open position).

Further, in the back-up first decorative body unit 3510, the first opening / closing gear member 3520 has a drive gear portion 3520b that rotates integrally with the transmission gear portion 3520a, and extends vertically to mesh with the drive gear portion 3520b. A first opening / closing arm 3521 having a drive rack gear 3521a is provided. Since the first opening / closing arm 3521 is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates, it slides in the vertical direction. Since the first opening / closing arm 3521 is arranged on the left side of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 in the front view, when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, it slides downward. When the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated in the front-view clockwise direction, it slides upward.

In other words, when the first opening / closing arm 3521 is slid downward, the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512. Can be slid in the direction of approaching each other (direction of the closed position). On the other hand, when the first opening / closing arm 3521 is slid upward, the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates in the front-view clockwise direction, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are brought into contact with each other. It can be slid in the direction of separation (direction of the open position).

Since the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 has the first opening / closing spring 3523 for urging the first upper arm 3518 to move to the left, a force acts on the first opening / closing arm 3521. When not (in the normal state), the first upper arm 3518 is slid to the left by the urging force of the first opening / closing spring 3523, and the first left movable decoration lens 3511 and the first right movable decoration The lens 3512 is in a closed position where it is in contact with each other. In this closed position, the transmission gear portion 3520a of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 meshes with the vicinity of the left end of the rack gear 3516a in the first lower arm 3516, and also near the right end of the rack gear 3518a in the first upper arm 3518. It is in mesh. Further, in this state, the drive gear portion 3520b of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 meshes with the vicinity of the upper end of the drive rack gear 3521a in the first opening / closing arm 3521 (see FIG. 154 (a)).

When the first opening / closing arm 3521 is slid upward from this closed position so as to resist the urging force of the first opening / closing spring 3523, the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view, and the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates. The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 slide in a direction away from each other via the lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518. Then, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 reach the open position, the slide stops (see FIG. 154 (b)). The slide stop at this open position is at the end of the elongated hole in at least one of the slit 3516b of the first lower arm 3516, the slit 3518b of the first upper arm 3518, and the slit 3521c of the first opening / closing arm 3521. The slide is restricted by the contact between the lower arm retainer 3517, the upper arm retainer 3519, and the open / close arm retainer 3522.

Therefore, the back-up first decorative body unit 3510 includes the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the closed position. Is located in front of the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the first fixed decorative lens 3513 is almost invisible from the front, and a predetermined character is formed by the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512. You can see the decoration of. On the other hand, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the open position, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are separated from each other and are first from between them. The decoration of the fixed decorative lens 3513 can be seen.

Further, the back-up first decorative body unit 3510 appropriately emits the LED of the back-up first decorative substrate 3514 to appropriately emit the first left movable decorative lens 3511, the first right movable decorative lens 3512, and the first fixed decorative lens. The 3513 can be appropriately luminescent and decorated. Specifically, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the closed position, when the LED of the first decorative substrate 3514 on the back is made to emit light, the LED is emitted via the first fixed decorative lens 3513. The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 can be light-emitting decorated. On the other hand, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the open position, if the LED of the back upper first decorative substrate 3514 is made to emit light, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable are movable. Only the first fixed decorative lens 3513 facing from between the decorative lens 3512 and the decorative lens 3512 can be light-emitting decorated.

[5-9f-2. Back top second decorative unit]
Next, the back-up second decorative body unit 3530 in the back-up movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 155 to 158. FIG. 155 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper second decorative body unit in the back upper movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 155 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper second decorative body unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 156 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper second decorative body unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper second decorative body unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 158 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive system when the back upper second decorative unit is in the closed position from the front, and FIG. 158 (b) shows the drive system when the back upper second decorative unit is in the open position. It is explanatory drawing which shows from the front. The rear end of the back-up second decorative unit 3530 of the back-up movable effect unit 3500 is in the front-rear direction near one end in the longitudinal direction of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 (near the right end in the horizontal position). It is rotatably mounted around an axis that extends to.

The second decorative body unit 3530 on the back has a second left movable decorative lens 3531 and a second right movable decorative lens 3532, which have a one-to-one set of decorations that form predetermined characters and have translucency. After the second fixed decorative lens 3533 which is arranged behind the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 and has a predetermined decoration and has translucency, and the second fixed decorative lens 3533. It is attached to the rear side of the second fixed decorative lens 3533 so as to cover the rear surface of the second decorative substrate 3534 on the back surface, which is arranged on the side and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the second decorative substrate 3534 on the back surface. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped second decorative base 3535. The second fixed decorative lens 3533 is formed with a decoration that imitates lightning.

Further, the back upper second decorative unit 3530 extends in the left-right direction at the lower part of the rear side of the second decorative base 3535, and the left end is the left outer side of the second decorative base 3535 and the second left movable decorative lens 3531. A second lower arm 3536 and a second lower arm 3536, which are attached to the rear side and have a rack gear 3536a extending to the left and right on the upper side, and a slit 3536b penetrating the front and rear and extending to the left and right under the rack gear 3536a. The lower arm retainer 3537, which is attached to the rear side of the second decorative base 3535 through the slit 3536b of the above, and which attaches the second lower arm 3536 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction in cooperation with the second decorative base 3535. It has.

Further, the back upper second decorative unit 3530 extends in the left-right direction at the upper part on the rear side of the second decorative base 3535, and the right end is the right outer side of the second decorative base 3535 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532. A second upper arm 3538 and a second upper arm 3538 which are attached to the rear side and have a rack gear 3538a extending to the left and right on the lower side, and a slit 3538b which penetrates back and forth and extends to the left and right on the upper side of the rack gear 3538a. The upper arm retainer 3539, which is attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 through the slit 3538b and which attaches the second upper arm 3538 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction in cooperation with the second decorative body base 3535, I have.

Further, the back upper second decorative unit 3530 is attached to the rear surface of the large-diameter transmission gear portion 3540a and the transmission gear portion 3540a that mesh with the rack gear 3536a of the second lower arm 3536 and the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538, respectively. It has a small-diameter drive gear portion 3540b that is integrally formed, and includes a second opening / closing gear member 3540 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535.

Further, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 has a flat plate shape extending in the vertical direction on the left side of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 on the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535, and the second opening / closing gear member is on the right side. A drive rack gear 3541a that extends vertically to mesh with the drive gear portion 3540b of the 3540, a receiving boss 3541b that projects rearward from the vicinity of the upper end of the rear surface, and a slit 3541c that penetrates back and forth near the left side and extends vertically The second opening / closing arm 3541 is attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 through the slit 3541c of the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the second opening / closing arm 3541 is moved up and down in cooperation with the second decorative body base 3535. It is equipped with an opening / closing arm retainer 3542 that is slidably attached in the direction.

Further, the back upper second decorative unit 3530 has the left end attached to the second lower arm 3536 and the right end attached to the rear side of the second decorative base 3535, so that the second lower arm 3536 is viewed from the front right. The second opening / closing spring 3543 that is urged to move toward the second opening / closing gear 3544 and the second mounting base 3544 that is attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 so as to cover the rear side of the second opening / closing gear member 3540. And have. The second mounting base 3544 is mounted on the second drive link gear member 3573 of the back-up rotation base unit 3570, which will be described later.

Subsequently, the movement of the back-up second decorative unit 3530 will be described in detail. The back-up second decorative unit 3530 is formed between a closed position in which the left and right second left movable decorative lenses 3531 and a second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in close contact with each other and an open position in which the left and right movable decorative lenses 3532 are separated from each other. It is formed so as to slide in the left-right direction.

In the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, the second upper arm 3538 to which the second right movable decorative lens 3532 is attached is arranged above the second lower arm 3536 to which the second left movable decorative lens 3531 is attached. Each is attached so that it can slide in the left-right direction. The second lower arm 3536 is provided with rack gears 3536a extending to the left and right facing upward, and the second upper arm 3538 is provided with rack gears 3538a extending to the left and right facing downward. The rack gear 3536a of the arm 3536 and the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538 face each other. Then, between the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538, the transmission gear portion 3540a of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 becomes a rack gear 3536a of the second lower arm 3536 and a rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538. They are in mesh with each other. As a result, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 (transmission gear portion 3540a) is rotated, the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538 can be slid in different directions in the left-right direction.

Therefore, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decoration are passed through the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538. The lens 3532 can be slid in a direction approaching each other (direction in the closed position), and when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated in the front view clockwise direction, the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538 The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 can be slid in a direction away from each other (direction of the open position).

Further, in the back upper second decorative unit 3530, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 has a drive gear portion 3540b that rotates integrally with the transmission gear portion 3540a, and extends vertically to mesh with the drive gear portion 3540b. A second opening / closing arm 3541 having a drive rack gear 3541a is provided. Since the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slidably attached in the vertical direction, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates, it slides in the vertical direction. Since the second opening / closing arm 3541 is arranged on the left side of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 in the front view, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 slides downward when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view. When the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated in the clockwise direction of the front view, it slides upward.

In other words, when the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slid downward, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and becomes the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532. Can be slid in the direction of approaching each other (direction of the closed position). On the other hand, when the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slid upward, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are moved to each other. It can be slid in the direction of separation (direction of the open position).

Since the back upper second decorative unit 3530 has a second opening / closing spring 3543 that urges the second lower arm 3536 to move to the right, a force acts on the second opening / closing arm 3541. When not (in the normal state), the second lower arm 3536 is slid to the right by the urging force of the second opening / closing spring 3543, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decoration are used. The lens 3532 is in a closed position where it is in contact with each other. In this closed position, the transmission gear portion 3540a of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 meshes with the vicinity of the left end of the rack gear 3536a of the second lower arm 3536 and with the vicinity of the right end of the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538. It is in mesh. Further, in this state, the drive gear portion 3540b of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 meshes with the vicinity of the upper end of the drive rack gear 3541a in the second opening / closing arm 3541 (see FIG. 158 (a)).

When the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slid upward from this closed position so as to resist the urging force of the second opening / closing spring 3543, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view, and the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates. The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 slide in a direction away from each other via the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538. Then, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 reach the open position, the slide stops (see FIG. 158 (b)). The slide stop at this open position is at the end of the elongated hole in at least one of the slit 3536b of the second lower arm 3536, the slit 3538b of the second upper arm 3538, and the slit 3541c of the second opening and closing arm 3541. The slide is restricted by the contact between the lower arm retainer 3537, the upper arm retainer 3539, and the open / close arm retainer 3542.

Therefore, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the closed position, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 includes the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532. Is located in front of the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the second fixed decorative lens 3533 is almost invisible from the front, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 make a predetermined character. You can see the decoration of. On the other hand, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the open position, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are separated from each other and are second from between them. The decoration of the fixed decorative lens 3533 can be seen.

Further, the back-up second decorative body unit 3530 appropriately emits the LED of the back-up second decorative substrate 3534 to emit the second left movable decorative lens 3531, the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the second fixed decorative lens. The 3533 can be appropriately luminescent and decorated. Specifically, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the closed position, when the LED of the second decorative substrate 3534 on the back is made to emit light, the LED is emitted via the second fixed decorative lens 3533. The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 can be light-emitting decorated. On the other hand, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the open position, if the LED of the back upper second decorative substrate 3534 is made to emit light, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable are movable. Only the second fixed decorative lens 3533 facing from between the decorative lens 3532 can be light-emitting decorated.

[5-9f-3. Back top third ornament unit]
Next, the back-up third decorative body unit 3550 in the back-up movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 159 to 162. FIG. 159 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper third decorative body unit in the back upper movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 159 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper third decorative body unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 160 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper third decorative body unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper third decorative body unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 162 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive system when the back upper third decorative unit is in the closed position from the front, and FIG. 162 (b) shows the drive system when the back upper third decorative unit is in the open position. It is explanatory drawing which shows from the front. The rear end of the back-up third decorative unit 3550 of the back-up movable production unit 3500 is near the end opposite to the back-up second decorative unit 3530 in the longitudinal direction of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 (horizontal position). (Near the left end at the time of), it is rotatably attached around the axis extending in the front-back direction.

The third decorative body unit 3550 on the back has a third left movable decorative lens 3551 and a third right movable decorative lens 3552, which have a one-to-one set of decorations that form predetermined characters and have translucency. After the third fixed decorative lens 3553, which is arranged behind the three left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 and has a predetermined decoration and has translucency, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553. It is attached to the rear side of the third fixed decorative lens 3553 so as to cover the rear surface of the back upper third decorative substrate 3554, which is arranged on the side and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the back upper third decorative substrate 3554. It is provided with a flat third decorative base 3555. The third fixed decorative lens 3553 is formed with a decoration that imitates lightning.

Further, the back upper third decorative unit 3550 extends in the left-right direction at the lower part of the rear side of the third decorative base 3555, and the left end is the left outer side of the third decorative base 3555 and the third left movable decorative lens 3551. A third lower arm 3556 and a third lower arm 3556, which are attached to the rear side and have a rack gear 3556a extending to the left and right on the upper side, and a slit 3556b penetrating the front and rear and extending to the left and right on the lower side of the rack gear 3556a. The lower arm retainer 3557, which is attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 through the slit 3556b and which attaches the third lower arm 3556 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction in cooperation with the third decorative body base 3555. It has.

Further, the back upper third decorative unit 3550 extends in the left-right direction at the upper rear side of the third decorative base 3555, and the right end is the right outer side of the third decorative base 3555 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552. A third upper arm 3558 and a third upper arm 3558 which are attached to the rear side and have a rack gear 3558a which extends to the left and right on the lower side and a slit 3558b which penetrates back and forth and extends to the left and right on the upper side of the rack gear 3558a. The upper arm retainer 3559, which is attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 through the slit 3558b and which attaches the third upper arm 3558 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction in cooperation with the third decorative body base 3555. I have.

Further, the back upper third decorative unit 3550 is attached to the rear surface of the large-diameter transmission gear portion 3560a and the transmission gear portion 3560a that mesh with the rack gear 3556a of the third lower arm 3556 and the rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558, respectively. It has a small-diameter drive gear portion 3560b that is integrally formed, and includes a third opening / closing gear member 3560 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555.

Further, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 is flat and extends in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 on the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555, and the third opening / closing gear member is on the right side. Through a third opening / closing arm 3651 having a vertically extending drive rack gear 3651a that meshes with the drive gear portion 3560b of the 3560, a slit 3561c that penetrates back and forth and extends vertically near the left side, and a slit 3651c of the third opening / closing arm 3651. It is equipped with an opening / closing arm retainer 3562 which is attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 and which is attached to the third decorative body base 3551 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in cooperation with the third decorative body base 3555. ..

Further, the back upper third decorative unit 3550 has the left end attached to the third lower arm 3556 and the right end attached to the rear side of the third decorative base 3555, so that the third lower arm 3556 is viewed from the front right. The third opening / closing spring 3563 that is urged to move toward the third mounting base 3564 and the third mounting base 3564 that is mounted on the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 so as to cover the rear side of the third opening / closing gear member 3560. And have. The third mounting base 3564 is mounted on the third drive link gear member 3578 of the back-up rotation base unit 3570, which will be described later.

Subsequently, the movement of the back-up third decorative unit 3550 will be described in detail. The back-up third decorative unit 3550 is formed between a closed position in which the left and right third left movable decorative lenses 3551 and a third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in close contact with each other and an open position in which they are separated from each other. It is formed so as to slide in the left-right direction.

In the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the third upper arm 3558 to which the third right movable decorative lens 3552 is attached is arranged above the third lower arm 3556 to which the third left movable decorative lens 3551 is attached. Each is attached so that it can slide in the left-right direction. The third lower arm 3556 is provided with rack gears 3556a extending to the left and right facing upward, and the third upper arm 3558 is provided with rack gears 3558a extending to the left and right facing downward. The rack gear 3556a of the arm 3556 and the rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558 face each other. Then, between the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558, the transmission gear portion 3560a of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 becomes a rack gear 3556a of the third lower arm 3556 and a rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558. They are in mesh with each other. As a result, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 (transmission gear portion 3560a) is rotated, the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558 can be slid in different directions in the left-right direction.

Therefore, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decoration are passed through the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558. The lens 3552 can be slid in the direction of approaching each other (the direction of the closed position), and when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated in the clockwise direction of the front view, the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558 The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 can be slid in a direction away from each other (direction of the open position).

Further, in the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 has a drive gear portion 3560b that rotates integrally with the transmission gear portion 3560a, and extends vertically to mesh with the drive gear portion 3560b. It is provided with a third opening / closing arm 3651 having a drive rack gear 3651a. Since the third opening / closing arm 3651 is slidably attached in the vertical direction, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates, it slides in the vertical direction. Since the third opening / closing arm 3651 is arranged on the left side of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 in the front view, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, it slides downward. When the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated in the clockwise direction of the front view, it slides upward.

In other words, when the third opening / closing arm 3651 is slid downward, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and becomes the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552. Can be slid in the direction of approaching each other (direction of the closed position). On the other hand, when the third opening / closing arm 3651 is slid upward, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are moved to each other. It can be slid in the direction of separation (direction of the open position).

Since the back upper third decorative unit 3550 has a third opening / closing spring 3563 that urges the third lower arm 3556 to move to the right, a force acts on the third opening / closing arm 3651. When not (in the normal state), the third lower arm 3556 is slid to the right by the urging force of the third opening / closing spring 3563, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decoration are used. The lens 3552 is in a closed position where it is in contact with each other. In this closed position, the transmission gear portion 3560a of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 meshes with the vicinity of the left end of the rack gear 3556a of the third lower arm 3556, and also near the right end of the rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558. It is in mesh. Further, in this state, the drive gear portion 3560b of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 meshes with the vicinity of the upper end of the drive rack gear 3651a in the third opening / closing arm 3651 (see FIG. 162 (a)).

When the third opening / closing arm 3651 is slid upward from this closed position so as to resist the urging force of the third opening / closing spring 3563, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view, and the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated. The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 slide in a direction away from each other via the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558. Then, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 reach the open position, the slide stops (see FIG. 162 (b)). The slide stop at this open position is at the end of the elongated hole in at least one of the slit 3556b of the third lower arm 3556, the slit 3558b of the third upper arm 3558, and the slit 3651c of the third opening and closing arm 3651. The slide is restricted by the contact between the lower arm retainer 3557, the upper arm retainer 3559, and the open / close arm retainer 3562.

Therefore, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the closed position, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 includes the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552. Is located in front of the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 becomes almost invisible from the front, and a predetermined character is formed by the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552. You can see the decoration of. On the other hand, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the open position, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are separated from each other and the third is between them. The decoration of the fixed decorative lens 3553 can be seen.

Further, the back-up third decorative body unit 3550 appropriately emits the LED of the back-up third decorative substrate 3554 to appropriately emit the third left movable decorative lens 3551, the third right movable decorative lens 3552, and the third fixed decorative lens. The 3553 can be appropriately luminescent and decorated. Specifically, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the closed position, when the LED of the third decorative substrate 3554 on the back is made to emit light, the LED is emitted via the third fixed decorative lens 3553. The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 can be light-emitting decorated. On the other hand, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the open position, if the LED of the back upper third decorative substrate 3554 is made to emit light, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable are movable. Only the third fixed decorative lens 3553 facing from between the decorative lens 3552 and the decorative lens 3552 can be light-emitting decorated.

[5-9f-4. Backside rotation base unit]
Next, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 of the back-up movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 163 to 167. FIG. 163 (a) is a perspective view of the back-up rotation base unit in the back-up movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 163 (b) is a perspective view of the back-up rotation base unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 164 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up rotation base unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up rotation base unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 166 is an explanatory view showing the gear configuration of the back-up rotation base unit from the front. FIG. 167 (a) is an explanatory view showing the state of the action lever in the back-up rotation base unit from the front, and FIG. 167 (b) is an explanatory view showing the state of the action lever in the non-action position from the front.

The back-up rotation base unit 3570 of the back-up movable production unit 3500 is rotatably attached to the front surface of the movable side unit in the back-up elevating unit around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and is back-up at both ends in the longitudinal direction. The second decorative unit 3530 and the back-up third decorative unit 3550 are attached so as to be relatively rotatable with respect to the axis extending back and forth, respectively.

The back-up rotation base unit 3570 extends parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis extending in the front-rear direction, and has a first hole 3571a penetrating back and forth in the center of the longitudinal direction and front and rear near both ends in the longitudinal direction. A mounting cylinder that rotatably attaches to the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600, which protrudes rearward from the outer circumference of the second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c, and the first hole 3571a. It has a backside rotating base with 3571d. The first hole 3571a (inner diameter of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d) is formed in a size that allows the mounting shaft portion 3525c of the first mounting shaft member 3525 in the back-up first decorative body unit 3510 to pass through. The second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c are formed to be slightly smaller than the first hole 3571a and to have the same size as each other. Further, the second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c are formed in the vicinity of the right end and the vicinity of the left end, respectively, in the front view when the back-up rotation base 3571 is in a horizontally extended state (when in the horizontal position). There is. In the following, a state in which the back-up rotation base 3571 extends horizontally will be described.

Further, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 includes a rotation base driven gear 357 which is attached to the rear side of the back-up rotation base 3571 and extends concentrically with the center of the first hole 3571a in a semicircular shape. The rotation base driven gear 3572 is formed in the form of the upper half with respect to the annulus in which the central axis is extended back and forth, and gear teeth are formed on the outer peripheral surface. The rotation base driven gear 3572 is mounted so as to form a gap between it and the outer peripheral surface on the upper side of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d. The rotation base driven gear 357 meshes with the rotation base drive gear 3614 in the movable side unit 3610 of the backside elevating unit 3600, which will be described later.

Further, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is concentrically fan-shaped from the front end of the annular shaft portion 3573a and the shaft portion 3573a that are rotatably inserted from the front into the second hole 3571b of the back-up rotation base 3571. It has a formed second link gear portion 3573b, and has a second drive link gear member 3573 to which the rear surface of the second mounting base 3544 of the back upper second decorative unit 3530 is mounted on the front surface, and a back upper rotation. It is attached to the rear side of the second drive link gear member 3573 from the rear side of the base 3571 and includes a pressing member 3574 having a diameter larger than that of the second hole 3571b. In the second drive link gear member 3573, the second link gear portion 3573b is formed to have a diameter larger than that of the second hole 3571b. Further, the second link gear portion 3573b is formed with the same diameter and the same pitch as the central link gear 3611b of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600. The second drive link gear member 3573 is restricted from moving back and forth with respect to the second hole 3571b by attaching a pressing member 3574 to the rear side of the shaft portion 3573a inserted into the second hole 3571b. It can be mounted rotatably in the state.

Further, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the back-up rotation base 3571 on the left side of the front view of the second hole 3571b, and is the second link gear portion of the second drive link gear member 3573. The spur gear-shaped second first link gear 3575 that meshes with 3573b and the second first link gear 3575 are rotatably attached to the rear side of the back upper rotation base 3571 on the left side of the front view. The spur gear-shaped second link gear 3576 that meshes with the first link gear 3575 for the second and the second link gear 3576 for the second can rotate to the rear side of the back upper rotation base 3571 on the left side of the front view. It is provided with a spur gear-shaped second link gear 3577, which is attached to the second link gear 3576 and meshes with the second link gear 3576.

The second link gear portion 3573b of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the second first link gear 3575 are meshed with each other through an opening formed in the back-up rotation base 3571. The left end side of the second third link gear 3577 is close to the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d in the back-up rotation base 3571. The second third link gear 3577 meshes with the central link gear 3611b of the movable base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600, which will be described later.

Further, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is concentrically fan-shaped from the front end of the annular shaft portion 3578a and the shaft portion 3578a which are rotatably inserted from the front into the third hole 3571c of the back-up rotation base 3571. It has a formed third link gear portion 3578b, and has a third drive link gear member 3578 to which the rear surface of the third mounting base 3564 of the back upper third decorative unit 3550 is mounted on the front surface, and a back upper rotation. It is attached to the rear side of the third drive link gear member 3578 from the rear side of the base 3571 and includes a pressing member 3579 having a diameter larger than that of the third hole 3571c. In the third drive link gear member 3578, the third link gear portion 3578b is formed to have a diameter larger than that of the third hole 3571c. Further, the third link gear portion 3578b is formed to have the same diameter and the same pitch as the central link gear 3611b of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600. The third drive link gear member 3578 is restricted from moving back and forth with respect to the third hole 3571c by attaching a pressing member 3579 to the rear side of the shaft portion 3578a inserted into the third hole 3571c. It can be mounted rotatably in the state.

Further, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotatably attached to the front side of the back-up rotation base 3571 on the right side of the front view of the third hole 3571c, and the third link gear portion 3578b of the third drive link gear member 3578. The spur gear-shaped first link gear 3580 for the third gear and the first link gear 3580 for the third gear are rotatably attached to the rear side of the back upper rotation base 3571 on the right side of the front view. The spur gear-shaped second link gear 3581 for the third gear that meshes with the first link gear 3580 for the third gear and the second link gear 3581 for the third gear can be rotated to the rear side of the back upper rotation base 3571 on the right side of the front view. It is provided with a spur gear-shaped third link gear 3582, which is attached and meshes with the second link gear 3581 for the third gear.

The first link gear 3580 for the third and the second link gear 3581 for the third mesh with each other through an opening formed in the back-up rotation base 3571. The right end side of the third link gear 3582 for the third is close to the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d in the back-up rotation base 3571. The third link gear for the third use 3582 meshes with the central link gear 3611b of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600, which will be described later.

Further, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is attached to the rear side of the lower portion between the first hole 3571a and the second hole 3571b in the back-up rotation base 3571, and the rotation shaft penetrates the back-up rotation base 3571. The working lever drive motor 3583 protruding forward, the spur gear-shaped working lever drive gear 3584 attached to the rotating shaft of the working lever drive motor 3583, and the working lever drive gear 3584 are meshed with each other and the back-up rotation base. It has a spur gear-shaped working lever pinion gear 3585 rotatably attached to the front surface of the 3571 and a working lever rack gear 3586a that meshes with the working lever pinion gear 3585 from above and extends to the left and right. The action lever 3586 that is slidably attached to the front surface of the rotary base 3571 in the left-right direction, and the action lever retainer 3587 that is attached to the front surface of the back-up rotary base 3571 that restricts the forward movement of the action lever 3586. And the action lever movement detection sensor 3588 which is attached to the front surface of the back-up rotation base 3571 and detects the movement of the action lever 3586 in the left-right direction.

The action lever 3586 is connected to the horizontally long rectangular main body 3586b in which the action lever rack gear 3586a is formed on the lower side and the upper side of the main body 3586b, and extends to the left of the main body 3586b in a strip shape. A slide mounting portion 3586c that is slidably mounted on the upper front surface of the back top rotation base 3571 and a first mounting shaft member 3525 in the back top first decorative unit 3510 that protrudes to the left from the left side of the main body portion 3586b. From the lock piece 3586d that can be inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a and the vertical lock hole 3525b, the first extension portion 3586e extending downward from the main body portion 3586b, and the lock piece 3586d from the lower end of the first extension portion 3586e. The first working portion 3586f protruding to the left, the second right extending portion 3586g connected to the vicinity of the right end of the upper side of the main body portion 3586b and extending to the right, and the second right extending portion 3586g. The second lower extension part 3586h extending downward from the right end of the second lower extension part 3586f to a position slightly higher than the first action part 3586f, and the second extending leftward from the vicinity of the lower end of the left side of the second lower extension part 3586h. Near the lower end of the left side of the working portion 3586i, the third extending portion 3586j extending downward from the left end of the slide mounting portion 3586c to substantially the same height as the lower end of the first extending portion 3586e, and the third extending portion 3586j. It is provided with a third working portion 3586k extending to the left from the (see FIG. 167).

Further, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 includes a front gear cover 3589 attached to the front surface of the back-up rotation base 3571 so as to cover the front surfaces of the action lever drive gear 3584 and the action lever pinion gear 3585, and a back-up rotation base 3571. The front side of the back top rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 and the back top rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590, which are attached to the lower side of the first hole 3571a on the front side of the above and detect the rotation position of the back top rotation base unit 3570. The back-up rotation base relay board 3591 attached to the front surface of the back-up rotation base 3571 so as to cover it, and the substrate attached to the front surface of the back-up rotation base 3571 so as to cover the front surface of the back-up rotation base relay board 3591. It is equipped with a cover 3592.

The back-up rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 detects the rotation position of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 by detecting the rotation detection piece 3611d of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up rotation base unit 3600. Is. The back-up rotation base relay board 3591 includes a back-up rotation drive motor 3612 of the movable side unit 3610 in the back-up elevating unit 3600, a back-up second decorative board 3534, a back-up third decorative board 3554, and an action lever drive motor 3583. The connection with the action lever movement detection sensor 3588 and the backside rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 is relayed.

Further, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is a back-up rotation base 3571 so as to cover the rear side of the first link gear 3575 for the second, the second link gear 3576 for the second, and the third link gear 3757 for the second. It is attached to the rear side of the back upper rotation base 3571 so as to cover the rear side of the rear right gear cover 3593 attached to the rear side, the second link gear 3581 for the third, and the third link gear 3582 for the third. The rear left gear cover 3594 and the motor cover 3595 attached to the rear side of the back upper rotation base 3571 so as to cover the lower side of the action lever drive motor 3583 are provided.

Next, the movement of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 will be described. In the back-up rotation base unit 3570, the mounting cylinder portion 3571d protruding rearward of the back-up rotation base 3571 is inserted into the shaft cylinder portion 3611a of the movable-side base 3611 in the movable-side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600. As a result, it is attached so as to rotate around an axis extending back and forth on the front surface of the movable side unit 3610. The back-up rotation base unit 3570 is restricted from moving forward by the first mounting shaft member 3525 of the back-up first decorative unit 3510 which penetrates the mounting cylinder 3571d from the front and is mounted on the front surface of the movable side unit. Will be done. Further, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is placed on the front surface of the second drive link gear member 3573 rotatably attached to the second hole 3571b of the back-up rotation base 3571, in the back-up second decorative unit 3530. (Ii) By mounting the rear surface of the mounting base 3544, the back-up second decorative unit 3530 can be mounted so as to be rotatable relative to the back-top rotating base 3571. Further, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is placed on the front surface of the third drive link gear member 3578 rotatably attached to the third hole 3571c of the back-up rotation base 3571, in the back-up third decorative unit 3550. (Iii) By mounting the rear surface of the mounting base 3564, the back-up third decorative unit 3550 can be mounted so as to be rotatable relative to the back-top rotating base 3571.

The back-up rotation base unit 3570 is mounted on the front surface of the movable side unit 3610 in the back-up elevating unit 3600, and the rotation base driven gear 357 meshes with the rotation base drive gear 3614 of the movable side unit 3610. At the same time, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 mesh with the central link gear 3611b in the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610 (see FIG. 178). Then, when the rotation base drive gear 3614 is rotated by the drive of the back-up rotation drive motor 3612 of the movable side unit 3610, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is inserted into the first hole 3571a (attachment) via the rotation base driven gear 3572. It rotates around an axis extending back and forth around the axis of the tubular portion 3571d). The back-up rotation base unit 3570 has a horizontal position extending horizontally in the longitudinal direction (direction in which the first hole 3571a, the second hole 3571b, and the third hole 3571c are arranged) and a vertical extending vertically. It can be rotated 90 degrees to and from the position. In the horizontal position, the second hole 3571b is located to the right of the first hole 3571a, and in the vertical position, the second hole 3571b is located below the first hole 3571a. At this horizontal position, the back-up rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 detects the rotation detection piece 3611d of the movable side unit 3610 in the back-up elevating unit 3600.

When the back-up rotation base unit 3570 rotates between the horizontal position and the vertical position about the first hole 3571a, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 move to the movable side unit 3610. It moves so as to revolve around the central link gear 3611b. At this time, since the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 are meshed with the central link gear 3611b, when they revolve around the central link gear 3611b, the second third link is linked. The gear 3577 and the third link gear 3582 for the third use rotate respectively, and each rotates relative to the back-up rotation base 3571.

Then, when the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 rotate, the rotation thereof starts from the second third link gear 3577 to the second second link gear 3576 and the second. It is transmitted to the second link gear portion 3573b via the second first link gear 3575, and the second drive link gear member 3573 rotates in the direction opposite to the second third link gear 3577, and the third third link gear member 3573 is rotated. The third link gear 3582 is transmitted to the third link gear portion 3578b via the third second link gear 3581 and the third first link gear 3580, and the third drive link gear member 3578 is the third. The third link gear for 3582 rotates in the opposite direction to the gear 3582.

At this time, since the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b have the same diameter as the central link gear 3611b of the movable side unit 3610, the rotation of the back-up rotation base 3571 and the central link gear 3611b The angle and the rotation angle of the back-up rotation base 3571 and the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b are the same. Since the central link gear 3611b of the movable side unit 3610 is non-rotatably attached, when the back-up rotation base 3571 rotates, the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b move back and forth. It revolves around the central link gear 3611b without rotating around the extended shaft. That is, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 has the first hole 3571a (movable side) in a state where the back-up second decorative unit 3530 and the back-up third decorative unit 3550 are kept in a constant vertical direction. It can revolve around the central link gear 3611b) of the unit 3610.

Further, when the back-up rotation base unit 3570 rotates the action lever pinion gear 3585 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the action lever drive motor 3583, the action lever 3586 is moved to the left via the action lever rack gear 3586a. When the acting lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated in the front-view clockwise direction, the acting lever 3586 can be moved to the right via the acting lever rack gear 3586a.

More specifically, in the state where the action lever 3586 is assembled to the back-up rotation base unit 3570, the main body portion 3586b is located on the right side of the first hole 3571a in the back-up rotation base 3571 in the front view. The slide mounting portion 3586c of the action lever 3586 extends to the left to the vicinity of the third hole 3571c so as to straddle the upper and outer sides of the first hole 3571a. The first working portion 3586f is located below the first hole 3571a. The second right extending portion 3586g extends above the second hole 3571b to the vicinity of the second hole 3571b. The lower end of the second lower extending portion 3586h extends so as to be located below the second hole 3571b. The second working portion 3586i is located at a height near the lower part of the second hole 3571b. The lower end of the third extending portion 3586j extends below the third hole 3571c. Therefore, the third working portion 3586k is located below the third hole 3571c.

As shown in FIG. 167 (a), this action lever 3586, in the state of being moved to the leftmost position (state of action position), is a lock piece 3586d protruding from the left side of the main body 3586b to the left in front view. However, it is in a state of protruding into the first hole 3571a. Further, in this state, the left end of the first working portion 3586f is located slightly to the left of the center of the first hole 3571a. Further, the left end of the second working portion 3586i is located to the left of the second hole 3571b. Further, the left end of the third working portion 3586k is located near the right end of the third hole 3571c. Further, in this state, the lower end of the third extending portion 3586j of the acting lever 3586 is detected by the acting lever movement detection sensor 3588.

On the other hand, in the state where the action lever 3586 is moved to the rightmost position (the state in the non-action position), the lock piece 3586d and the first action portion 3586f are located to the right of the first hole 3571a. Further, the left end of the second working portion 3586i is located slightly to the left with respect to the center of the second hole 3571b. Further, the left end of the third working portion 3586k is located to the right of the third hole 3571c. In this state, the lower end of the third extension portion 3586j of the action lever 3586 is separated from the action lever movement detection sensor 3588, and is in a non-detection state.

The action lever 3586 will be described in detail later, but the lock piece 3586d is moved to the action position and the lock piece 3586d is inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a or the vertical lock hole 3525b in the first mounting shaft member 3525 of the back upper first decorative unit 3510. By doing so, the rotation of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 with respect to the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600 can be regulated (locked). Therefore, when the action lever 3586 is moved to the non-action position, the lock piece 3586d comes out of the horizontal lock hole 3525a or the vertical lock hole 3525b, and rotates backward with respect to the movable side unit 3610 of the backside elevating unit 3600. The base unit 3570 can be rotated.

Further, in the action lever 3586, the left ends of the first action section 3586f, the second action section 3586i, and the third action section 3586k are the first opening / closing arm 3521 and the back of the back upper first decorative unit 3510. The second opening / closing arm 3541 of the upper second decorative unit 3530 and the third opening / closing arm 3651 of the back upper third decorative unit 3550 can be brought into contact with each other. Therefore, when the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotated and positioned in a vertically extended state, when the action lever 3586 is moved to the action position, the first opening / closing arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3541 and the third opening / closing arm are opened and closed. The arm 3651 can be slid upward.

[5-9f-5. Back-up lifting unit]
Next, the back-up elevating unit 3600 of the back-up movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 168 to 173. FIG. 168 (a) is a perspective view of the back-up elevating unit in the back-up movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 168 (b) is a perspective view of the back-up elevating unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 169 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back-up elevating unit disassembled into a movable side unit and a fixed side unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. 169 (b) shows the back-up elevating unit as a movable side unit and a fixed side unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind by disassembling into. FIG. 170 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the movable side unit of the back-up elevating unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 170 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the movable side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed-side unit of the back-up elevating unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 172 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed-side unit of the back-up elevating unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 173 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive system when the movable side unit of the back-up elevating unit is in the ascending position from the front, and FIG. 173 (b) is a driving system when the movable side unit of the back-up elevating unit is in the descending position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the system from the front.

The back upper elevating unit 3600 is attached between the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 on the upper side of the opening 3010a on the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The back-up elevating unit 3600 includes a movable side unit 3610 to which the back-up first decorative body unit 3510 and the back-up rotation base unit 3570 are mounted on the front surface, and a fixed-side unit to which the movable side unit 3610 is raised and lowered and mounted in the back box 3010. It is equipped with 3650 and.

First, as shown in FIG. 170, the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600 is attached to a substantially square movable side base 3611 extending to the left and right in front view and an upper right corner on the front surface of the movable side base 3611. The back-up rotary drive motor 3612 in which the cage rotary shaft penetrates the movable base 3611 and protrudes rearward, the rotary drive gear 3613 attached to the rotary shaft of the back-up rotary drive motor 3612, and the rotary drive gear 3613. It is provided with a rotary base drive gear 3614 which is meshed with the rotary base driven gear 357 of the back-up rotary base unit 3570 and is rotatably attached to the front surface of the movable base 3611.

Further, the movable side unit 3610 has a motor cover 3615 attached to the front surface of the movable side base 3611 so as to cover the back-up rotary drive motor 3612 and a flat plate-shaped base attached to the rear side of the movable side base 3611. It includes a cover 3616 and a movable relay board 3617 attached to the front surface of the base cover 3616.

The movable side base 3611 of the movable side unit 3610 is formed at the front end of the axial cylinder portion 3611a and the outer peripheral surface of the axial cylinder portion 3611a, which protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from the lower part in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and rotates on the back side. The central link gear 3611b that meshes with the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 of the base unit 3570, and the central link gear 3611b at the upper part, which penetrates back and forth at a position to the left from the center in the left-right direction and extends to the left and right. Rotation detection piece 3611d (rotation detection piece 3611d) which is attached to the lower side of the barrel portion 3611a on the front surface and is detected by the backside rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 of the backside rotation base unit 3570. (See FIG. 173).

The inner diameter of the shaft cylinder portion 3611a of the movable side base 3611 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d of the back top rotation base 3571 in the back top rotation base unit 3570, and the mounting cylinder portion 3571d is rotated. It can be inserted as much as possible. The central link gear 3611b has the same diameter as the second link gear portion 3573b of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third link gear portion 3578b of the third drive link gear member 3578 in the back-up rotation base unit 3570. Are formed at the same pitch.

The movable side relay board 3617 includes a back upper relay board 3569 of the fixed side unit 3650, a back upper first decorative board 3514 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, and a back upper rotation base relay board 3591 of the back upper rotation base unit 3570. , And the connection with the backside rotary drive motor 3612 is relayed. The elevating slide rails 3656 of the fixed side unit 3650 are attached to the left and right ends of the base cover 3616 on the rear surface. Further, the lower end of the elevating spring 3657 of the fixed side unit 3650 is attached to the rear side of the base cover 3616.

As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the fixed-side unit 3650 of the back-up elevating unit 3600 has a substantially square fixed-side base 3651 mounted in the back box 3010 and extending to the left and right in front view, and a fixed-side base 3651. In the movable side unit 3610, the spur gear-shaped elevating gear portion 3652a and the elevating gear portion 3652a, which are rotatably attached around the axis extending in the front-rear direction at the center of the front surface, project forward in a columnar shape from the vicinity of the outer periphery on the front surface of the elevating gear portion 3652a. An elevating rotating body 3652 having an elevating drive pin 3652b slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3611c of the movable base 3611, and a detection piece 3652c extending outward from the elevating gear portion 3652a. An elevating drive gear 3653 that meshes with the elevating gear portion 3652a of the elevating rotating body 3652, and a back-up elevating drive motor 3654 in which the elevating drive gear 3653 is attached to the rotating shaft and is attached to the rear surface of the fixed side base 3651. It has.

Further, the fixed side unit 3650 is attached to the front surface of the fixed side base 3651, and is attached to the elevating detection sensor 3655 that detects the detection piece 3652c of the elevating rotating body 3652 and the left and right sides of the front surface of the fixed side base 3651. A pair of elevating slide rails 3656 that can be expanded and contracted up and down, and a pair of elevating slide rails 3656 that can be expanded and contracted up and down, and a pair of elevating slide rails 3656 that are outside the fixed side base 3651 The upper end side is attached to the movable side unit 3610, and the lower end side is attached to the movable side base 3611 of the movable side unit 3610 so that the movable side base 3611 is urged to move upward.

Further, the fixed side unit 3650 has an insertion slit 3658a that penetrates back and forth and extends in a semicircular shape through which the elevating drive pin 3652b of the elevating rotating body 3652 can pass, and is a pair of elevating slide rails. Between the 3656, the fixed side front cover 3658 attached to the front surface of the fixed side base 3651 so as to cover the front surface of the elevating rotating body 3652, and the fixed side front cover 3658 attached to the rear surface of the fixed side base 3651, the movable side unit 3610. The back side relay board 3657 connecting the movable side relay board 3617, the back top elevating drive motor 3654, the elevating detection sensor 3655, and the lower right relay board 3034, and the back side of the back top relay board 3659 are covered so as to cover the rear side. It includes a board cover 3660 attached to the rear side of the fixed side base 3651.

Subsequently, the operation of the back-up elevating unit 3600 will be described. In the back-up lifting unit 3600, the mounting cylinder portion 3571d of the back-up rotation base 3571 in the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotatably inserted into the shaft cylinder portion 3611a of the movable-side base 3611 in the movable-side unit 3610. The rear end of the first mounting shaft member 3525 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 is mounted on the front surface of the movable side base 3611 through the mounting cylinder portion 3571d of the back upper rotating base 3571. As a result, the movable side unit 3610 rotatably attaches the back-up rotation base unit 3570 around the shaft extending forward and backward around the shaft cylinder portion 3611a (first hole 3571a) in a state where it cannot move forward. be able to.

When the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is attached to the movable-side base 3611 of the movable-side unit 3610, the rotation base drive gear 3614 is in a state of meshing with the rotation base driven gear 357 of the back-up rotation base unit 3570. Therefore, when the rotation base drive gear 3614 is rotated via the rotation drive gear 3613 by the drive of the back-up rotation drive motor 3612, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotated around the barrel portion 3611a (first hole 3571a). Can be made to. The movable side unit 3610 can rotate the back-up rotation base unit 3570 by 90 degrees between the horizontally extended horizontal position state and the vertically extended vertical position state. The rotation detection piece 3611d of the movable base 3611 in the movable unit 3610 is detected by the back rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 of the back top rotation base unit 3570 when the back top rotation base unit 3570 is in the horizontal position. ..

Further, in the assembled state of the back-up elevating unit 3600, the movable side unit 3610 can be moved (elevated) only in the vertical direction with respect to the fixed side unit 3650 by the pair of elevating slide rails 3656 of the fixed side unit 3650. ing. In the movable side unit 3610, the elevating drive pin 3652b of the elevating rotating body 3652 in the fixed side unit 3650 is slidably inserted in the elevating slit 3611c of the movable side base 3611 in the left-right direction. Therefore, the position of the movable side unit 3610 in the vertical direction is regulated by the height position of the elevating drive pin 3652b in the elevating rotating body 3652. Further, the movable side unit 3610 is urged to move upward by a pair of elevating springs 3657.

In the back-up elevating unit 3600, as shown in FIG. 173 (a), in the normal state, the elevating drive pin 3652b that revolves by the rotation of the elevating rotating body 3652 is directly above the rotation center of the elevating rotating body 3652. On the other hand, it is located slightly to the right, and the movable side unit 3610 is in the ascending position located on the uppermost side by the elevating drive pin 3652b. In this state, the detection piece 3652c of the elevating rotating body 3652 is detected by the elevating detection sensor 3655. Further, in this state, the elevating drive pin 3652b is in contact with the right end in the elevating slit 3611c extending to the left and right of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610.

Therefore, the weight on the movable side unit 3610 acts on the elevating drive pin 3652b, so that even if the elevating rotating body 3652 tries to rotate in the front view clockwise direction via the elevating drive pin 3652b, the elevating drive pin 3652b Since it is in contact with the right end of the elevating slit 3611c, the elevating rotating body 3652 cannot rotate in the front clockwise direction any more, and the movable side unit 3610 is prevented from moving downward. ing. That is, the movable side unit 3610 is in a locked state at the raised position. As a result, the weight (load) from the movable side unit 3610 side does not act on the back-up elevating drive motor 3654 via the elevating gear portion 3652a of the elevating rotating body 3652 and the elevating drive gear 3653. No load is applied to the upper elevating drive motor 3654.

From this ascending position, when the elevating rotating body 3652 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the back-up elevating drive motor 3654, the elevating drive pin 3652b of the elevating rotating body 3652 moves to the left. It revolves so as to move downward, and while the elevating drive pin 3652b slides to the left in the elevating slit 3611c, the movable side unit 3610 acts as an urging force for the pair of elevating springs 3657 via the elevating slit 3611c. It will move downward against it. When the elevating drive pin 3652b, which revolves when the elevating rotating body 3652 rotates counterclockwise, revolves downward beyond the same height as the rotation center of the elevating rotating body 3652, the elevating drive pin 3652b is in the left-right direction. The direction of movement is changed, and the vehicle moves downward while moving to the right, and slides to the right in the elevating slit 3611c.

When the elevating drive pin 3652b is located directly below the center of the elevating rotating body 3652, the rotation of the elevating rotating body 3652 is stopped, and at the same time, the downward movement of the movable side unit 3610 is stopped, so that the movable side unit 3610 is stopped. Is the state of the most lowered descending position (see FIG. 173 (b)). When moving the movable side unit 3610 from the descending position to the ascending position, the back-up elevating drive motor 3654 is driven in the opposite direction to the above to rotate the elevating rotating body 3652 in the front view clockwise direction. Then, it can be returned to the ascending position. At this time, the upward movement of the movable side unit 3610 is assisted by the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 3657, and the load applied to the back-up elevating drive motor 3654 is reduced.

As described above, the back-up elevating unit 3600 has the back-up first decorative unit 3510, the back-up second decorative unit 3530, the back-up third decorative unit 3550, and the back-up rotation via the movable side unit 3610. The base unit 3570 can be moved (up and down) up and down between the ascending position and the descending position.

[5-9f-6. Operation of the movable production unit on the back]
Next, the operation of the back-up movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 174 to 183. FIG. 174 is an explanatory view showing a drive system for ascending / descending when the movable side unit of the back-up elevating unit is in the ascending position in the back-up movable effect unit, and FIG. 175 is a movable back-up elevating unit in the back-up movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system for ascending / descending when the side unit is a descending position. FIG. 176 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the action lever is in the action position when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back-up rotation base unit is in the horizontal position in the back-up movable effect unit, and FIG. 177 is an explanatory view in the back-up movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the action lever in the non-action position when the movable side unit is a descending position, and the back-up rotation base unit is a horizontal position. FIG. 178 is an explanatory view showing a drive system of the back-up rotation base unit when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back-up rotation base unit is in the horizontal position in the back-up movable production unit, and FIG. 179 is an explanatory view showing the back-up rotation base unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of the back-up rotation base unit when the movable side unit is a descending position, and the back-up rotation base unit is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from a horizontal position, and FIG. 180 is the back-up movable production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of the back-up rotation base unit when the movable side unit is a descending position, and the back-up rotation base unit is a vertical position.

Further, FIG. 181 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the action lever is in the non-acting position when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back-up rotation base unit is in the vertical position in the back-up movable effect unit, and FIG. 182 is the back-up movable. FIG. 183 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the action lever regulates rotation at the action position when the movable side unit is in the descending position and the back-up rotation base unit is in the vertical position in the effect unit. FIG. 183 is the back-up movable effect unit. When the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back-up rotation base unit is in the vertical position, the action lever acts on the back-up first decorative unit, the back-up second decorative unit, and the back-up third decorative unit in the working position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which exerts.

In the normal state, the back-up movable effect unit 3500 is in the state where the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600 is in the most raised position as shown in FIG. 174 and the like, and the back-up rotation base unit. The 3570 is in a horizontally extended horizontal position. In this state, the back-up first decorative unit 3510 is at the center, and the back-up second decorative unit 3530 and the back-up third decorative unit 3550 are lined up on the left and right sides. Further, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative unit 3530. The 3532 and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back upper third decorative unit 3550 are the first opening / closing spring 3523, the second opening / closing spring 3543, and the third opening / closing spring 3563, respectively. Due to the urging force, they are in a closed position where they are in contact with each other.

In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 174, the revolving elevating drive pin 3652b of the fixed side unit 3650 in the back-up elevating unit 3600 is located slightly to the right of the rotation center of the elevating rotating body 3652. Therefore, it is in contact with the right end of the elevating slit 3611c extending to the left and right of the movable base 3611. As a result, the back-up first decorative unit 3510, the back-up second decorative unit 3530, the back-up third decorative unit 3550, and the back-up Even if the weight (load) of the rotating base unit 3570 and the movable side unit 3610 acts, the elevating drive pin 3652b cannot revolve further in the front-view clockwise direction, and moves downward of the movable side unit 3610. The movement of the clock is restricted, and it is locked in the ascending position.

Therefore, under normal conditions, the loads of the back-up first decorative unit 3510, the back-up second decorative unit 3530, the back-up third decorative unit 3550, the back-up rotating base unit 3570, and the movable side unit 3610 are applied. , It does not act on the back-up lift drive motor 3654, and the load is not applied to the back-up lift drive motor 3654. Further, in a normal state, the detection piece 3652c of the elevating rotating body 3652 that revolves the elevating drive pin 3652b is detected by the elevating detection sensor 3655.

From this normal state, when the back-up elevating drive motor 3654 is driven to revolve the elevating drive pin 3652b of the elevating rotating body 3652 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the elevating drive pin 3652b moves into the elevating slit 3611c. The movable side unit 3610 moves downward as the elevating drive pin 3652b descends, and when the elevating drive pin 3652b reaches the most lowered position, the revolution of the elevating drive pin 3652b stops. Then, the movable side unit 3610 is positioned in the lowered position (see FIG. 175).

The back-up movable production unit 3500 moves the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600 to the lower position, so that the back-up first decorative unit 3510, the back-up second decorative unit 3530, and the back-up third decoration The body unit 3550 and the back-up rotation base unit 3570 can be positioned at the upper part on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 189).

When the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600 is moved between the ascending position and the descending position, the back-up movable effect unit 3500 moves the action lever 3586 of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 to the action position. There is. When the action lever 3586 is moved to the left action position by the drive of the action lever drive motor 3583, as shown in FIG. 176, the lock piece 3586d of the action lever 3586 is the back-up first decorative unit 3510. It is in a state of being inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a of the first mounting shaft member 3525 in the above. As a result, the acting lever 3586 cannot rotate around the first mounting shaft member 3525, so that the back-up rotation base unit 3570 to which the acting lever 3586 is mounted is moved to the first mounting shaft member 3525 (movable side). The rotation is locked with respect to the shaft cylinder portion 3611a) of the unit 3610. That is, the rotation of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is locked at the horizontal position.

Since the tip of the lock piece 3586d of the action lever 3586 is formed in a tapered shape, the horizontal lock hole of the first mounting shaft member 3525 is formed even if the backside rotation base unit 3570 is slightly displaced from the horizontal position. By inserting it into the 3525a, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 can be moved to the horizontal position to lock the rotation.

In this action lever 3586, although not shown, the second right extending portion 3586g of the action lever 3586 comes into contact with the receiving boss 3541b of the second opening / closing arm 3541 in the back upper second decorative unit 3530 from above. At the same time, the third extension portion 3586j (left end of the slide mounting portion 3586c) of the action lever 3586 is in contact with a predetermined position of the third upper arm 3558 in the back upper third decorative unit 3550 from the right side. As a result, the action lever 3586 rotates the back-up rotation base 3571 around the axis around the second hole 3571b in the back-up second decorative unit 3530 and the back-up rotation in the back-up third decorative unit 3550. The rotation of the base 3571 around the axis around the third hole 3571c is prevented. Therefore, by moving (elevating) the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600 in the vertical direction, the back-up second decorative unit 3530, the back-up third decorative unit 3550, and the back-up rotation base unit 3570 can be moved. Even if vibration acts, the action lever 3586 located at the action position prevents the back-up second decorative unit 3530, the back-up third decorative unit 3550, and the back-up rotation base unit 3570 from shaking. ing.

Through the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600, the back-up first decorative unit 3510, the back-up second decorative unit 3530, the back-up third decorative unit 3550, and the back-up rotation base unit 3570 are When the action lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated in the front view clockwise direction by the action lever drive motor 3583 via the action lever drive gear 3584 while being positioned in the lowered position, it meshes with the action lever pinion gear 3585. The action lever rack gear 3586a moves the action lever 3586 in the horizontal state to the right non-action position, and the lock piece 3586d is pulled out from the horizontal lock hole 3525a of the first mounting shaft member 3525 (see FIG. 177). As a result, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 rotates about the mounting shaft portion 3525c of the first mounting shaft member 3525 (the first hole 3571a of the back-up rotation base 3571 and the shaft cylinder portion 3611a of the movable side base 3611). Will be able to.

In the back-up rotation base unit 3570 of the back-up movable production unit 3500, as shown in FIG. 178, the rotation base driven gear 357 meshes with the rotation base drive gear 3614 in the movable side unit 3610, and is used for the second time. The third link gear 3577 and the third link gear 3582 for the third use mesh with the central link gear 3611b in the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610.

Then, with the back-up rotation base unit 3570 in the horizontal position and the action lever 3586 in the non-action position, the back-up rotation drive motor 3612 of the movable side unit 3610 is driven to view the rotation base drive gear 3614 from the front. When rotated counterclockwise, the back-up rotary base unit 3570 is moved to the central link gear 3611b (first hole 3571a, mounting cylinder) via the rotary base driven gear 3772 that meshes with the rotary base drive gear 3614. The portion 3571d) rotates about the axis in the clockwise direction in the front view (see FIG. 179). At this time, since the back-up first decorative body unit 3510 is attached to the front surface of the movable side unit 3610 through the first hole 3571a which is the rotation center of the back-up rotation base unit 3570, the back-up rotation base It does not rotate with the unit 3570.

In the back-up movable production unit 3500, when the back-up rotation base unit 3570 rotates about the central link gear 3611b, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3577 mesh with the central link gear 3611b. The link gear 3582 rotates while revolving around the central link gear 3611b, and rotates clockwise with respect to the back-up rotation base 3571. When the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 rotate, their rotation is transmitted to the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b to drive the second. The link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578 rotate in the counterclockwise direction with respect to the back-up rotation base 3571, respectively. That is, when the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotated in the front-view clockwise direction, the second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c are rotatably attached to both ends of the back-up rotation base 3571 in the longitudinal direction. The drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578 revolve in the clockwise direction around the first hole 3571a, and the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578. However, the second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c of the back-up rotation base 3571 rotate (rotate) in the counterclockwise direction, respectively.

Since the second link gear portion 3573b of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third link gear portion 3578b of the third drive link gear member 3578 have the same diameter as the central link gear 3611b of the movable side unit 3610. The rotation angle between the back-up rotation base 3571 and the central link gear 3611b and the rotation angle between the back-up rotation base 3571 and the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b are the same. When the back-up rotation base 3571 is rotated around the central link gear 3611b, the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578 keep their rotation directions constant and the central link gear. It revolves around 3611b (see FIGS. 179 and 180). Since the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative unit 3550 are attached to the front surfaces of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578, respectively. When the back-up rotation base 3571 is rotated, the back-up second decorative unit 3530 and the back-up third decorative unit 3550 keep their vertical orientations constant, and the back-up first decorative unit 3510 It will revolve around.

In this back-up movable production unit 3500, when the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is in the horizontal position, the back-up second decorative unit 3530 is arranged on the right side of the back-up first decorative unit 3510, and the back-up second decorative unit 3530 is arranged on the back-up first. Since the back-up third decoration unit 3550 is arranged on the left side of the one-decoration unit 3510, if the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotated in the front-view clockwise direction to be in the vertical position, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is placed in the vertical position. (Ii) The decorative body unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative unit 3550 are arranged on the lower side and the upper side of the back upper first decorative unit 3510, respectively, while keeping their vertical orientations as they are (FIG. 180). See). Therefore, when the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is in the vertical position, the back-up third decorative unit 3550, the back-up first decorative unit 3510, and the back-up second decorative unit 3530 are arranged in this order from the top. .. In this state, the back-up first decorative unit 3510, the back-up second decorative unit 3530, and the back-up third decorative unit 3550 are in the closed positions, respectively, at the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction. It is located so as to traverse substantially the entire height within the frame of the accessory 2500 (see FIG. 191).

When the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotated from the horizontal position to the vertical position, as shown in FIG. 181, the action lever 3586 of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 located at the non-action position is a lock piece. The 3586d is in a state of facing upward. In this state, when the action lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by driving the action lever drive motor 3583, the action lever 3586 is moved upward to move from the non-action position to the action position. The lock piece 3586d of the action lever 3586 is in a state of being inserted into the vertical lock hole 3525b of the first mounting shaft member 3525 (see FIG. 182). As a result, the rotation of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is locked in the vertical position.

In the back-up movable production unit 3500, when the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is in the vertical position and the action lever 3586 is moved from the non-action position to the action position, the action lever is moved upward with the action lever 3586. The tips (upper ends) of the first working portion 3586f, the second working portion 3586i, and the third working portion 3586k of the 3586 are the receiving bosses of the first opening / closing arm 3521 in the back-up first decorative body unit 3510. 3521b, the receiving boss 3541b of the second opening / closing arm 3541 in the back upper second decorative unit 3530, and the lower end of the third opening / closing arm 3651 in the back upper third decorative unit 3550, respectively, from below, and the first opening / closing The arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3651 are moved upward.

Then, when the first opening / closing arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3651 move upward, the first left movable of the back-up first decorative unit 3510, which was in the closed position, respectively. Decorative lens 3511 and first right movable decorative lens 3512, second left movable decorative lens 3531 and second right movable decorative lens 3532 of back upper second decorative unit 3530, and third left of back upper third decorative unit 3550. The movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 move outward in the left-right direction so as to be separated from each other, and are in the open position (see FIG. 183).

As a result, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 facing between the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 in the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 in the back upper first decorative body unit 3510. The first fixed decorative lens 3513 facing between the left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decoration in the back upper second decorative unit 3530. The second fixed decorative lens 3533 facing from between the lens 3532 is in a state of being arranged in a straight line from top to bottom. In this state, the back-up first decorative unit 3510, the back-up second decorative unit 3530, and the back-up third decorative unit 3550 are in the open positions, respectively, and are centered in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction. The first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 are located in the back front decoration unit 3100 so as to traverse substantially the entire height within the frame of the accessory 2500. They are lined up and down with substantially the same width so as to be continuous with the back front lower center lens 3131 (see FIG. 192).

In order to return the back-up movable effect unit 3500 to the normal state, the normal state can be returned by performing the operation opposite to the above.

Further, the back-up movable effect unit 3500 includes a first left movable decorative lens 3511 and a first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back-up first decorative body unit 3510, and a second left movable decorative lens of the back-up second decorative unit 3530. In the closed position where the 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back upper third decorative unit 3550 are in contact with each other, respectively. Can show different character decorations, and when the back-up third decoration unit 3550, the back-up first decoration unit 3510, and the back-up second decoration unit 3530 are lined up from left to right, three One character is in a state where a predetermined logo according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is written horizontally, and the player can be made to recognize the concept of the pachinko machine 1. By setting the back-up rotation base unit 3570 to the vertical position, the back-up third decorative unit 3550, the back-up first decorative unit 3510, and the back-up second decorative unit 3530 are lined up from top to bottom. The logo according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is written vertically, and the player can recognize the logo even in this state.

As described above, according to the back-up movable effect unit 3500, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is relative to the back-up first decorative unit 3510, the back-up second decorative unit 3530, and the back-up third decorative unit 3550. The back top first decorative unit 3510, the back upper second decorative unit 3530, and the back by the action lever 3586 that moves between the working position and the non-working position according to the rotational position (horizontal position or vertical position). The upper third decorative unit 3550 can be given different effects of rotation lock (first action) and movement to the open position (second action) to show the player different effects. It is possible to make the player less bored, to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[5-9 g. Back bottom movable production unit]
Next, the back lower movable effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 184 and the like. FIG. 184 (a) is a front view of the back lower movable effect unit, (b) is a rear view of the back lower movable effect unit, and (c) is a back lower movable decorative body in the back lower movable effect unit. It is a rear view which shows the state which the unit was raised. The lower back movable effect unit 3700 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a at the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the rear wall in the back box 3010. The under-back movable effect unit 3700 has a back-under movable decorative unit 3710 having a predetermined three-dimensional decoration and a back that is installed in the back box 3010 and moves the under-back movable decorative unit 3710 up and down. It includes a lower drive unit 3750 and.

The under-back movable decorative unit 3710 has a three-dimensional decoration in which a plurality of gates are lined up on the left and right under a roof extending to the left and right, and each gate part penetrates back and forth. A plurality of lower back door members 3712 attached to the main body 3711 and each gate part of the lower back decorative main body 3711 so as to open and close in a hinged manner forward in pairs, and a lower back door member 3712. It is attached to the rear side of the lower back decorative body 3711 and extends to the left and right, and is attached so as to be slidable in the left-right direction at the lower front of the lower back decorative base 3713. A lower opening / closing slider 3714 that hinges and rotates the lower back door member 3712 on the left side of the front view of a plurality of lower back door members 3712, and a slidable attachment in the upper front surface of the lower back decorative body base 3713. It is provided with an upper opening / closing slider 3715 for hinge-rotating the back lower door member 3712 on the right side in the front view of the two sets of the back lower door members 3712.

Further, the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the lower back decorative body base 3713, and the lower opening / closing slider 3714 and the upper opening / closing slider 3715 are slid in different directions in the left-right direction. One end side is attached to the upper end of the body 3716 and the opening / closing rotating body 3716, and the other end side is attached to the back lower decorative body base 3713, and each back lower door member is attached via the lower opening / closing slider 3714 and the upper opening / closing slider 3715. It includes a door closing spring 3717 that urges the opening / closing rotating body 3716 so that the 3712 hinges to rotate in the closing direction. The door closing spring 3717 is urged so that the opening / closing rotating body 3716 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear.

Further, the lower back decorative body unit 3710 is arranged behind the lower back decorative lens 3718 (see FIG. 194) attached to the rear side of the lower back decorative body 3711 and the rear side of the lower back decorative lens 3718. Wiring cable 3701 that connects the lower back decorative board 3719 with multiple LEDs mounted on the front of the cage and the lower back decorative board 3719 and the lower back relay board 3757 attached to the rear side of the back lower decorative body base 3713. It is provided with an upper wiring cover 3720 which can induce the above. The wiring cable 3701 is a flexible flat cable. The upper wiring cover 3720 is attached to the back lower decorative body base 3713 to form a downwardly open space capable of accommodating the wiring cable 3701. Further, the upper wiring cover 3720 has a curved upper guiding portion 3720a for guiding the wiring cable 3701 on the right end side in the rear view.

The lower back drive unit 3750 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The lower back drive base 3751 having an extended link slit 3751a and the lower back drive base 3751 are mounted so as to be movable up and down on the front surface of the lower back drive base 3751, and the back lower decorative body unit 3710 is attached to the upper part. After the lower elevating base 3752, the pair of elevating arms 3753 that are rotatably attached to the left and right ends of the front surface of the lower back drive base 3751 and move the lower back elevating base 375 up and down, and the lower back drive base 3751. It includes a lower back drive motor 3754 mounted on the side and a plurality of transmission gears 3755 that transmit the rotation of the lower back drive motor 3754 to rotate the pair of elevating arms 3753 in different directions.

Further, the lower back drive unit 3750 is slidably attached to the lower end side in the link slit 3751a of the lower back drive base 3751, and the upper end side is rotatably attached to the opening / closing rotating body 3716 of the lower back decorative unit 3710. It is provided with a rod-shaped link arm 3756. The upper end of the link arm 3756 is rotatably attached to a portion on the right side of the rear view of the rotation center of the opening / closing rotating body 3716. As a result, when the link arm 3756 is pulled downward, the opening / closing rotating body 3716 rotates in the direction clockwise in the rear view against the urging force of the door closing spring 3717.

Further, the lower back drive unit 3750 is attached to the rear side of the lower back drive base 3751 and relays the connection between the lower back decorative board 3719 and the lower back drive motor 3754 and the lower right relay board 3034. Below the board 3757 and the wiring cable 3701 that is attached above the backside relay board 3757 on the rear side of the backside drive base 3751 and connects the backside relay board 3757 and the backside decorative board 3719. It includes a wiring cover 3758 and. The lower wiring cover 3758 is attached to the lower back drive base 3751 to form an upper open space capable of accommodating the wiring cable 3701. Further, the lower wiring cover 3758 has a curved lower guide portion 3758a for guiding the wiring cable 3701 on the right end side in the rear view.

Subsequently, the operation of the lower back movable effect unit 3700 will be described. In the under-back movable effect unit 3700, in the normal state, the under-back movable decorative unit 3710 is in the most lowered state (see FIGS. 184 (a) and 184 (b)). In this state, a plurality of back lower door members 3712 are closed by the opening / closing rotating body 3716, the lower opening / closing slider 3714, and the upper opening / closing slider 3715 by the urging force of the door closing spring 3717, and the back lower decorative body main body. The doors of the plurality of gates of 3711 (lower back door member 3712) are in a closed state. Further, in this state, the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is located below the upper end of the portion forming the lower side, and can hardly be seen from the front (see FIG. 129 and the like).

In this normal state, when the under-back drive motor 3754 is driven to rotate the pair of elevating arms 3753 so that the sides facing each move upward, the under-back elevating base 3752 moves upward and under the back. The lower back movable decorative unit 3710 attached to the elevating base 3752 rises.

At this time, since the upper end side of the link arm 3756 is attached to the opening / closing rotating body 3716 in the lower back movable decorative unit 3710, the link arm 3756 rises together with the lower back movable decorative unit 3710, and the lower end side is the lower back. It slides upward (to the left in the rear view) in the link slit 3751a of the drive base 3751.

Then, when the lower end side of the link arm 3756 reaches the upper end of the link slit 3751a by raising the lower back movable decorative unit 3710, the link arm 3756 cannot move further upward. At this position (first rising position), the lower back movable effect unit 3700 can temporarily stop the movement of the lower back movable decorative unit 3710 in the vertical direction. In this state, the portions of the plurality of gates of the back lower decorative body 3711 are located above the lower side (stage 2530) of the center accessory 2500, and the door is closed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. A plurality of gates of state can be visually recognized (see FIG. 193).

When the lower back movable decorative unit 3710 is further raised in this first elevating position, the link arm 3756 is pulled downward relative to the lower back movable decorative unit 3710 by the link slit 3751a, and the link is formed. The opening / closing rotating body 3716 attached to the upper end side of the arm 3756 rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view against the urging force of the door closing spring 3717 (see FIG. 184 (c)). When the opening / closing rotating body 3716 rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view, the lower opening / closing slider 3714 and the upper opening / closing slider 3715 slide in the direction of opening the plurality of back lower door members 3712, and the plurality of lower back decorative body 3711. The gate door (back lower door member 3712) is opened and the ascent stops. In the state where the back lower door member 3712 is in the open position (second ascending position), the back lower decorative lens 3718 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized through the plurality of gates of the back lower decorative body 3711 (FIG. 194). See). In this state, the LED of the lower back decorative substrate 3719 is made to emit light, so that the open gate can be made to emit light.

In the back lower movable effect unit 3700, the wiring cable 3701 connecting the back lower decorative board 3719 of the back lower movable decorative body unit 3710 and the back lower relay board 3757 of the back lower drive unit 3750 has an upper wiring cover 3720. And the lower wiring cover 3758. The upper wiring cover 3720 has an upper guide portion 3720a that is curved between the upper side and the right side when viewed from the rear and the lower end of the right side extends downward. The lower wiring cover 3758 has a lower guide portion 3758a that is curved between the lower side and the right side when viewed from the rear and the upper end of the right side extends upward.

The wiring cable 3701 connecting the lower back decorative board 3719 and the lower back relay board 3757 extends to the right in the rear view at the left end of the rear view on the upper side of the upper wiring cover 3720 on the lower back movable decorative unit 3710 side. It is attached so as to extend to the right side of the rear view at the left end of the rear view on the lower side of the lower wiring cover on the lower back drive unit 3750 side. As a result, in the state where the lower back movable decorative unit 3710 is in the most lowered normal position, the wiring cable 3701 is curved and extended along the upper guide portion 3720a and the lower guide portion 3758a without being extremely bent. The lower back decorative board 3719 and the lower back relay board 3757 are well connected (see FIG. 184 (b)).

On the other hand, in the state where the lower back movable decorative unit 3710 is raised, as shown in FIG. 184 (c), the wiring cable 3701 includes the upper side of the upper wiring cover 3720, the right side of the rear view (upper guide portion 3720a), and the lower wiring. The lower back decorative substrate 3719 and the lower back relay substrate 3757 are connected in a state of being separated from the lower side of the cover 3758 and the right side of the rear view (lower guide portion 3758a). Then, when the lower back movable decorative unit 3710 is lowered from the raised state, it is guided to the upper guide portion 3720a and the lower guide portion 3758a, respectively, so that it curves smoothly without bending, and the upper wiring cover 3720 and the lower It will be housed in the wiring cover 3758. Therefore, the lower back movable effect unit 3700 is extremely capable of raising and lowering the lower back movable decorative unit 3710 even if the wiring cable 3701 connecting the lower back movable decorative unit 3710 and the lower back drive unit 3750 is repeatedly moved up and down. It is possible to prevent bending and prevent disconnection of the wiring cable 3701.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, the main movable effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 185 to 194. FIG. 185 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back middle left decorative body and the back middle right decorative body of the back middle movable effect unit in the back unit are moved to the appearance position on the center side. In FIG. 186, the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit in the back unit, the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body are moved to the appearance positions closer to the center, and then the first decorative surfaces of the back units are turned forward. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state of FIG. 187, and FIG. 187 is a second decorative surface of each of the left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit by rotating the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body from the state of FIG. 186. Is a front view of the game board showing the state facing forward, and FIG. 188 is a front view of the left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit by rotating the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body from the state of FIG. 186. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the 3rd decorative surface is facing forward.

FIG. 189 shows the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second left movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative unit in the back upper movable effect unit. (2) With the right movable decorative lens and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back upper third decorative unit unit in the closed positions, the back upper first decorative body unit and the back upper It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the 2nd decorative body unit and the 3rd decorative body unit on the back are moved to the descending position while keeping the horizontal position on the back upper rotation base unit so that the 3rd decorative unit is arranged horizontally. FIG. 190 shows the back-up rotation base unit rotated 45 degrees in the front-view clockwise direction from the state of FIG. 189, and the back-up first decorative unit, the back-up second decorative unit, and the back-up third decorative unit. FIG. 191 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which are diagonally arranged. FIG. 191 shows the back-up rotation base unit further rotated 45 degrees in the front-view clockwise direction from the state of FIG. 190 as a vertical position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the 1st decorative body unit, the 2nd decorative body unit on the back side, and the 3rd decorative body unit on the back side arranged vertically. The first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the decorative body unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative body unit, and the first of the back upper third decorative body unit. A game board showing the three left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens in the open position, respectively, with the first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens visible. It is a front view of.

FIG. 193 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back lower movable decorative body unit of the back lower movable effect unit in the back unit is moved to the first ascending position, and FIG. 194 is a front view of the back lower movable decoration unit from the state of FIG. 193. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the body unit is further raised and moved to the second rising position.

In a normal state, the game board 5 is a display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 through the frame of the center accessory 2500 as shown in FIGS. 129 and 136. Can be clearly seen from the player side (front). In the back-middle movable effect unit 3200, the left and right back-middle left decorative bodies 3210 and the back-middle-right decorative body 3220 are at the most distant retracted positions behind the back-left decorative body 3310 and the back-right decorative body 3410 in the evacuation position. It is in a state, and a part of the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 can be slightly seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500. In the back left movable production unit 3300, the back left decorative body 3310 is in the state of the retracted position moved to the leftmost side, and is located behind the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front decoration unit 3100 and almost from the front. can not see. In the back right movable production unit 3400, the back right decorative body 3410 is in the state of the retracted position moved to the rightmost side, and a part of the center accessory 2500 can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500 on the right side side. There is.

Further, in the normal state, in the back-up movable effect unit 3500, the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600 is in the most raised position, and the back-up rotation base unit 3570 extends horizontally. It is in a horizontal position. Further, with the back-up first decorative unit 3510 in the center, the back-up second decorative unit 3530 is arranged on the right side, and the back-up third decorative unit 3550 is arranged on the left side. Then, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative unit 3530 The 3532 and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back upper third decorative unit 3550 are the first opening / closing spring 3523, the second opening / closing spring 3543, and the third opening / closing spring 3563, respectively. They are in a closed position where they are in contact with each other due to the urging force, and each of them forms a decoration of a predetermined character. The back-up movable production unit 3500 is such that the back-up third decorative unit 3550, the back-up first decorative unit 3510, and the back-up second decorative unit 3530 are arranged side by side from left to right. A predetermined logo according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 can be shown horizontally by one character, and the predetermined logo is displayed on the upper part of the frame of the center accessory 2500 above the upper part of the game board side effect display device 1600. It is visible from the player side (front).

The game board 5 is a back front decoration unit of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game balls in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. 3100, back middle movable production unit 3200, back left movable production unit 3300, back right movable production unit 3400, back top movable production unit 3500, and back bottom movable production unit 3700 perform predetermined effects (movable production and light emission production). Do.

Specifically, for example, as an effect using the back-middle movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, the back-middle left decorative body 3210 and the back-middle right decoration that are separated from each other to the left and right by the drive of the back-middle drive motor 3254. The body 3220 and the body 3220 are moved so as to be close to each other and moved to a substantially central appearance position (see FIG. 185). As a result, the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 are located substantially in the center of the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3210 are located. The decoration with 3220 is combined. In the state of this appearance position, the back center left decorative body 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 block the effect image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, which strongly attracts the player's interest. At the same time, it can be combined to form one big decoration (decoration that imitates the petals of cherry blossoms), so it makes the player think that there is something good and expectation for the game. It can be raised.

Further, as an effect using the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, for example, the back left moving drive unit 3350 and the back right moving drive unit 3450, the back left moving drive motor 3352 and the back right By driving the mobile drive motor 3452, the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 are moved to the appearance positions on the center side in the left-right direction via the back left rotation drive unit 3330 back right rotation drive unit 3430. As a result, the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 are in a state closer to the center closer to the left side side and the right side side in the frame-shaped center accessory 2500. In other words, it is located near both left and right ends on the front surface of the game board side effect display device 1600 within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIGS. 186 to 188).

As a result, the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 can be seen, which can surprise the player and attract the player's attention to the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410. Can be made to. At this time, by emitting the LEDs of the back left decorative substrate 3334 and the back right decorative substrate 3434, the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 can be made to emit light, which further attracts the interest of the player. Can be made to. Further, in this state, since the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be seen from between the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410, it is possible to enjoy the effect collaborated with the effect image.

Then, with the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 moved to the appearance positions, the back left rotation drive unit 3330 and the back right rotation drive unit 3430 are not shown, and the back left rotation drive motor and the back right rotation drive motor are not shown. Therefore, the player can be entertained by rotating the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 around the axis extending vertically. When stopping the rotating back left decorative body 3310 and back right decorative body 3410, the first decorative surfaces 3311 and 3411 of the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 are stopped so as to face forward ( (See FIG. 186), the second decorative surfaces 3312, 3412 are stopped to face forward (see FIG. 187), and the third decorative surfaces 3313, 3413 are stopped to face forward (see FIG. 188). )can do. Since the decoration changes depending on the direction in which the rotation of the back left decoration body 3310 and the back right decoration body 3410 is stopped, the player can enjoy the changing decoration, and the back left decoration body 3310 and the back right decoration body 3310 and the back right decoration are desired decorations. It is possible to make the player feel excited depending on whether or not the body 3410 is stopped, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the player.

Since the back left movable production unit 3300 and the back right movable production unit 3400 can be moved independently, only one of them may be moved, or the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right can be moved. When the rotation of the decorative body 3410 is stopped, the decorative surfaces facing forward may be different. As a result, a wider variety of effects can be presented to the player, and the player can be less likely to get bored.

As an effect using the back-up movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, for example, in the state of the normal position, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is in the horizontal position and the action lever 3586 is in the action position. When the elevating drive pin 3652b is revolved in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the upper elevating drive motor 3654, the movable side unit 3610 moves downward along with the revolving of the elevating drive pin 3652b and is attached to the movable side unit 3610. The back-up first decorative unit 3510, the back-up second decorative unit 3530, and the back-up third decorative unit 3550 are lowered. Then, when the elevating drive pin 3652b reaches the most lowered position and the revolution stops, the back upper first decorative unit 3510, the back upper second decorative unit 3530, and the back upper first through the movable side unit 3610. The three decorative unit 3550 will be positioned side by side (horizontally) in the descending position (see FIG. 189).

In this state, the back-up first decorative unit 3510, the back-up second decorative unit 3530, and the back-up third decorative unit 3550 are located upward from the center in the vertical direction within the frame of the center accessory 2500. , The upper half of the front surface of the game board side effect display device 1600 is covered. As a result, a predetermined logo formed by the back-up first decorative unit 3510, the back-up second decorative unit 3530, and the back-up third decorative unit 3550 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. Since it descends to the center side so as to block a part of the displayed production image, it can make the player think that there is something good, and raise the player's expectation for the game. Can be made to.

In the state of FIG. 189, when the action lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated in the front-view clockwise direction by the action lever drive motor 3583 to move the action lever 3586 from the action position to the non-action position to the right, the first mounting is performed. The lock piece 3586d inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a of the shaft member 3525 is in a state of being pulled out from the horizontal lock hole 3525a, and the rotation lock of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is released.

With the rotation lock of the back-up rotation base unit 3570 by the action lever 3586 released, when the rotation base drive gear 3614 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the back-up rotation drive motor 3612 of the movable side unit 3610, it rotates. The back-up rotation base unit 3570 rotates in the front-view clockwise direction around the central link gear 3611b via the rotation base driven gear 357 that meshes with the base drive gear 3614. At this time, since the back-up first decorative body unit 3510 is attached to the front surface of the movable side unit 3610 through the first hole 3571a which is the rotation center of the back-up rotation base unit 3570, the back-up rotation base It does not rotate with the unit 3570.

When the back-up rotation base unit 3570 rotates about the central link gear 3611b, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 that mesh with the central link gear 3611b move to the central link gear. It rotates while revolving around 3611b, and their rotation is transmitted to the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578, and the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear. The member 3578 rotates in each of the counterclockwise directions with respect to the back-up rotation base 3571. Therefore, when the back-up rotation base 3571 is rotated, the back-up second decorative unit 3530 and the back-up third decorative unit 3550 are kept in a constant vertical orientation, and the back-up first decoration is maintained. It revolves around the body unit 3510 (see FIGS. 190 and 191).

Due to the rotation of the back-up rotation base unit 3570, the back-up second decorative unit 3530 and the back-up third decorative unit 3550 revolve around the back-up first decorative unit 3510. Since the decorative body unit 3530 and the back-up third decorative unit 3550 are kept in the vertical orientation, the player can sufficiently recognize the predetermined logo with the characters of the three decorations, so that the player can write horizontally. You can enjoy the movement that the logo changes to a vertical logo.

When the back-up rotation base unit 3570 rotates 90 degrees from the horizontal position in the front-view clockwise direction, it reaches the vertical position and the rotation stops. In this state, the back-up third decorative unit 3550, the back-up first decorative unit 3510, and the back-up second decorative unit 3530 are arranged in this order from top to bottom (see FIG. 191). As a result, the logo formed by the back-up first decorative unit 3510, the back-up second decorative unit 3530, and the back-up third decorative unit 3550 is placed in the center of the frame of the center accessory 2500. Since it seems to traverse almost the entire height of the inside, it can give a strong impact to the player and enhance the interest of the player.

Then, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 was rotated to a vertical position, and the back-up third decorative unit 3550, the back-up first decorative unit 3510, and the back-up second decorative unit 3530 were arranged vertically. In this state, the action lever drive motor 3583 rotates the action lever pinion gear 3585 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the action lever 3586 in the non-action position is moved upward to move to the action position. The lock piece 3586d is inserted into the vertical lock hole 3525b of the first mounting shaft member 3525, and the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotationally locked in the vertical position.

When the action lever 3586 moves (rises) from the non-action position to the action position, the tips of the first action part 3586f, the second action part 3586i, and the third action part 3586k of the action lever 3586, respectively. (Upper end) is the receiving boss 3521b of the first opening / closing arm 3521 in the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the receiving boss 3541b of the second opening / closing arm 3541 in the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body. The lower end of the third opening / closing arm 3651 in the unit 3550 is contacted from below, respectively, and the first opening / closing arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3651 are moved upward, respectively. Therefore, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back upper first decorative unit 3510 and the second left movable decorative lens 3530 of the back upper second decorative unit 3530 which were in the closed position. The 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back upper third decorative unit 3550 move outward in the left-right direction so as to be separated from each other. Then, it is in the open position (see FIG. 192).

As a result, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 and the first left movable decoration facing from between the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 so as to vertically traverse the left and right centers in the game area 5a. The first fixed decorative lens 3513 facing between the lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, and the second fixed decorative lens facing between the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532. The 3533 and the back front lower center lens 3131 of the back front decoration unit 3100 are arranged in a straight line from top to bottom, which can give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the player's attention. Can be attached.

Then, in this state, the LEDs mounted on the back upper third decorative substrate 3554, the back upper first decorative substrate 3514, the back upper second decorative substrate 3534, and the back front lower decorative substrate 3134 are appropriately made to emit light. By sequentially illuminating the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the back front lower center lens 3131, the player's line of sight is guided upward or downward. Can entertain the player. The third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the back front lower center lens 3131 are formed to have substantially the same width as the door frame side effect display device 460 in the effect operation unit 400. Therefore, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the back front lower center lens 3131, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are used to center the pachinko machine 1 in the left-right direction. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect that traverses the lens (see FIG. 196).

As an effect using the under-back movable effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000, for example, when the under-back movable decorative unit 3710 is moved to the first elevating position by the under-back drive motor 3754 from the normal state, the under-back decorative body The main body 3711 is located above the stage 2530 in the center accessory 2500 and can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500. As a result, the lower back decorative body 3711 can be seen, which can strongly attract the interest of the player (see FIG. 193). In this first elevating position, the plurality of gates of the lower back decorative body 3711 are closed by the plurality of lower back door members 3712.

Then, when the lower back movable decorative unit 3710 slightly rises from the first elevating position to the second elevating position, the plurality of lower back door members 3712 hinge and rotate to open the plurality of gates of the lower back decorative main body 3711. (See FIG. 194). By opening the gate (back lower door member 3712), it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game. Then, in this state, if the LED of the backside decorative substrate 3719 is made to emit light to decorate the opened gate with light emission, the player can be convinced of the arrival of an opportunity, and the interest of the player can be further enhanced. Can be done.

As described above, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back right movable production unit 3400, the back upper movable production unit 3500, and the back bottom It is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the movable effect unit 3700, etc., and the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

[5-11. Different embodiments in the game board]
Next, an embodiment different from the above in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 195. FIG. 195 shows an example in which, as another embodiment of the game board, the back upper movable production unit of the back unit is provided with an LED for illuminating the stage of the center accessory and the back front lower center lens of the back front decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows. In the embodiment of FIG. 195, the back-up second decorative substrate 3534 of the back-up second decorative unit 3530 in the back-up movable effect unit 3500 is provided with a plurality of lower LEDs 3534a capable of irradiating light downward. is there.

As a result, by rotating the back-up rotation base unit 3570 to the vertical position, the lower end of the back-up second decorative unit 3530 becomes the center of the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 (near the chance entrance 2535) and the back front decoration. The upper end of the back front lower center lens 3131 of the unit 3100 is in a state of being close to the upper end, and by emitting light of the lower LED 3534a in this state, the center of the stage 2530 and the upper part of the back front lower center lens 3131 can be light-emitting and decorated. .. Therefore, even in a portion where the decorative substrate provided with the LED cannot be arranged at the rear, light can be supplied from the outside (here, the upper side) to illuminate the light, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It is possible to produce light emission.

[5-12. Directed by the door frame and the game board]
Next, the effect using the door frame 3 and the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 196 to 198. FIG. 196 shows the back-up movable production unit in the back unit of the game board, in which the back-up rotation base unit is in the vertical position, and the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable of the back-up first decorative body unit. The decorative lens, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative body unit, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back upper third decorative body unit, respectively. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which shows the 1st fixed decorative lens, the 2nd fixed decorative lens, and the 3rd fixed decorative lens in the open position in a visible state. FIG. 197 shows a state in which the third effect operation unit 400B is attached to the plate unit 320 in place of the effect operation unit 400 so that the first decorative surface portion of the decorative rotating body unit faces forward and the game board is in a normal state. It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown. In FIG. 198, with the second decorative surface portion of the decorative rotating body unit facing forward in FIG. 197, the back-up rotating base unit is positioned vertically in the back-up movable effect unit in the back unit of the game board. The first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative body unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative unit, and the state. With the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the third decorative body unit on the back in the open position, respectively, the first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens are used. It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown in a state where it can be seen.

First, the pachinko machine 1 in which the effect operation unit 400 provided with the door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described. As an effect by the door frame 3 and the game board 5, for example, there is an effect using the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 and the back-up movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5. Specifically, in the back-up movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is vertically positioned while the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600 is moved to the descending position. By rotating the action lever 3586 from the non-action position to the action position, the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative unit, and the back upper second decorative unit The second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back upper third decorative body unit are each in the open position.

In this state, as shown in FIG. 196, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the back are formed in substantially the same width at the center in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1. The front lower center lens 3131 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are arranged side by side from top to bottom, which can surprise the player and give a strong impact. Then, in this state, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 and the first fixed decoration are formed by the back upper third decorative substrate 3554, the back upper first decorative substrate 3514, the back upper second decorative substrate 3534, and the back front lower decorative substrate 3134. By sequentially illuminating the lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the back front lower center lens 3131 from the top, the player's line of sight can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3. The effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 can be enjoyed, and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 can be operated to surely enjoy the player participation type effect. You can do it.

In addition, with respect to the above-described embodiment, a second effect operation unit 400A provided with a door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached to the dish unit 320 in place of the above effect operation unit 400, and the door frame side first. (2) The same effect as described above may be performed with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 in the effect display device 460A facing forward. Also by this, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Subsequently, the pachinko machine 1 in which the third effect operation unit 400B provided with the decorative rotating body unit 530 is attached to the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described. In this pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 197, in a normal state, in the third effect operation unit 400B attached to the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, the rear side is passed through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. The first decorative surface portion 532 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 arranged (inside) is visible from the player side (front). The first decorative surface portion 532 that is rotatable around the second axis CL2 that is orthogonal to the horizontally extending first axis CL1 has the logo decoration portion 532a having a central direction in the correct orientation.

Further, above the third effect operation unit 400B (dish unit 320), in the game area 5a of the game board 5 which can be seen through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3, the rear side of the back unit 3000 is passed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. The display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the player can be satisfactorily visually recognized from the player side (front). In the back middle movable production unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, the left and right back middle left decorative bodies 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 are in the state of the most separated retracted positions from each other, and pass through the frame of the center accessory 2500. A part is slightly visible. The back left decorative body 3310 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is in a retracted position behind the back front left decoration unit 3120 of the back front decoration unit 3100, and is almost invisible from the front. The back right decorative body 3410 of the back right movable effect unit 3400 is in the retracted position, and a part of the back right decorative body 3410 is visible through the frame on the right side side of the center accessory 2500.

Further, in the back-up movable production unit 3500, the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600 is in the raised position, and the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is in the horizontal position. With the one decorative unit 3510 in the center, the back upper second decorative unit 3530 is arranged on the right side, and the back upper third decorative unit 3550 is arranged on the left side. The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 of the back upper second decorative unit 3530, The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back upper third decorative unit 3550 are in a closed position in contact with each other, and each of them is decorated with a predetermined character (a predetermined character decoration ( The illustration is omitted). Therefore, in the upper part of the frame of the center accessory 2500, a predetermined logo in which three characters are arranged side by side is visible from the player side (front).

From the state of FIG. 197, for example, in the back-up movable effect unit 3500, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotated to the vertical position while the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600 is moved to the descending position. By moving the action lever 3586 from the non-action position to the action position, the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative body unit, and the second left movable of the back upper second decorative unit unit. The decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the third decorative body unit on the back are in the open position, respectively.

In this state, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the back front lower center lens 3131 formed in substantially the same width at the center in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1. , It will be lined up from top to bottom, which can surprise the player and give a strong impact. In this state, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 and the first fixed decorative lens 3513 are formed by the back upper third decorative substrate 3554, the back upper first decorative substrate 3514, the back upper second decorative substrate 3534, and the back front lower decorative substrate 3134. By sequentially illuminating the second fixed decorative lens 3533 and the back front lower center lens 3131 from the top, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third effect operation unit 400B in the door frame 3. Then, when the light emitting decoration from above reaches the third effect operation unit 400B, the decorative rotating body unit 530 in the operation button 410 is light-emitting decorated by the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536. At the same time, the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 rotates the decorative rotating body unit 530 with the first decorative surface portion 532 facing forward by 180 degrees around the horizontally extending first axis CL1 to rotate the second decorative surface portion 532. The 533 is oriented forward (see FIG. 198). As a result, the first decorative surface portion 532 that can be seen through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 at the tip of the player's line of sight guided from the game area 5a to the lower third effect operation unit 400B has a different decoration. Since it changes to the second decorative surface portion 533, it is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance to the player, raise the expectation for the game, and prompt the operation of the operation button 410 of the third production operation unit 400B. By operating the operation button 410, it is possible to entertain the player-participatory production and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

As described above, it is desirable that the effect produced by the decorative rotating body unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B is performed when the light emitting decoration reaches the third effect operation unit 400B from above in the game area 5a. , The continuous production can be entertained by the player. The effect of the decorative rotating body unit 530 is described in the above [3-4h-7. The effect described in [Movable effect in the third effect operation unit] may be executed.

Further, as an effect different from the above, for example, from the state of FIG. 197, the decorative rotating body unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B is rotated 180 degrees around the horizontally extending first axis CL1 to perform the second decoration. The surface portion 533 is in a state of facing forward. In this state, the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 are used to illuminate the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533, and the player is interested in the third effect operation below the game area 5a. Attract to unit 400B. After that, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated around the first axis CL so that the second decorative surface portion 533 facing forward moves upward, and the first decorative surface portion 532 on the opposite side of the second decorative surface portion 533 is moved. , Move it so that it appears from the bottom to the top. By switching between the second decorative surface portion 533 and the first decorative surface portion 532, the line of sight of the player can be guided above the third effect operation unit 400B (inside the game area 5a).

Subsequently, with the movable side unit 3610 of the back-up elevating unit 3600 in the back-up movable production unit 3500 moved to the descending position, the back-up rotation base unit 3570 is rotated to the vertical position, and the action lever 3586 is not released. Moving from the working position to the working position, the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right of the back upper second decorative unit The movable decorative lens and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the third decorative body unit on the back are moved to the open positions, respectively, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, and the first (Ii) The fixed decorative lens 3533 and the back front lower center lens 3131 are arranged one above the other. Then, by illuminating and decorating them in order from the bottom, it is possible to make it appear that the effect started from the third effect operation unit 400B has moved above the third effect operation unit 400B, which makes the person feel the momentum of climbing. It is possible to show the player a possible effect, and it is possible to raise the mood of the player and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game. The effect starting from the third effect operation unit 400B may be started when the player presses the operation button 410 at a predetermined timing at the time of executing the player participation type effect.

In this way, various effects can be shown to the player, and the various effects make it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, the player can be entertained, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. It can be suppressed.

[6. Game content]
Next, the content of the game by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 135 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is generated by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. , The game is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The striking strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and the more the handle 302 is rotated, the stronger the striking force can be. , You can hit the game ball at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball becomes an obstacle nail. By abutting, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). It will flow down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530.

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward. When the game ball enters the chance entrance 2535 in the center of the stage 2530 and is released from the chance exit 2536 into the game area 5a, the chance exit 2536 is located directly above the first starting port 2002, so there is a high probability. It is accepted by the first starting port 2002. When the game balls are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game balls released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a are opened in the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400, and the attacker unit 2400. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the first grand prize opening 2005 etc. of the state.

By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf portion 2301 of the side slope 2300, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 or , The first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, etc. may be accepted. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

On the other hand, when the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed strike), It is discharged from the right guide passage 2540 of the center accessory 2500 to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400. Immediately below the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540, a gate passage 2420 provided with a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 in the attacker unit 2400 is arranged, and a game ball enters the gate passage 2420 with a high probability. To do.

Then, when the right-handed game ball enters the gate passage 2420 and passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the second The second starting port door 2411 that closes the starting port 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. To.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by passing the game ball through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time. The shorter the normal fluctuation time, the more the game ball drawn by the "normal hit" at the gate portion 2003 will be accepted by the second starting port 2004.

If the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the result of the normal lottery is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started, so that the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game balls are received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", "big hit", " A lottery of special lottery results that generate "medium hits", "small hits", "probability fluctuation hits", "time reduction hits", etc.) is performed. Then, the lottery special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn by accepting the game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include "loss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", and "5R big hit". "15R jackpot", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit", "probability change time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction no hit", "second jackpot (for example, per accessory)", etc. is there.

When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is a special lottery result that causes an advantageous gaming state. After the lapse of the special fluctuation time, the first big winning opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the first prize opening 2005 when the first prize opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is received from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. ) Is paid out to the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the first prize opening 2005 allows the game balls to be accepted, by having the first prize opening 2005 accept the game balls, a large number of game balls can be paid out, and the player can be entertained. Can be done.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", the first big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern of closing is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed or the first big prize has been won after the first big prize opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted. When any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls to the mouth 2005 is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern that makes the game balls unacceptable in a closed state (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round). ) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, "2R jackpot" is repeated for 2 rounds, "5R jackpot" is for 5 rounds, and "15R jackpot" is for 15 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn is changed ("probability change hit"), or the display time of the production image suggesting the special lottery result is changed. ("Time saving hit") There is a "hit".

In addition, when the special lottery result is "second big hit (for example, per accessory)", the second big winning opening 2006 has passed a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 3.0 seconds). Alternatively, the game is opened until any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, only one) of game balls is satisfied. If the game balls are accepted into the second prize opening 2006 when the second prize opening 2006 is open, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out. Then, when the game ball received in the second prize opening 2006 is distributed to the first entrance 2431 by the distribution piece 2433, the first prize opening 2005 opens and closes as a "5R jackpot", and the distribution piece 2433 When the game is distributed to the second entrance 2432, the first prize opening 2005 opens and closes as a "15R jackpot".

In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 are between the start of the special lottery and the suggestion of the lottery special lottery result by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. (Ii) When the game ball is accepted in the starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. To. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is made by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the special lottery result is suggested as the effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each symbol sequence in a state where three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. The existing symbol rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each of the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed so that the symbols correspond to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) occurs according to the result of the special lottery drawn.

The time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the game board side effect display device 1600 (the symbol sequence fluctuates). It is different from the time until the confirmed image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 is displayed according to the lottery special lottery result. Operation button 410, door frame side effect display device 460, back front decoration unit 3100 of back unit 3000, back middle movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect unit 3300, back right movable effect unit 3400, back upper movable effect unit 3500 , And the lower back movable effect unit 3700, etc. can be used as appropriate to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc., and various effects can also entertain the player. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

[7. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B in the present embodiment is used as the operation receiving unit of the present invention, and the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 of the third base unit 520 in the present embodiment is used as the first rotation means of the present invention. The rotating body base unit 531 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 in the present embodiment is attached to the rotating body of the present invention, and the peripheral surface decorative portion 531f of the rotating body base unit 531 in the present embodiment is attached to the connecting decorative portion of the present invention. The first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 in the embodiment are used in the decorative surface portion of the present invention, the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 in the present embodiment is used in the second rotating means of the present invention, and the first decoration in the present embodiment is used. The surface decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface decorative substrate 536 correspond to the decorative surface light emitting means of the present invention, and the peripheral decorative surface decorative substrate (not shown) in the present embodiment corresponds to the connecting decorative portion light emitting means of the present invention, respectively. ..

[8. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 532 and the second are passed through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B. Of the two decorative surface portions 533, the first decorative surface portion 532 is visible, and the decoration of the first decorative surface portion 532 improves the appearance of the operation button 410. The first decorative surface portion 532 that can be seen through the operation button 410 is a rotating body that is rotatably supported around the first axis CL1 extending horizontally parallel to the surface of the operation button 410 (the surface orthogonal to the central axis CL). The base unit 531 is arranged in a row with an interval in the circumferential direction about the first axis CL1. In this state, when the rotating body base unit 531 is rotated around the first axis CL1 by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528, the first decorative surface portion 532 located directly behind the operation button 410 becomes the operation button 410. Along with moving from the position directly behind, the next second decorative surface portion 533 arranged in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction moves directly behind the operation button 410. Therefore, when the rotating body base unit 531 is rotated around the first axis CL1 by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528, the first decorative surface portion 532 that can be seen through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 is changed to another second decorative surface portion. It can be switched to 533, and the decoration visible through the operation button 410 can be changed.

When the rotating body base unit 531 is rotated around the first axis CL1 to switch the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 that can be seen through the operation button 410, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decoration are spaced apart. Since the peripheral surface decorative portion 531f of the rotating body base unit 531 is arranged between the surface portions 533, the operation button 410 is used to decorate the space between the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533. It is possible to prevent deterioration of the appearance inside, and it is possible to improve the appearance inside the operation button 410. Then, in the second decorative surface portion 533 or the first decorative surface portion 532 that has moved directly behind the operation button 410 due to the rotation of the rotating body base unit 531 around the first axis CL1 by the first drive motor 528 of the effect operation unit, the second The axis CL2 is in a state of extending perpendicularly to the surface of the operation button 410. In this state, when the second decorative surface portion 533 or the first decorative surface portion 532 that is visible through the operation button 410 is rotated by the second drive motor 534 of the effect operation unit, the second decorative surface portion 533 or the first decorative surface portion 532 is rotated. It rotates around while being visible through the operation button 410, and the player can be shown the second decorative surface portion 533 or the first decorative surface portion 532 that rotates around behind the operation button 410.

Alternatively, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are kept rotated around the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534, respectively, and the rotating body is rotated by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528. When the base unit 531 is rotated around the first axis CL1 and the space between the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 is moved to a position visible from the player side through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. , The rotating first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 and the non-rotating peripheral surface decorative portion 531f can be shown at the same time.

In this way, by rotating the rotating body base unit 531 around the first axis CL1 by the first drive motor 528 of the effect operation unit, it is possible to show the decoration that changes to a different decoration through the operation button 410, and the effect operation unit. By rotating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis CL2 by the second drive motor 534, it is possible to show the decoration that rotates round and round through the operation button 410, and the effect operation unit No. 1 The second drive motor 534 rotates the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis CL2, while the effect operation unit first drive motor 528 rotates the rotating body base unit 531 around the first axis CL1. As a result, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 rotating through the operation button 410 and the non-rotating peripheral surface decorative portion 531f can be shown at the same time, so that various decorations can be played with the operation button 410. It is possible to show it to a person, enhance the decorativeness of the operation button 410 operated by the player, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, when the rotating body base unit 531 is rotated around the first axis CL1 by the first drive motor 528 of the effect operation unit, the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 that was initially visible moves in the rotation direction. Since the next second decorative surface portion 533 or the first decorative surface portion 532 can be seen (appears) after the peripheral surface decorative portion 531f is visible, the peripheral surface decorative portion 531f makes the next second decorative surface portion 533 or the first decorative surface portion 533 or the first. Since the appearance of the decorative surface portion 532 can be delayed and paused, the player is given time to imagine what kind of decoration the next second decorative surface portion 533 or the first decorative surface portion 532 is. It is possible to raise the expectation of the player and suppress the decline in interest depending on whether or not the next second decorative surface portion 533 or the first decorative surface portion 532 is the desired decoration imagined.

Further, when the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2 by the second drive motor 534 of the effect operation unit, the player decorates the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533. Since it is difficult to clearly recognize the effect, for example, the effect operation unit No. 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the second axis CL2 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534. Assuming that the rotating body base unit 531 is rotated around the first axis CL1 by the one-drive motor 528 and the peripheral surface decoration portion 531f is positioned immediately after the operation button 410, the movement due to the rotation around the second axis CL2 is caused. Since the decoration of the stationary peripheral surface decorative portion 531f can be clearly seen between the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 where the decoration looks indistinct, the player's interest is on the peripheral surface. It can be strongly attracted to the decorative portion 531f, and the player's attention can be directed to the operation button 410. After that, the rotating body base unit 531 is rotated in a predetermined direction around the first axis CL1 by the first drive motor 528 of the effect operation unit, and either the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 is operated by the operation button. When the rotation around the second axis CL2 by the second drive motor 534 of the effect operation unit is stopped after being positioned immediately after the 410, the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decoration is passed through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. It is possible to show the player the effect that the face portion 533 can be seen. As a result, by locating the peripheral surface decoration portion 531f immediately after the operation button 410, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation button 410, and the first moving on both sides of the peripheral surface decoration portion 531f. Depending on which of the decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 moves immediately after the operation button 410 to make the decoration clearly visible, it is possible to excite and raise expectations. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are arranged in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction, and the peripheral surface decorative portion is provided between the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533. Since the 531f is arranged, the peripheral surface decorative portion 531f can clearly partition the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 that are adjacent to each other. Therefore, when the rotating body base unit 531 is rotated around the first axis CL1 by the first drive motor 528 of the effect operation unit and the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 visible through the operation button 410 is switched, the process is in the middle. By seeing the peripheral decorative surface portion 531f, the player can clearly recognize that the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 has been switched, and the change in the decoration on the operation button 410 can be reliably recognized. It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the rotating body base unit 531 that rotates around the first axis CL1 is provided with two of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 and the peripheral surface decorative portion 531f, the peripheral surface decorative portion 531f produces an effect. Since the operation unit first drive motor 528 rotates around the first axis CL1 together with the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the first axis CL1. Regardless of the rotation position, the position of the peripheral decorative surface portion 531f visible between the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 does not change, and the same portion (decoration) can always be shown. Therefore, the decoration of the peripheral surface decoration portion 531f can be easily understood by the player, and the decoration effect of the peripheral surface decoration portion 531f can be surely exhibited.

Further, by providing the peripheral decoration portion decorative substrate in the rotating body base unit 531, the peripheral surface decoration portion 531f can be light-emittingly decorated. Therefore, the rotating body base unit 531 is set by the first drive motor 528 of the effect operation unit. The peripheral decorative portion 531f arranged between the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 by rotating around the uniaxial line CL1 can be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. If the peripheral decoration portion 531f is light-emitting decorated when it is moved to the position, the peripheral decoration portion 531f can be made to look more beautiful, and the decoration effect of the peripheral decoration portion 531f can be surely exhibited. Further, by making the peripheral decoration portion 531f light-emitting decoration, the peripheral decoration portion 531f can be made to stand out in the operation button 410, so that the player's attention can be directed to the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 can be made to stand out. Participation in the player participation type production can be promoted, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, when the peripheral surface decorative portion 531f is light-emitting decorated with the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 positioned immediately after the operation button 410, the outer periphery of the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 is formed. Since the outside is bright, the player can be made to pay attention to the inside of the operation button 410, and at the same time, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good for the game, which raises the expectation for the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. In this state, since the peripheral decoration portion 531f that cannot be seen through the operation button 410 is light-emittingly decorated, an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous when the peripheral decoration portion 531f becomes visible (for example, " Since it can be thought that it means the arrival of a chance that a big hit game ") will occur, the rotating body base unit 531 is operated so that it can be seen by rotating the rotating body base unit 531 around the first axis CL1 so that the peripheral surface decoration portion 531f that is light-emittingly decorated can be seen. Depending on whether or not it is located directly behind the button 410, the player can be excited and thrilled, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the game board 5 in which the game using the game ball is performed through the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3. The game area 5a can be seen, the operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320 can be seen under the through hole 111, and the two second hands through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. One of the one decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be seen, and the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 that can be seen through the operation button 410 improves the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 as a whole. In this state, when the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated around the horizontally extending first axis CL1 by the production operation unit first drive motor 528 of the third base unit 520, it can be seen through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. The first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 can be switched to the second decorative surface portion 533 or the first decorative surface portion 532, and the decoration visible through the operation button 410 can be changed. On the other hand, the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 that is visible through the operation button 410 is orthogonal to the first axis CL1 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534, and the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 When it is rotated around the second axis CL2 passing through the center, the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 is rotated around while being visible through the operation button 410, and the operation button is given to the player. The first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 that rotates around the rear side of the 410 can be shown. Then, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be light-emitting decorated by the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536.

In this way, on the lower side of the through hole 111 (game area 5a), the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 visible through the operation button 410 can be changed, and the first decorative surface portion visible through the operation button 410 can be changed. Since the 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 can be rotated round and round, and the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be light-emitting decorated, various decorations can be shown to the player with the operation button 410. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B arranged below the game area 5a. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to participate in the player participation type production in which the operation button 410 is operated, and it is possible to entertain the player in the player participation type production and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, in a normal state, in the game area 5a that can be seen through the through hole 111 on the upper side of the operation button 410, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the second fixed decorative lens 3533 in the back movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 Since the third fixed decorative lens 3553 is located at the first effect position in the frame of the center accessory 2500, which is near the edge in the (front view) game area 5a, the first fixed decorative lens 3513 , The second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 are relatively inconspicuous, and the game in the game area 5a is relatively conspicuous so that the player can enjoy the game. Then, when the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 are moved to the second effect position by the back-up rotation base unit 3570 and the back-up elevating unit 3600, the first fixed decoration is performed. The lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 are arranged one above the other so as to be continuous on the upper side of the back front lower center lens 3131 of the back front decoration unit 3100. The decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the back front lower center lens 3131, and the operation button 410 are arranged in a straight line up and down to strongly attract the interest of the player. Can be done. In this state, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the back front lower center lens 3131, and the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 that can be seen through the operation button 410. Can be light-emitting and decorated so as to vertically traverse the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (game area 5a) on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1, which can give an impact to the player. At the same time, it is possible to raise the expectation that there may be something good for the player, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Therefore, from the normal state, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the back front lower center lens 3131, and the operation button 410 are arranged in a straight line vertically. The first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 (decorative rotating body unit) that can be seen through the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the back front lower center lens 3131, and the operation button 410. When the light emitting decoration is performed in the order of 530), the player's line of sight can be guided to the operation button 410 on the lower side of the back front lower center lens 3131 to draw attention to the operation button 410, and then the decorative rotating body unit 530 is placed. By rotating the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 around the second axis CL2, it is possible to reliably show the effect of these, so that the player can see the effect. It is possible to make people think that there is something good, to raise expectations for the game, and to encourage the operation of the operation button 410 in the player participation type production, which is a player participation type. It is possible to entertain the production and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the second decorative surface portion 533 of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 is provided with the rotary decorative portion 533a and the fixed decorative portion 533b, the second decorative surface portion 533 is used as the second decorative surface portion 533. When rotated by the drive motor 534, only the rotating decorative portion 533a rotates and the fixed decorative portion 533b does not rotate, so that an impression different from that of the first decorative surface portion 532, which rotates as a whole, can be given, and a more diverse effect can be produced. It can be shown to the player and entertained. Further, as described above, the second decorative surface portion 533 provided with the rotating decorative portion 533a and the fixed decorative portion 533b can give an impression different from that of the first decorative surface portion 532 that rotates as a whole, and thus the second decoration. It is possible to give a premium feeling to the face portion 533, and when the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated by the production operation unit first drive motor 528, does the second decorative surface portion 533 stop directly behind the operation button 410? Depending on whether or not the player is excited, the player can be excited and excited, and the player's expectation can be raised and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since all the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotated around the respective second axis CL2 by one effect operation unit second drive motor 534, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the first decorative surface portion 532 Compared with the case where an actuator (drive motor) is provided for each of the second decorative surface portion 533, only one space is required for providing the drive motor, and the operation button 410, the first decorative surface portion 532, and the first decorative surface portion 532 are relatively required. The space for arranging the second decorative surface portion 533 (decorative rotating body unit 530) or other members can be widened, and the operation buttons 410, the decorative rotating body unit 530, etc. can be made larger and more conspicuous. Can be done.

Further, when the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated by the first drive motor 528 of the effect operation unit, the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 visible through the operation button 410 moves in the vertical direction to move the second decorative surface portion 533. Alternatively, since it appears to be switched to the first decorative surface portion 532, it is possible to show the player an effect in which the switching second decorative surface portion 533 or the first decorative surface portion 533 appears from above or below. .. Therefore, for example, with the first decorative surface portion 532 facing forward, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the back front lower center lens 3131, and the operation button 410 are pressed. After illuminating the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the back front lower center lens 3131 in this order from the top in a straight line up and down, the second decoration When the surface portion 533 appears from above and is switched, the second decorative surface portion 533 has a third fixed decorative lens 3553, a first fixed decorative lens 3513, and a second fixed decorative lens in the upper game area 5a. Since it looks like it came down from above through the 3533 and the back front lower center lens 3131, it gives the player the impression that a revelation is given from above, and something good is possible. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game by making it think that there is, and it is possible to draw attention to the operation button 410, and it is possible to encourage the operation of the operation button 410 in the player participation type production, and the player. It is possible to entertain the participatory production and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest. Alternatively, with the second decorative surface portion 533 facing forward, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated so that the first decorative surface portion 532 appears from below and is switched, and then the first decorative surface portion 532 is placed on the upper side of the operation button 410. Three fixed decorative lenses 3553, first fixed decorative lens 3513, second fixed decorative lens 3533, and back front lower center lens 3131 are arranged vertically in a straight line (may be in a state of being arranged vertically in advance), and the back front lower center lens. When 3131, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 are light-emitting-decorated in this order, the first decorative surface portion 532 that rises from the bottom is in the upper game area 5a. Since it seems to go up along the back front lower center lens 3131, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the ascending momentum is high for the player. It is possible to give such an impression, to make the player think that an opportunity has arrived, and to suppress the decline in interest in the game, and at the same time, the player's interest can be from the operation button 410 on the lower side of the game area 5a to the inside of the game area 5a. It can be directed to the lens, and the subsequent game and production in the game area 5a can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the surface of the operation button 410 is hemispherically bulged outward in three dimensions, the space behind the operation button 410 (the space inside the button AS) can be widened. Therefore, when the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated around the horizontally extending first axis CL on the rear side of the operation button 410, the surface of the decorative rotating body unit 530 (the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 and the first decoration). The surface portion 532, the second decorative surface portion 533, etc.) can be made difficult to come into contact with the inner surface of the operation button 410, and the decorative rotating body unit 530 can be rotated satisfactorily. Further, since the space behind the operation button 410 (space inside the button AS) can be widened, the decorative rotating body unit 530 (first decorative surface portion 532 and second decorative surface portion 533) can be made larger. Therefore, the large first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be made more noticeable from the player side, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533. it can.

Further, a state in which rotation by the first drive motor 528 of the effect operation unit and the second drive motor 534 of the effect operation unit 534 is stopped, the decorative rotating body unit 530, the first decorative surface portion 532, and the second decorative surface portion 533 are rotating, and the like. Since the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be light-emitting decorated by the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 are designated. By luminescent decoration, the decorativeness of the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 can be further enhanced, the appearance of the game can be improved, and the appealing power to the player can be enhanced. Further, the first decorative surface portion 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 make the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 stand out, and the player's interest is drawn to the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533. Since it can be directed to the operation button 410 where the player can see, it is possible to encourage participation in the player participation type production that operates the operation button 410, and it is possible to entertain the player participation type production and suppress the decline in interest. it can.

Further, since the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 is provided in the decorative rotating body unit 530, it is compared with the case where the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 is provided at a position different from that of the decorative rotating body unit 530. Then, a mechanism for transmitting the rotation from the second drive motor 534 of the effect operation unit to the shaft member 532d extending coaxially with the second axis CL to rotate the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533. Can be simplified. Further, since it is not necessary to secure a space for arranging the effect operation unit second drive motor 534 on the outside of the decorative rotating body unit 530, the operation button 410 is surely arranged on the outside of the decorative rotating body unit 530 accordingly. Or other decorative members can be arranged, and it is possible to facilitate the realization of the pachinko machine 1 that surely achieves the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, as described above, under normal conditions, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, and the second fixed decorative lens 3533 are the upper portions in the frame of the center accessory 250, which is the first effect position. The third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, and the second fixed decorative lens 3533 move to the player because the lens is located at the lower front and lower center lens 3131. , The third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the back front lower center lens 3131, and the operation button 410 can be made difficult to imagine in a straight line. The rotation base unit 3570 and the back-up elevating unit 3600 move the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, and the second fixed decorative lens 3533 to the second effect position, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553, The unexpectedness that the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the back front lower center lens 3131, and the operation button 410 are aligned in a straight line can greatly surprise the player and surprise the player. It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the back front lower center lens 3131, and the first decorative surface portion 532 or the second decorative surface portion 533 on the rear side of the operation button 410 The third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, and the second fixed decorative lens 3533 are moved to the second production position and arranged in a straight line vertically. When each is luminescent and decorated, a single band of light that traverses the pachinko machine 1 can be shown, which can strongly attract the attention of the player and one even if it is away from the pachinko machine 1. Since the band of light is conspicuous, it is possible to make it easier for other players to notice, so it is possible to make it easier to select this pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play, and it is possible to appeal to the player. It can be a high pachinko machine 1.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine can be used. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the third effect operation unit 400B, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is provided with the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 in the circumferential direction with respect to the circumference of the first axis CL. Although the ones arranged in a row are shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more may be arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, such as the third decorative surface portion and the fourth decorative surface portion.

Further, in the above embodiment, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is shown to be rotatable only in an angle range of 180 degrees with respect to the circumference of the first axis CL, but it can be rotated within an angle range of up to 360 degrees. It may be possible, or it may be made infinitely rotatable.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first axis CL, which is the rotation axis of the decorative rotating body unit 530, is shown to extend horizontally, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is used. It may extend vertically so as to be orthogonal to each other.

Further, in the above embodiment, as the peripheral surface decorative portion 531f provided in the rotating body base unit 531 of the decorative rotating body unit 530, a decorative one penetrating the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body base unit 531 is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a three-dimensional decoration or a two-dimensional decoration such as a sticker or printing may be used.

In addition, this application also intends to solve the problem in the prior art example (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-169251).

A game machine such as a pachinko machine can accept a game area in which a game medium is driven by a player's operation, a plurality of obstacle nails planted in the game area, and a game medium in the game area. It is equipped with entrances (general winning openings, starting openings, variable winning openings (variable starting openings, large winning openings, accessory winning openings), V winning openings, etc.), and game media can be accepted at the entrance. Then, the player can be entertained by giving a privilege (such as paying out the game medium and opening / closing the variable winning opening to the player in an advantageous gaming state, etc.).

In the conventional gaming machine, an operation unit having an operation receiving unit that can be operated by the player is provided at a position below the gaming area, and when the player participation type production is executed, the operation receiving unit is received by the player. It has been proposed that by operating the club, it is possible to participate in the production and entertain.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, since the operation receiving part of the operation part only emits light by the LED provided inside, the decorativeness is poor, and some players get tired of decorating the operation receiving part at an early stage. As a result, the interest in the operation receiving unit is diminished, and it is not possible to fully enjoy the player-participation-type production in which the operation receiving unit is operated, and there is a problem that the player's interest in the game is lowered.

Therefore, in view of the above circumstances, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in a game by enhancing the decorativeness of an operation receiving portion operated by the player. The following are listed as typical examples.

Means 1: In a gaming machine
"The operation receiving part that can be operated by a player with a transparent part,
Each is rotatable around a second axis orthogonal to the first axis extending parallel to the surface of the operation receiving portion, and in the circumferential direction around the first axis on the rear side of the operation receiving portion. There are multiple decorative surfaces that are lined up at intervals, each with a different decoration.
A connecting decorative portion that is arranged so as to connect between the plurality of decorative surface portions and has a predetermined decoration formed on the outer surface, and a connecting decorative portion.
A first rotating means for rotating a plurality of the decorative surface portions around the first axis so that the decorative surface portions that can be visually recognized through the transparent portion of the operation receiving portion are changed.
It is provided with a second rotating means for rotating the decorative surface portion around the second axis. "

Here, the "operation receiving unit" is a portion that the player directly touches in the operation unit (directing operation unit) operated by the player, and is "a device that the player presses and operates" and "a touch operation by the player". "Things", "Things that the player rotates and operates", and the like. Further, examples of the surface shape of the "operation receiving portion" include "three-dimensional shape bulging outward", "planar shape", and the like, and examples of the outer peripheral shape include "circular shape", "elliptical shape", and "oval shape". Examples include "polygonal shape", "indefinite shape such as heart shape and clover shape", and the like. Further, the "surface of the operation receiving portion" is "a surface formed by the outer peripheral edge of the operation receiving portion", and "when the operation receiving portion is moved by the operation of the player, it is relative to the moving direction of the operation receiving portion". And orthogonal planes ”, etc.

In addition, as the decoration of the "decorative surface", "decoration imitating an item in line with the concept of the gaming machine", "decoration imitating a pattern or pattern in line with the concept of the gaming machine", "decoration imitating the concept of the gaming machine" "Decoration imitating a logo", "Decoration imitating a character in line with the concept of a gaming machine", and the like. Further, as the "decorative surface portion", "the whole rotates when viewed from the direction in which the second axis extends" and "rotates around the second axis when viewed from the direction in which the second axis extends". A rotating decorative portion that does not rotate around the second axis, and a fixed decorative portion that does not rotate around the second axis. " In addition, examples of the outer shape formed by the plurality of decorative surface portions arranged in a row in the circumferential direction include "spherical", "cylindrical", and "polygonal columnar".

Further, the "connecting decorative portion" is a plurality of decorative surface portions arranged in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction, and connects the gaps between the decorative surface portions at least when viewed through the transparent portion of the operation receiving portion. Anything that looks like it is (filled) may be arranged on the same surface as the decorative surface portion, or may be arranged on a surface different from the decorative surface portion. Further, as the "connecting decorative portion", "a rotating body that is rotatably supported around the first axis and has a plurality of decorative surface portions is provided (around the first axis together with the plurality of decorative surface portions". "Things that rotate around the first axis", "Things that are non-rotatably supported around the first axis", and the like. In addition, as the decoration of the "connecting decoration part", "decoration related to the decoration of two decorative surface parts adjacent to both sides", "decoration imitating a pattern or pattern in line with the concept of the gaming machine", "game" "Decoration that imitates items according to the concept of the machine", "Decoration that imitates the logo that follows the concept of the gaming machine", "Decoration that imitates the character that follows the concept of the gaming machine", etc. It may be a simple decoration, or it may be a flat decoration such as a sticker or printing.

Further, the "second axis" may be provided separately in each of the plurality of decorative surface portions, or in a certain decorative surface portion, another decorative surface portion exists on the opposite side with the first axis line in between. If so, those decorative surfaces may be rotatably supported by one second axis.

Further, as the "first rotating means" and the "second rotating means", "the one that transmits the rotation of the motor by a plurality of gears to rotate the rotating body" and "the advance and retreat of the solenoid and the piston are transmitted by the crank or the rack gear". "The one that rotates the rotating body by letting it rotate", and the like. Further, the "second rotating means" may be provided in the rotating body or may be provided in a position different from that of the rotating body. Further, as the "second rotating means", "one actuator rotates all the decorative surface parts", "one actuator rotates all the decorative surface parts at the same time", and "a plurality of decorative surface parts are independent of each other". "The one that rotates only the decorative surface portion that is located directly behind the operation receiving part", and the like. Further, examples of the "first rotating means" and the "second rotating means" include "a thing that rotates only within a predetermined angle range", "a thing that rotates infinitely with a round and round", and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 1, the game machine has an operation receiving portion that can be operated by a player having a transparent portion and a second axis that is orthogonal to the first axis that extends parallel to the surface of the operation receiving portion. In addition to being rotatable, there are multiple decorative surface parts that are arranged at intervals in the circumferential direction around the first axis on the rear side of the operation receiving part, and each has a different decoration. The decorative surface portion is arranged so as to connect between the plurality of decorative surface portions, and the connecting decorative portion in which a predetermined decoration is formed on the outer surface and the decorative surface portion that can be visually recognized through the transparent part of the operation receiving portion are changed. , A first rotating means for rotating a plurality of decorative surface portions around the first axis, and a second rotating means for rotating the decorative surface portions around the second axis.

As a result, when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, some of the plurality of decorative surface portions arranged around the first axis extending parallel to the surface of the operation receiving portion through the transparent portion of the operation receiving portion. One decorative surface portion is visible, and in this state, when a plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, the decorative surface portion located directly behind the operation receiving portion becomes the operation receiving portion. While moving from the position directly behind, the next decorative surface portions arranged in rows at intervals in the circumferential direction will move directly behind the operation receiving portion. Therefore, when a plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, the decorative surface portion visible through the transparent portion of the operation receiving portion can be switched to another decorative surface portion, and the decoration visible through the operation receiving portion can be switched. Can be changed. At this time, when the plurality of decorative surface portions rotate around the first axis and the decorative surface portions move to a position where they can be seen from the player side through the transparent portion of the operation receiving portion, the decorative surface portions are moved between the decorative surface portions. Since it is decorated by the connecting decoration portion, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the appearance inside the operation receiving portion and improve the appearance inside the operation receiving portion. Then, in the decorative surface portion that has moved directly behind the operation receiving portion due to rotation around the first axis by the first rotating means, the second axis extends perpendicularly to the surface of the operation receiving portion. .. In this state, when the decorative surface portion visible through the operation receiving portion is rotated by the second rotating means, the decorative surface portion is rotated around while being visible through the operation receiving portion, and the player is asked. The decorative surface part that rotates around can be shown on the rear side of the operation receiving part. Alternatively, while the plurality of decorative surface portions are each rotated around the second axis by the second rotating means, the plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, and the decorative surface portions are connected to each other. When the space moves to a position that can be seen from the player side through the transparent part of the operation receiving part, the rotating decorative surface part and the non-rotating connecting decorative part are shown at the same time through the transparent part of the operation receiving part. Can be done. In this way, by rotating the plurality of decorative surface portions around the first axis by the first rotating means, it is possible to show the decoration that changes to different decorations through the operation receiving portion, and the decorative surface portion is rotated by the second rotating means. By rotating around the two axes, it is possible to show the decoration that rotates around the operation receiving part, and while rotating the decorative surface part around the second axis by the second rotating means, a plurality of decorations are used by the first rotating means. By rotating the decorative surface portion around the first axis, it is possible to simultaneously show the decorative surface portion that is rotating through the operation receiving portion and the connecting decorative portion that is not rotating, so that the player can display various decorations on the operation receiving portion. It is possible to enhance the decorativeness of the operation receiving portion operated by the player, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, when a plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, the decorative surface portion that was initially visible moves in the rotation direction, and after the connecting decorative surface portion is visible, the next decorative surface portion is displayed. Since it is visible (appears), the connecting decorative portion can delay the appearance of the next decorative surface portion to allow a gap, so that the player is informed of what kind of decorative surface portion the next decorative surface portion is. It is possible to give time to imagine, and it is possible to raise the expectation of the player and suppress the decline in interest depending on whether or not the next decorative surface portion is the desired decorative surface portion imagined.

Further, if the decorative surface portion is rotated around the second axis by the second rotating means, it becomes difficult for the player to clearly recognize the decoration of the decorative surface portion. Therefore, for example, the decorative surface portion is rotated by the second rotating means. Assuming that a plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means while being rotated around the two axes so that the connecting decorative portion is positioned immediately after the operation receiving portion, the area around the second axis Since the decoration of the stationary connecting decoration part can be clearly seen between the two decorative surfaces whose decorations are indistinct due to the movement by rotation, the player's interest should be connected and strongly attracted to the decoration part. It is possible to direct the player's attention to the operation receiving part. After that, a plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated in a predetermined direction around the first axis by the first rotating means, a specific decorative surface portion is positioned immediately after the operation receiving portion, and then the second rotating means is used. When the rotation around the two axes is stopped, the player can see the effect that a specific decorative surface portion can be seen through the transparent portion of the operation receiving portion. As a result, by locating the connecting decorative portion immediately after the operation receiving portion, the player's interest can be attracted to the operating receiving portion, and any of the decorative surface portions moving on both sides of the connecting decorative portion can be used. Depending on whether or not the decorative surface of the face moves immediately after the operation receiving part and the decoration becomes clearly visible, it can be exciting and exciting to raise expectations, entertaining the player and reducing the interest. It can be suppressed.

Further, since a plurality of decorative surface portions are arranged in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction and a connecting decorative portion is arranged between the decorative surface portions, the two decorative surface portions adjacent to each other are separated by the connecting decorative surface portion. Can be clearly partitioned. Therefore, when a plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means and the decorative surface portions that can be seen through the operation receiving portion are switched, the connecting decorative surface portion can be seen in the middle, so that the decorative surface portion can be seen by the player. It is possible to clearly recognize that the switch has been made, and it is possible to surely enjoy the change in the decoration in the operation receiving portion and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the decoration visible through the operation receiving portion can be changed by switching the decorative surface portion by rotating around the first axis line by the first rotating means or by showing the connecting decorative portion, and by the second rotating means, the second axis line can be changed. Since it can be rotated around, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation receiving portion. Therefore, when the player participation type effect of operating the operation receiving unit is executed, the decoration visible through the operation receiving unit is changed to attract the player's interest to the operation receiving unit and promote the operation of the operation receiving unit. It is possible to ensure that the player participates in the player-participation-type production, and it is possible to entertain the player-participation-type production, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in a state where a plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means and the decorative surface portions are rotated around the second axis by the second rotating means, first of all, the first rotating means is used. When the rotation around one axis is stopped and the predetermined decorative surface portion is positioned directly behind the operation receiving portion, the decorative surface portion visible through the operation receiving portion is second even though the rotation around the first axis is stopped. Since it rotates around the axis, the decoration of the decorative surface cannot be clearly recognized. After that, when the rotation of the decorative surface by the second rotating means around the second axis is stopped, the operation receiving portion is used. The decoration of the visible decorative surface can be clearly recognized. As a result, the decoration was unrecognizable due to the rotation around the first axis and the second axis, but the rotation around the first axis and the rotation around the second axis are sequentially stopped, and the operation is received. Since it is possible to show the player an effect that the decoration that can be seen through the part can be gradually recognized, it is possible to enjoy the change of the decoration that can be seen through the operation receiving part, and the expectation for the decoration of the decorative surface part that is stopped to rotate. Can be enhanced.

Further, since a plurality of decorative surface portions having different decorations are provided, when decorations having different premium feelings are adopted as the decorations of the decorative surface portions, the rotation around the first axis by the first rotating means is directly behind the operation receiving portion. The rate and reliability at which an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit game") that gives the player an advantage over the player due to the decoration of the stopped decorative surface portion occurs, or the type of advantageous gaming state that occurs (for example, "big hit game"). , "Number of rounds"), etc. can be suggested. Therefore, by rotating the plurality of decorative surface portions around the first axis by the first rotating means, the decorative surface portion (decorative surface portion having a high premium feeling) having the desired decoration for the player is directly behind the operation receiving portion. Depending on whether or not the player stops at the position of, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

It is desirable that the connecting decoration portion be rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means. As a result, the connecting decorative portion is rotated around the first axis together with the plurality of decorative surface portions by the first rotating means, so that the decorative surface portions are between the decorative surface portions regardless of the rotation position around the first axis of the plurality of decorative surface portions. The position of the connecting decoration part that can be seen does not change, and the same part (decoration) can always be shown. Therefore, the decoration of the connecting decoration portion can be easily understood by the player, and the decoration effect of the connecting decoration portion can be surely exhibited.

Further, a connecting decorative portion light emitting means for light-emitting decoration of the connecting decorative portion may be provided, whereby a plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, and between the decorative surface portions. When the arranged connecting decoration part is moved to a position that can be seen from the player side through the transparent part of the operation receiving part, if the connecting decoration part is made to emit light by the connecting decoration part light emitting means, the connecting decoration part becomes more beautiful. It is possible to make sure that the decorative effect of the connecting decoration part is exhibited. Further, in this case, by illuminating the connecting decoration portion by the connecting decoration portion light emitting means, the connecting decoration portion can be made to stand out in the operation receiving portion, so that the player's attention can be directed to the operation receiving portion. Therefore, it is possible to encourage participation in the player participation type production that operates the operation receiving unit, and it is possible to entertain the player participation type production and suppress the deterioration of the interest. Further, in this case, if the decorative surface portion is positioned immediately after the operation receiving portion and the connecting decorative portion is light-emitting decorated by the connecting decorative portion light emitting means, the outer periphery of the decorative surface portion becomes bright, so that the player can see the result. In addition to being able to draw attention to the inside of the operation receiving unit, it is possible to make people think that there is something good about the game, raise expectations for the game, and suppress a decline in interest. Further, in this state, since the connecting decorative portion that cannot be seen through the operation receiving portion is light-emitting decorated, there is a chance that an advantageous gaming state will occur in which the player is advantageous when the connecting decorative portion becomes visible. Because it can be thought that it means, the player is determined by whether or not it is located directly behind the operation receiving part so that the connecting decorative part in which the plurality of decorative surface parts are rotated around the first axis and is luminescent and decorated can be seen. It can be exciting and thrilling, entertaining the player and suppressing the decline in interest.

Further, it is desirable that the first axis extends in the horizontal direction. As a result, when a plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, the decorative surface portion visible through the operation receiving portion moves in the vertical direction between the connecting decorative portions and switches to the next decorative surface portion. Therefore, it is possible to show the player an effect in which the connecting decorative portion and the next decorative surface portion to be switched appear from above or below. Therefore, for example, when the next decorative surface portion appears from above and is switched, the next decorative surface portion appears to come down from above, so that the player is given a revelation from above. It is possible to give a good impression and raise the expectation for the game by making people think that there is something good. On the other hand, when the next decorative surface part appears from the bottom and is switched, the player can be given the impression that the ascending momentum is high because the next decorative surface part rises from the bottom. , It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game by making the player think that a chance has arrived.

Further, when the first axis extends in the horizontal direction, when a plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis, the plurality of decorative surface portions and connecting decorative portions are switched so as to move in the vertical direction. The line of sight of the player can be moved in the vertical direction, and the line of sight of the player can be directed from the upper side or the lower side of the operation receiving part to the inside of the operation receiving part, or from the inside of the operation receiving part to the upper side or the lower side of the operation receiving part. It can be turned to. Therefore, since it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation receiving unit and another effect device provided on the upper side or the lower side of the operation receiving unit are linked with each other, the player can produce an effect that attracts the player's attention more strongly. It can be seen in the game, entertaining the player and suppressing the decline in interest.

Further, the operation surface (surface) of the operation receiving portion may be formed into a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward. As a result, the surface of the operation receiving portion bulges outward in three dimensions, so that the space behind the operation receiving portion can be widened. Therefore, when a plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis on the rear side of the operation receiving portion, it is possible to make it difficult for each decorative surface portion to come into contact with the inner surface of the operation receiving portion, and the plurality of decorative surface portions Can be rotated well. Further, in this case, since the space on the rear side of the operation receiving portion can be widened, each decorative surface portion can be made larger, so that the large decorative surface portion can be made more noticeable from the player side. The player's interest can be strongly attracted to the decorative surface portion (operation receiving portion).

Further, it is desirable to provide decorative surface portion light emitting means for emitting and decorating a plurality of decorative surface portions, whereby rotation is stopped by the first rotating means and the second rotating means, and around the first axis and the second axis. Since the decorative surface portion can be luminescently decorated by the decorative surface portion light emitting means in a state such as during rotation around the surroundings, the decorativeness of the decorative surface portion can be further enhanced by luminescent decoration of the decorative surface portion, and the game can be played. It can improve the appearance and enhance the appeal to the player. In addition, since the decorative surface portion can be made to stand out by the light emitting decoration and the player's attention can be directed to the decorative surface portion and the operation receiving portion, it is possible to encourage the player to participate in the player participation type production that operates the operation receiving portion. , It is possible to entertain the player-participatory production and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, it is rotatably supported around the first axis on the rear side of the operation receiving portion, and is provided with a plurality of decorative surface portions and connecting decorative portions, which can be rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means. A rotating body may be further provided. As a result, when the rotating body is rotated by the first rotating means, it is possible to connect the plurality of decorative surface portions and rotate the decorative portion around the first axis, and to surely realize a gaming machine that exerts the above-mentioned effects. Can be done.

Further, at least one of the plurality of decorative surface portions may be provided with a rotating decorative portion that rotates around the second axis and a fixed decorative portion that does not rotate around the second axis. As a result, in the decorative surface portion provided with the rotating decorative portion and the fixed decorative portion, when the rotating decorative portion is rotated around the second axis by the second rotating means, only the rotating decorative portion rotates and the fixed decorative portion does not rotate, so that the whole rotates. It is possible to give an impression different from that of the decorative surface portion (decorative surface portion consisting only of the rotating decorative portion), and it is possible to show and entertain the player with a wider variety of effects. Further, in this case, among the plurality of decorative surface portions, the decorative surface portion provided with the rotating decorative portion and the fixed decorative portion can give an impression different from that of the decorative surface portion having only the rotating decorative portion. It is possible to give a premium feeling.

Further, one actuator (for example, a motor, a rotary solenoid, a solenoid, etc.) may be used to rotate all the decorative surface portions around the second axis, and each decorative surface portion is provided with an actuator. Since only one space for providing the actuator is required as compared with the case where the actuator is provided, the space for arranging the operation receiving portion, the decorative surface portion, other members, etc. can be relatively widened. The operation receiving part, the decorative surface part, etc. can be made larger to stand out.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1.
"The connecting decoration part is
It is characterized in that it is "rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means".

By the way, when the connecting decorative portion is prevented from rotating around the first axis, a plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, and the decorative surface portions pass through the transparent portion of the operation receiving portion. When the space is made visible from the player side, the position of the connecting decorative portion that can be seen from between the decorative surface portions changes as the space between the decorative surface portions moves in the direction around the first axis. Become. Therefore, the portion of the connecting decorative portion that can be seen from between the decorative surface portions changes according to the rotation position around the first axis of the plurality of decorative surface portions, so that the decoration of the connecting decorative portion may be difficult to understand from the player side. is there.

According to the configuration of the means 2, the connecting decoration portion is made to be rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means.

As a result, the connecting decorative portion is rotated around the first axis together with the plurality of decorative surface portions by the first rotating means, so that the decorative surface portions are between the decorative surface portions regardless of the rotation position around the first axis of the plurality of decorative surface portions. The position of the connecting decoration part that can be seen does not change, and the same part (decoration) can always be shown. Therefore, the decoration of the connecting decoration portion can be easily understood by the player, and the decoration effect of the connecting decoration portion can be surely exhibited.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2.
It is characterized in that it is "further provided with a connecting decorative portion light emitting means for emitting and decorating the connecting decorative portion".

Here, as the "connecting decoration part light emitting means", "LED (single color LED, full color LED, high brightness LED, etc.)", "organic EL", "incandescent lamp", "neon lamp", "cold cathode fluorescent lamp" , Etc. can be mentioned.

According to the configuration of the means 3, the gaming machine is provided with a connecting decoration portion light emitting means for emitting and decorating the connecting decoration portion.

As a result, since the connecting decorative portion can be light-emitting decorated by the connecting decorative portion light emitting means, a plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means and arranged between the decorative surface portions. When the connecting decoration part is moved to a position that can be seen from the player side through the transparent part of the operation receiving part, if the connecting decoration part is light-emitting decorated by the connecting decoration part light emitting means, the connecting decoration part can be made to look more beautiful. It can be done, and the decorative effect of the connecting decorative part can be surely exhibited.

Further, by illuminating the connecting decoration part by the connecting decoration part light emitting means, the connecting decoration part can be made to stand out in the operation receiving part, so that the player's attention can be directed to the operation receiving part, and the operation can be performed. Participation in the player participation type production that operates the receiving part can be promoted, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, when the decorative surface portion is positioned immediately after the operation receiving portion and the connecting decorative portion is light-emitting decorated by the connecting decorative portion light emitting means, the outer periphery of the decorative surface portion becomes bright, so that the player receives the operation. In addition to being able to draw attention to the inside of the club, it is possible to make people think that there is something good about the game, raise expectations for the game, and suppress the decline in interest. Further, in this state, since the connecting decorative portion that cannot be seen through the operation receiving portion is light-emitting decorated, there is a chance that an advantageous gaming state will occur in which the player is advantageous when the connecting decorative portion becomes visible. Because it can be thought that it means, the player is determined by whether or not it is located directly behind the operation receiving part so that the connecting decorative part in which the plurality of decorative surface parts are rotated around the first axis and is luminescent and decorated can be seen. It can be exciting and thrilling, entertaining the player and suppressing the decline in interest.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 3.
"The first axis is
It is characterized in that it extends in the horizontal direction.

According to the configuration of the means 4, the first axis is extended in the horizontal direction.

As a result, when a plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, the decorative surface portion visible through the operation receiving portion moves in the vertical direction between the connecting decorative portions and switches to the next decorative surface portion. Therefore, it is possible to show the player an effect in which the connecting decorative portion and the next decorative surface portion to be switched appear from above or below. Therefore, for example, when the next decorative surface portion appears from above and is switched, the next decorative surface portion appears to come down from above, so that the player is given a revelation from above. It is possible to give a good impression and raise the expectation for the game by making people think that there is something good. On the other hand, when the next decorative surface part appears from the bottom and is switched, the player can be given the impression that the ascending momentum is high because the next decorative surface part rises from the bottom. , It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game by making the player think that a chance has arrived.

Further, when the plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis, the plurality of decorative surface portions and the connecting decorative portions are switched so as to move in the vertical direction, so that the player's line of sight can be moved in the vertical direction. , The line of sight of the player can be directed from the upper side or the lower side of the operation receiving part to the inside of the operation receiving part, or from the inside of the operation receiving part to the upper side or the lower side of the operation receiving part. Therefore, since it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation receiving unit and another effect device provided on the upper side or the lower side of the operation receiving unit are linked with each other, the player can produce an effect that attracts the player's attention more strongly. It can be seen in the game, entertaining the player and suppressing the decline in interest.

Means 5: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 4.
"The operation receiving unit is
The operation surface is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward. "

Here, examples of the "three-dimensional shape bulging outward" include a "hemispherical shape", a "bullet shape", a "spindle shape", a "polyhedral shape", and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 5, the operation surface (surface) of the operation receiving portion is formed into a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward.

As a result, the surface of the operation receiving portion bulges outward in three dimensions, so that the space behind the operation receiving portion can be widened. Therefore, when a plurality of decorative surface portions are rotated around the first axis on the rear side of the operation receiving portion, it is possible to make it difficult for each decorative surface portion to come into contact with the inner surface of the operation receiving portion, and the plurality of decorative surface portions Can be rotated well.

Further, since the space on the rear side of the operation receiving portion can be widened, each decorative surface portion can be made larger, so that the large decorative surface portion can be made more noticeable from the player side, and the player can make it more noticeable. Interest can be strongly attracted to the decorative surface (operation receiving part).

Means 6: In any one of means 1 to 5,
It is characterized in that "the decorative surface portion light emitting means for light-emitting decoration of the plurality of the decorative surface portions is further provided".

Here, as the "decorative surface light emitting means", "LED (single color LED, full color LED, high brightness LED, etc.)", "organic EL", "incandescent lamp", "neon lamp", "cold cathode tube", And so on.

According to the configuration of the means 6, the gaming machine is provided with a decorative surface portion light emitting means for emitting and decorating a plurality of decorative surface portions.

As a result, the decorative surface portion can be light-emitting and decorated by the decorative surface portion light emitting means in a state such as when the rotation by the first rotating means and the second rotating means is stopped, or when the rotation is around the first axis and the second axis. Therefore, by luminescent decoration of the decorative surface portion, the decorativeness of the decorative surface portion can be further enhanced, the appearance of the game can be improved, and the appealing power to the player can be enhanced. In addition, since the decorative surface portion can be made to stand out by the light emitting decoration and the player's attention can be directed to the decorative surface portion and the operation receiving portion, it is possible to encourage the player to participate in the player participation type production that operates the operation receiving portion. , It is possible to entertain the player-participatory production and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, when the decorative surface portion that is not located directly behind the operation receiving portion is light-emitting and decorated, the light makes the outer periphery of the decorative surface portion that is located directly behind the operation receiving portion brighter, so that the player can operate the decorative surface portion. You can draw attention to the inside of the receiving part. Then, since the decorative surface portion that cannot be seen through the operation receiving portion is light-emittingly decorated, it is thought that when the decorative surface portion becomes visible, it means the arrival of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous. Therefore, the player can be thrilled depending on whether or not the plurality of decorative surface portions are located directly behind the operation receiving portion so that the decorative surface portions that are luminescent and decorated can be seen by rotating around the first axis. , It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Means 7: In any one of means 1 to 6,
"Along with being rotatably supported around the first axis on the rear side of the operation receiving portion, a plurality of the decorative surface portions and the connecting decorative portion are provided, and the first axis is provided by the first rotating means. It is characterized in that it further includes a rotating body that can be rotated around.

Here, the "rotating body" is "a disk-shaped body of a predetermined thickness", "a spherical body", and "a columnar shape centered on the first axis". "Things", "Things formed in polygonal columns centered on the first axis", and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 7, the gaming machine is rotatably supported around the first axis on the rear side of the operation receiving portion, and is provided with a plurality of decorative surface portions and connecting decorative portions. A rotating body that can be rotated around the first axis is further provided.

As a result, when the rotating body is rotated by the first rotating means, it is possible to connect the plurality of decorative surface portions and rotate the decorative portion around the first axis, and to surely realize a gaming machine that exerts the above-mentioned effects. Can be done.

It is desirable that the rotating body is provided with the second rotating means, whereby the second rotating means is provided from the second rotating means as compared with the case where the second rotating means is provided at a position different from that of the rotating body. It is possible to simplify the mechanism for rotating the decorative surface portion by transmitting the rotation of the above to the second axis. Further, in this case, since it is not necessary to secure a space for arranging the second rotating means on the outside of the rotating body, the operation receiving portion can be surely arranged on the outside of the rotating body or other decorative members. Can be arranged, and it is possible to easily embody a gaming machine that surely achieves the above-mentioned effects.

Means 8: In a gaming machine
"The operation receiving part, which has an operation surface formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward and can be operated by a player having a transparent part,
A rotating body rotatably supported around a first axis extending parallel to and horizontally extending from the surface of the operation receiving portion on the rear side of the operation receiving portion.
Each of the rotating bodies is rotatably supported around a second axis orthogonal to the first axis, and is arranged in rows at intervals in the circumferential direction about the first axis. Multiple decorative surfaces that are different from each other,
A connecting decorative portion provided on the rotating body so as to connect the plurality of decorative surface portions and having a predetermined decoration formed on the outer surface, and a connecting decorative portion.
The connecting decoration part light emitting means for emitting and decorating the connecting decoration part,
A decorative surface light emitting means for emitting and decorating a plurality of the decorative surface parts,
A first rotating means for rotating the rotating body around the first axis so that the decorative surface portion that becomes visible through the transparent portion of the operation receiving portion changes.
It is provided with a second rotating means for rotating the decorative surface portion around the second axis. "

According to the configuration of the means 8, the operating surface of the gaming machine is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, and the operating receiving portion that can be operated by a player having a transparent portion and the rear side of the operating receiving portion. In the rotating body, which is rotatably supported around the first axis extending parallel to and horizontally extending from the surface of the operation receiving portion, and rotating around the second axis, each of which is orthogonal to the first axis. It is supported as much as possible, and is arranged in rows at intervals in the circumferential direction around the first axis line, and between a plurality of decorative surface portions, each of which has a different decoration from each other, and a plurality of decorative surface portions. A connecting decorative part that is provided on the rotating body so as to be connected and has a predetermined decoration formed on the outer surface, a connecting decorative part that emits and decorates the connecting decorative part, and a decorative surface part that emits and decorates a plurality of decorative surface parts. The first rotating means for rotating the rotating body around the first axis and the decorative surface are rotated around the second axis so that the light emitting means and the decorative surface portion that can be seen through the transparent part of the operation receiving portion are changed. It is provided with a second rotating means.

As a result, when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, one of the plurality of decorative surface portions can be seen through the transparent portion of the operation receiving portion, and the decoration of the decorative surface portion makes the operation receiving portion look good. It's getting better. The decorative surface part that can be seen through the operation receiving part is a rotating body that is rotatably supported around the first axis extending horizontally parallel to the surface of the operation receiving part, and is spaced apart from the first axis in the circumferential direction. There are multiple rows. In this state, when the rotating body is rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, the decorative surface portion located directly behind the operation receiving portion moves from the position directly behind the operation receiving portion and in the circumferential direction. The next decorative surface portion arranged in a row at intervals will move directly behind the operation receiving portion. Therefore, when the rotating body is rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, the decorative surface portion visible through the transparent portion of the operation receiving portion can be switched to another decorative surface portion, and the decoration visible through the operation receiving portion is changed. be able to. When the rotating body is rotated around the first axis to switch the decorative surface portions that can be seen through the operation receiving portion, since the decorative surface portions are connected and arranged between the decorative surface portions that are spaced apart from each other, the decorative surface portions are connected to each other. Since the space is decorated, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the appearance inside the operation receiving part, and it is possible to improve the appearance inside the operation receiving part. Then, in the decorative surface portion moved directly behind the operation receiving portion by the rotation around the first axis of the rotating body by the first rotating means, the second axis extends perpendicularly to the surface of the operation receiving portion. It has become. In this state, when the decorative surface portion visible through the operation receiving portion is rotated by the second rotating means, the decorative surface portion is rotated around while being visible through the operation receiving portion, and the player is asked. The decorative surface part that rotates around can be shown on the rear side of the operation receiving part. Alternatively, with the plurality of decorative surface portions being rotated around the second axis by the second rotating means, the rotating body is rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, and the rotating body is rotated around the first axis. When the space between the decorative surface parts is moved to a position that can be seen from the player side through the transparent part of the operation receiving part, the rotating decorative surface part and the non-rotating connecting decorative part are passed through the transparent part of the operation receiving part. Can be shown at the same time. In this way, by rotating the rotating body around the first axis by the first rotating means, it is possible to show the decoration that changes to a different decoration through the operation receiving portion, and the decorative surface portion is moved to the second axis by the second rotating means. By rotating it around, it is possible to show the decoration that rotates round and round through the operation receiving part, and while rotating the decorative surface part around the second axis by the second rotating means, the rotating body is rotated by the first rotating means. By rotating around one axis, it is possible to show the decorative surface part that is rotating through the operation receiving part and the connecting decorative part that is not rotating at the same time, so it is possible to show the player various decorations in the operation receiving part. This makes it possible to enhance the decorativeness of the operation receiving portion operated by the player, entertain the player, and suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, when the rotating body is rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, the decorative surface portion that was initially visible moves in the rotation direction, and the next decorative surface portion is visible after the connecting decorative portion is visible (). Since it appears), the connecting decorative portion can delay the appearance of the next decorative surface portion to allow a gap, so that the player can imagine what kind of decorative surface portion the next decorative surface portion is. It is possible to give time, and it is possible to raise the expectation of the player and suppress the decline in interest depending on whether or not the next decorative surface portion is the desired decorative surface portion imagined.

Further, if the decorative surface portion is rotated around the second axis by the second rotating means, it becomes difficult for the player to clearly recognize the decoration of the decorative surface portion. Therefore, for example, the decorative surface portion is rotated by the second rotating means. If the rotating body is rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means while the rotating body is rotated around the two axes so that the connecting decoration part is positioned immediately after the operation receiving part, the rotation around the second axis causes it. Since the decoration of the stationary connecting decoration part can be clearly seen between the two decorative surfaces whose decorations are indistinct due to the movement, the player's interest can be connected and strongly attracted to the decoration part. , The player's attention can be directed to the operation receiving part. After that, the rotating body is rotated in a predetermined direction around the first axis by the first rotating means, the specific decorative surface portion is positioned immediately after the operation receiving portion, and then the second axis by the second rotating means. By stopping the rotation around it, it is possible to show the player the effect that a specific decorative surface portion can be seen through the transparent portion of the operation receiving portion. As a result, by locating the connecting decorative portion immediately after the operation receiving portion, the player's interest can be attracted to the operating receiving portion, and any of the decorative surface portions moving on both sides of the connecting decorative portion can be used. Depending on whether or not the decorative surface of the face moves immediately after the operation receiving part and the decoration becomes clearly visible, it can be exciting and exciting to raise expectations, entertaining the player and reducing the interest. It can be suppressed.

Further, since a plurality of decorative surface portions are arranged in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction and a connecting decorative portion is arranged between the decorative surface portions, the two decorative surface portions adjacent to each other are separated by the connecting decorative surface portion. Can be clearly partitioned. Therefore, when the rotating body is rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means to switch the decorative surface portion that can be seen through the operation receiving portion, the connecting decorative portion can be seen in the middle, so that the decorative surface portion is cut off for the player. It is possible to clearly recognize that the change has been made, and it is possible to surely enjoy the change in the decoration in the operation receiving part and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the rotating body rotating around the first axis is provided with a plurality of decorative surface portions and connecting decorative portions, the connecting decorative portion is rotated around the first axis together with the plurality of decorative surface portions by the first rotating means. Therefore, regardless of the rotation position of the plurality of decorative surface portions around the first axis, the positions of the connecting decorative portions visible between the decorative surface portions do not change, and the same portion (decoration) can always be shown. Therefore, the decoration of the connecting decoration portion can be easily understood by the player, and the decoration effect of the connecting decoration portion can be surely exhibited.

Further, since the connecting decorative portion can be light-emitting decorated by the connecting decorative portion light emitting means, the connecting decorative portion is arranged between the decorative surface portions by rotating the rotating body around the first axis by the first rotating means. When the player is moved to a position that can be seen from the player side through the transparent part of the operation receiving part, if the connecting decoration part is made to emit light by the connecting decoration part light emitting means, the connecting decoration part can be made to look more beautiful, and the connecting decoration part can be made to look more beautiful. The decorative effect of the decorative part can be surely exhibited. Further, by making the connecting decoration part light-emitting decoration, the connecting decoration part can be made to stand out in the operation receiving part, so that the player's attention can be directed to the operation receiving part, and the game of operating the operation receiving part can be made. Participation in the participation-type production can be encouraged, and the participation-type production by the player can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, when one decorative surface portion is positioned immediately after the operation receiving portion and the connecting decorative portion is light-emitting decorated by the connecting decorative portion light emitting means, the outer periphery of the decorative surface portion becomes bright, so that the player can see the result. In addition to being able to draw attention to the inside of the operation receiving unit, it is possible to make people think that there is something good about the game, raise expectations for the game, and suppress a decline in interest. Further, in this state, since the connecting decorative portion that cannot be seen through the operation receiving portion is light-emitting decorated, there is a chance that an advantageous gaming state will occur in which the player is advantageous when the connecting decorative portion becomes visible. Because it can be thought that it means, the player is excited depending on whether or not the rotating body is located directly behind the operation receiving part so that the connecting decoration part that is luminescent and decorated by rotating around the first axis can be seen. It can be throbbing, entertaining the player and suppressing the decline in interest.

Further, the decoration visible through the operation receiving portion can be changed by switching the decorative surface portion or showing the connecting decorative portion by rotating the rotating body around the first axis of the rotating body by the first rotating means, and by the second rotating means. Since it can be rotated around the second axis, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation receiving portion. Therefore, when the player participation type effect of operating the operation receiving unit is executed, the decoration visible through the operation receiving unit is changed to attract the player's interest to the operation receiving unit and promote the operation of the operation receiving unit. It is possible to ensure that the player participates in the player-participation-type production, and it is possible to entertain the player-participation-type production, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in a state where the rotating body is rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means and the decorative surface portion is rotated around the second axis by the second rotating means, first of all, the first axis by the first rotating means. When the rotation around is stopped and the predetermined decorative surface portion is positioned directly behind the operation receiving portion, the decorative surface portion visible through the operation receiving portion is around the second axis even though the rotation around the first axis is stopped. Since it is rotating to, the decoration of the decorative surface cannot be clearly recognized, and then when the rotation of the decorative surface around the second axis by the second rotating means is stopped, the decoration that can be seen through the operation receiving portion. The decoration of the face part can be clearly recognized. As a result, the decoration was unrecognizable due to the rotation around the first axis and the second axis, but the rotation around the first axis and the rotation around the second axis are sequentially stopped, and the operation is received. Since it is possible to show the player an effect that the decoration that can be seen through the part can be gradually recognized, it is possible to enjoy the change of the decoration that can be seen through the operation receiving part, and the expectation for the decoration of the decorative surface part that is stopped to rotate. Can be enhanced.

Further, since a plurality of decorative surface portions having different decorations are provided, when decorations having different premium feelings are adopted as the decorations of the decorative surface portions, the rotation around the first axis by the first rotating means is directly behind the operation receiving portion. The rate and reliability at which an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit game") that gives the player an advantage over the player due to the decoration of the stopped decorative surface portion occurs, or the type of advantageous gaming state that occurs (for example, "big hit game"). , "Number of rounds"), etc. can be suggested. Therefore, by rotating the rotating body around the first axis by the first rotating means, the decorative surface portion (decorative surface portion having a high premium feeling) having the desired decoration for the player is positioned directly behind the operation receiving portion. Depending on whether or not the game is stopped, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the first axis extends in the horizontal direction, when the rotating body is rotated around the first axis by the first rotating means, the decorative surface portion visible through the operation receiving portion is sandwiched between the connecting decorative portions. Since it seems that it moves in the vertical direction and switches to the next decorative surface part, it is possible to show the player the effect that the connecting decorative part and the next decorative surface part to be switched appear from above or from below. it can. Therefore, for example, when the next decorative surface portion appears from above and is switched, the next decorative surface portion appears to come down from above, so that the player is given a revelation from above. It is possible to give a good impression and raise the expectation for the game by making people think that there is something good. On the other hand, when the next decorative surface part appears from the bottom and is switched, the player can be given the impression that the ascending momentum is high because the next decorative surface part rises from the bottom. , It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game by making the player think that a chance has arrived.

In addition, since the first axis extends in the horizontal direction, when the rotating body is rotated around the first axis, a plurality of decorative surface portions and connecting decorative portions are switched so as to move in the vertical direction. It is possible to move the line of sight of the player in the vertical direction, so that the line of sight of the player is directed from the upper side or the lower side of the operation receiving part into the operation receiving part, or from the inside of the operation receiving part to the upper side or the lower side of the operation receiving part. It can be turned to. Therefore, since it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation receiving unit and another effect device provided on the upper side or the lower side of the operation receiving unit are linked with each other, the player can produce an effect that attracts the player's attention more strongly. It can be seen in the game, entertaining the player and suppressing the decline in interest.

Further, since the operation surface (surface) of the operation receiving portion is formed in a three-dimensional shape protruding outward, the space on the rear side of the operation receiving portion can be widened. Therefore, when the rotating body is rotated around the first axis on the rear side of the operation receiving portion, the plurality of decorative surface portions and connecting decorative portions provided on the rotating body come into contact with each other with respect to the inner surface of the operation receiving portion. It can be made difficult, and the rotating body can be rotated satisfactorily. Further, in this case, since the space on the rear side of the operation receiving portion can be widened, each decorative surface portion can be made larger, so that the large decorative surface portion can be made more noticeable from the player side. The player's interest can be strongly attracted to the decorative surface portion (operation receiving portion).

Further, since the decorative surface portion light emitting means for emitting and decorating a plurality of decorative surface portions is provided, the rotation by the first rotating means and the second rotating means is stopped, and the rotation around the first axis and the second axis is being performed. In such a state, the decorative surface portion can be luminescently decorated by the decorative surface portion light emitting means. Therefore, by luminescent decoration of the decorative surface portion, the decorativeness of the decorative surface portion can be further enhanced and the appearance of the game is improved. It is possible to enhance the appealing power to the player. In addition, since the decorative surface portion can be made to stand out by the light emitting decoration and the player's attention can be directed to the decorative surface portion and the operation receiving portion, it is possible to encourage the player to participate in the player participation type production that operates the operation receiving portion. , It is possible to entertain the player-participatory production and suppress the decline in interest.

Means 9: In any one of the gaming machines from Means 1 to Means 8.
It is characterized by being a pachinko machine.

Here, the pachinko machine is a gaming machine in which the input medium, which is a medium that the player puts into the game machine, and the game medium, which is the medium used for the actual game performed by the player, are the same. , A type of gaming machine in which a game is played using a medium such as a game ball that has been thrown in. Specifically, "a launching device that launches a game ball in response to the operation of the operation handle, and appropriate equipment such as a large number of obstacle nails, accessories, display means, etc. are incorporated, a start winning opening, a large winning opening, etc. , Passing port, arrival port, etc., a game area provided with an appropriate entry port for the game ball to enter, a rail for guiding the game ball from the launcher to the game area, and entry of the game ball guided to the game area. It is provided with a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls according to the entry of the game balls into the ball openings or the entry mode of the game balls into a plurality of entrances. "

There are various types of pachinko machines, which are generally referred to as "digi-pachi machines" and are represented by "ball-entry state detecting means (game state detection) for detecting the ball-entry state at the ball-entry port." (It can also be regarded as a means), a lottery means that performs a predetermined lottery when a ball is detected by the ball entry state detection means, and a special pattern that changes and stops the change according to the lottery result of the lottery means. "Equipped with a symbol display means" and "In addition, while the special symbol is changing, a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols is variablely displayed, and the symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol sequence, a character, various articles, etc. "Inside the character" represented by what is generally called a "splash machine", which is further equipped with an effect display means for appropriately displaying the effect by drawing the display object and operating the display object, etc. One game is played by a predetermined number of game balls, for example, 16 pieces, which is typified by "a lottery means for drawing a lottery by sorting game balls in" and "alepachi machine". An example of "a device that pays out a predetermined number of game balls according to a mode in which the game balls enter a plurality of entrances in one game" can be exemplified.

According to the configuration of the means 9, any of the above-mentioned means can be exerted in the pachinko machine.

Means 10: In any one of the gaming machines from Means 1 to Means 8.
It is characterized by being a pachislot machine.

Here, the pachi-slot machine is such that a medal, which is an insertion medium, is inserted, and after the medal is inserted, a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are drawn are rotated by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Then, the game is such that the symbol sequence composed of each reel or the like is variablely displayed, and then the variable display of each symbol string is stopped according to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button). It is what is done. In other words, it can be regarded as a slot machine with a stop operation function. If the stop operation means is not operated even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped according to the elapse of the predetermined time. Then, when the variable display of each symbol string is stopped, the displayed single symbol is a specific symbol, the combination of the symbols displayed in each symbol string is a specific combination, and so on. When the conditions are met, a predetermined number of medals are paid out according to the satisfied conditions, or a special advantageous state is generated which is advantageous to the player who can acquire a large number of medals.

According to the configuration of the means 10, any of the above-mentioned means can be exerted in the pachislot machine.

Means 11: In any one of the gaming machines from Means 1 to Means 8.
It is characterized by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

Here, the "game machine formed by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine" is an operation means for starting after a plurality of (for example, five) game balls are used as one unit of input medium and the input medium is charged. A symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed according to the operation of (for example, an operation lever), and then the variation of the symbol sequence is stopped according to an operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button). If the stop operation means is not operated even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped according to the elapse of the predetermined time. Then, when the variable display of each symbol string is stopped, the displayed single symbol is a specific symbol, the combination of the symbols displayed in each symbol string is a specific combination, and so on. When the conditions are met, a predetermined number of medals are paid out according to the satisfied conditions, or a special advantageous state is generated which is advantageous to the player who can acquire a large number of medals.

According to the configuration of the means 11, any of the above-mentioned means can be exerted in a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in a game by enhancing the decorativeness of the operation receiving portion operated by the player.

[Button movable body production in look-ahead production and suggestion production]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 199 to 204, an effect using the above-mentioned third effect operation unit 400B (see FIGS. 78 to 92) will be described. Here, the button movable body effect is executed according to the lottery special lottery result according to the rotation operation mode of the decorative rotating body unit 530 (button movable body) arranged in the operation button 410 of the third effect operation unit 400B. The effect control to be performed will be described.

As described above, the main control board 1310 executes a special lottery when the game ball is accepted in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the control signal from the main control board 1310. Execute the suggestion (suggestion production) of the special lottery result. At this time, the time for suggesting the special lottery result (time until the special symbol sequence fluctuates and the confirmed image is displayed) and the content of the suggestion effect are a plurality of variations provided in advance based on the game state and the special lottery result. It is selected and set from the patterns. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 suspends the start of suggestion of the later special lottery result while the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is executed, and corresponds to the special lottery result in the held state during this period. The effect can be executed as a notice effect (look-ahead effect) before the start of suggesting the special lottery result. The look-ahead effect can be executed from the time when the target special lottery result is found until the suggestion is started, and is selected and set based on the game state and the target special lottery result. The look-ahead effect can raise the player's expectation from the hold state, and can enhance the interest of the game.

Hereinafter, the look-ahead effect and the suggestion effect using the decorative rotating body unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B will be described.

FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing an example of the special figure look-ahead effect control process in the present embodiment. This process is one of the processes executed by the peripheral control board 1510 when the game ball is accepted in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and is a special lottery executed by the main control board 1310. Based on the lottery result and the look-ahead determination, the settings necessary for executing the special figure look-ahead effect are made. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the main control board 1310 can execute the look-ahead effect, and when the pre-reading effect can be executed, it is determined whether or not the peripheral control board 1510 executes the look-ahead effect. Or set the content of the production.

First, the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag is set to ON (step S1001). The special figure look-ahead effect execution flag is set to on when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the look-ahead effect command from the main control board 1310. If the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag is not set on (the result of step S1001 is "No"), the look-ahead effect is not executed, so the special figure look-ahead effect control process ends.

The look-ahead effect command is a command generated by the main control board 1310. On the main control board 1310, when a game ball is accepted at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, a special lottery is executed, and a look-ahead effect is executed according to the special lottery result and the game state of the special lottery. Performs a look-ahead determination as to whether or not it is possible. In the look-ahead determination, it is determined that the look-ahead effect cannot be executed when the result is a special lottery that meets the read-ahead prohibition condition. The look-ahead prohibition condition refers to a case where the special lottery result is derived by accepting a game ball to the first starting port 2002 during the time saving, and can be set according to the game playability. The peripheral control board 1510 may be used to determine whether or not the look-ahead effect can be executed.

Then, when the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag is set to ON (the result of step S1001 is “Yes”), the peripheral control board 1510 suggests (suggested effect) the result of the special lottery being executed or the previous It is determined whether or not the button movable body effect is performed for the hold look-ahead effect (step S1002). Here, it is determined whether or not the effect using the button movable body effect is possible in the look-ahead effect based on the result of this special lottery. When the button movable body effect is performed in the look-ahead effect, the button look-ahead flag is set to on as described later, so it is possible to determine whether or not the button movable body effect is performed in the look-ahead effect of the previous hold. It may be determined whether or not the read-ahead flag is set. In addition, the judgment as to whether or not the button movable body effect is performed in the in-execution suggestion effect is to determine whether or not the button movable body effect is included in the in-execution suggestion effect based on the fluctuation pattern number and setting information during execution. Just do it.

Then, when there is no plan to perform the button movable body effect (“No” in step S1002), the peripheral control board 1510 sets a pre-reading effect table based on the special lottery result (step S1003), and the pre-reading is performed. The look-ahead effect content is selected based on the contents of the effect table and the look-ahead effect command (step S1004). The pre-reading effect content is determined by using, for example, an element (random number) used for deriving the special lottery result or determining the fluctuation pattern in the special lottery.

The peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not the result of this special lottery is the target of the button movable body effect, that is, whether or not the selected look-ahead effect content includes the button movable body effect (step S1005). .. Here, the button movable body effect occurs in a specific variation pattern (a variation pattern that becomes a reach effect described later).

Then, when the button movable body effect is executed (“Yes” in step S1005), the peripheral control board 1510 sets a look-ahead effect including the button movable body effect of the decorative rotating body unit 530 (step S1006). .. In the normal look-ahead effect, the display color of the hold display displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is changed from the initial color, the sound effect is output at the timing of the change, the lamp is turned on, and the accessory is played. The effect of moving it is performed. In the button movable body effect, separately, an effect of changing the mode visible to the player of the decorative rotating body unit 530 is performed. The details of the button movable body effect will be described later in FIG. 200.

Next, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the button look-ahead flag to ON (step S1007). The button look-ahead flag is set to off in the initial state, and by setting it to on, the look-ahead effect related to other special lottery results is completed until the button movable body effect set in the process of step S1006 described above is completed. And the effect in which the button movable body is used in the suggestion effect can be disabled.

Next, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag to off (step S1008), and ends the special figure look-ahead effect control process. By setting the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag to off, it is possible to prevent the look-ahead effect from being executed a plurality of times for one special lottery result.

On the other hand, when the button movable body effect is not executed (“No” in step S1005), the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not to execute the button movable body effect that is similar to the button movable body effect. (Step S1011). The button movable body effect of Gase may be executed with a predetermined probability for a fluctuation pattern satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, with a specific reach effect), or is executed according to a special lottery result. You may do so.

Then, when the button movable body effect of Gase is executed (“Yes” in step S1011), the peripheral control board 1510 sets a look-ahead effect in which the button movable body effect of Gase is added to the decorative rotating body unit 530. (Step S1012). The details of the button movable body effect of Gase will be described later in FIG. 200, but the best mode of the button movable body effect (see FIGS. 200 (C) and D) does not appear in the button movable body effect of Gase.

After that, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the button look-ahead flag on (step S1007), and the look-ahead effect related to other special lottery results is completed until the button movable body effect of the Gase set in the process of step S1012 described above is completed. And, in the suggestion effect, the effect in which the button movable body is used becomes infeasible. Next, the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag is set to off (step S1008), and the special figure look-ahead effect control process ends.

If the button movable body effect of the flag is not executed (“No” in step S1011), the peripheral control board 1510 sets a look-ahead effect that does not include the button movable body effect (step S1023), and the special figure look-ahead effect. After the execution flag is set to off (step S1008), the special figure look-ahead effect control process ends.

Further, when it is determined that the button movable body effect is performed in the suggestion (suggestion effect) of the special lottery result being executed in the process of step S1002 or the look-ahead effect of the previous hold (“Yes” in step S1002). , Peripheral control board 1510 sets a look-ahead effect table including a look-ahead effect pattern excluding a look-ahead effect pattern including a button movable body effect as a look-ahead effect content (step S1021), and is based on the contents of the look-ahead effect table and the look-ahead effect command. Select the look-ahead effect content (step S1022). After that, the look-ahead effect (not including the button movable body effect) is set (step S1023), the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag is set to off (step S1008), and then the special figure look-ahead effect control process ends.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 200, the button movable body effect as the look-ahead effect that can be set in the processes of step S1006 and step S1012 of the above-mentioned special figure look-ahead effect control process (FIG. 199) will be described. FIG. 200 is a diagram illustrating an example of a button movable body effect in the look-ahead effect.

The look-ahead effect of the present embodiment includes a look-ahead effect in the hold display displayed on the screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 and a look-ahead effect in the decorative rotating body unit 530. The pre-reading effect in the former hold display is set by the processes of step S1006, step S1012, and step S1023 of the above-mentioned special figure pre-reading effect control process (FIG. 199). The look-ahead effect in the latter decorative rotating body unit 530 is set in the processes of step S1006 and step S1012 of the above-mentioned special figure look-ahead effect control process (FIG. 199).

Here, the screen display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is generated after the variable display area for playing the variable display game of the symbol sequence as the suggestive effect suggesting the special lottery result and the special lottery result during the suggestive effect execution. It has a hold display area for displaying up to the maximum number of holds (here, 4 for each start port) as a hold display for the special lottery result in which the start of the suggestion is held. The peripheral control board 1510 is in the hold state by setting the hold display corresponding to the special lottery result of the effect target to another mode (for example, a red blinking ball) different from the initial mode (for example, a white ball). Therefore, a look-ahead effect is executed that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a special result (generates an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player). In the present embodiment, there is a pattern in which the button movable body effect is executed as the look-ahead effect in the decorative rotating body unit 530 in addition to the look-ahead effect of the above-mentioned hold display. In addition, you may execute the look-ahead effect of either the hold display or the decorative rotating body unit 530, these look-ahead effects, the decorative member on the game board emits light, the movable member is movable, the sound effect is emitted from the speaker, and the like. It may be executed as a look-ahead effect in combination with output. Hereinafter, the hold display and the look-ahead effect of the decorative rotating body unit 530 will be described.

FIG. 200A is a diagram showing a look-ahead effect when the hold special lottery result (look-ahead hold) of the look-ahead effect target occurs as the fourth hold. In the look-ahead hold, the look-ahead effect including the button movable body effect is set in the process of step S1006 of the above-mentioned special figure look-ahead effect control process (FIG. 199). In the screen display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display game is displayed in the variable display area, and the fourth hold display in the hold display area is displayed in a look-ahead mode (blinking red state) different from the initial mode. .. On the other hand, the decorative rotating body unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B maintains a state in which the first decorative surface portion 532 faces forward and is well visible to the player (normal state, normal mode).

FIG. 200B is a diagram showing a look-ahead effect when the variable display game that was being executed when the look-ahead hold occurs ends and a new variable display game is started. In the screen display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a new variable display game is started in the variable display area, and the suggestion of the special lottery result of the oldest hold display is started. The display position moves one to the left, and the look-ahead hold is displayed in the hold third read-ahead mode. Here, the decorative rotating body unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B is rotated 90 degrees around the first axis CL1 by the effect operation unit first drive motor 528, and then has a predetermined angle (90 degrees) around the rotation angle. It is a suggestion mode that reciprocates within a range (less than). Further, the first decorative surface portion decorative substrate 535 and the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536 decorate the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 with light emission. The best mode of the decorative rotating body unit 530 is a state in which the second decorative surface portion 533 is rotated 180 degrees around the first axis CL1 from the normal mode and is well visible to the player.

Therefore, in the suggested mode, the first decorative surface portion 532 side can be seen more or the second decorative surface portion 533 side can be seen more often across the rotating body base unit 531 (plural peripheral surface decorative portions 531f). Whether the player returns to the one decorative surface portion 532 (normal mode) or the second decorative surface portion 533 faces forward (best mode), the player can be excited and thrilled, and the deterioration of the interest due to the monotonous production can be suppressed. it can. Further, in the above example, the look-ahead effect (hold display effect) of the hold display area is executed at the timing when the look-ahead effect is set (that is, when the special lottery result occurs) (FIG. 200 (A)). The look-ahead effect (button movable body effect) of the decorative rotating body unit 530 is performed at the start timing of suggesting a special lottery result that is started to be executed after the look-ahead effect is set (FIG. 200 (B)). That is, since the start of the look-ahead effect of the hold display in the hold display area and the start of the look-ahead effect of the decorative rotating body unit 530 are different, the player does not know which special lottery result corresponds to the movable body effect, and is being executed or is on hold. You will have a sense of expectation for all the special lottery results. Therefore, it is possible to continuously entertain the player for a long period of time, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game. Further, in FIG. 200A described above, the look-ahead mode of the hold display in the hold display area makes it possible for the player to grasp that the look-ahead effect of the decorative rotating body unit 530 is executed in connection with the hold display. Good. As a result, the player can have a stable and high expectation for a specific special lottery result. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game in which the situation of the game can be easily recognized, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. The look-ahead effect of the hold display in the hold display area may be started at the same time in accordance with the look-ahead effect of the decorative rotating body unit 530. As a result, it is possible to provide a game in which the player can easily grasp the situation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game due to a complicated production configuration.

Next, FIG. 200C is a diagram showing a look-ahead effect when the game progresses and the variable display game for the special lottery result immediately before the look-ahead hold is started. In the screen display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a new variable display game is started in the variable display area, and in the hold display area, the look-ahead hold is displayed at the hold display position (left end) where the next execution is executed. The hold display mode of read-ahead hold continues the look-ahead mode. Then, in the decorative rotating body unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B, the second decorative surface portion 533 faces forward from the suggestion mode at the timing when the variation display game for the special lottery result immediately before the look-ahead hold is started, which is good from the player. It is the best mode that can be visually recognized. At this time, the third effect operation unit 400B is provided with the light emitting decoration of the second decorative surface portion 533 by the second decorative surface portion decorative substrate 536, and the frame of the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 by the decorative substrate unit 420. The side lens 417 is luminescently decorated.

FIG. 200 (D) is a diagram showing a button movable body effect as an effect corresponding to the variable display game when the variable display game (target variable display game) for the special lottery result of the look-ahead effect target is started. The decorative rotating body unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B is a pattern in which the set look-ahead effect pattern inherits and continues the look-ahead effect mode in the target variation display game (in the case of the button effect start process (FIG. 201) described later). In the process of step S2013, “Yes”), the best mode of FIG. 200 (C) is continued even if the target variation display game is started.

Further, in the look-ahead effect pattern, the process of step S1012 of the so-called Gase button movable body effect (the above-mentioned special figure look-ahead effect control process (FIG. 199)), which is not the best mode even if the decorative rotating body unit 530 is in the suggested mode ) Is also provided. FIG. 200 (E) is a diagram showing a button movable body effect of Gase at the timings of FIGS. 200 (C) and 200 (D) described above.

In the case of the button movable body effect of Gase, the decorative rotating body unit 530 follows the same transition up to FIGS. 200 (A) and 200 (B), but continues the suggestion mode at the timing of FIG. 200 (C). Then, at the start of the target variation display game of FIG. 200 (D), the third effect operation unit 400B is in a state in which the first decorative surface portion 532 is finally turned forward from the suggestion mode and can be clearly seen by the player, that is, usually It becomes an aspect. The setting of the normal mode is set in the process of step S2015 of the button effect start process (FIG. 201) described later. In addition, as the final mode in the case of Gase, not only the above-mentioned normal mode but also a modified normal mode in which a modest or equivalent light emitting decoration is applied to the normal mode is provided. The luminescent decoration in the modified normal mode weakens its luminescence with the passage of time and returns to the normal mode after a predetermined time.

As described above, in the button movable body effect by the decorative rotating body unit 530, the look-ahead effect includes the best mode in the movable body effect (the mode recognized as having changed most from the player's point of view) in the look-ahead effect. It is maintained even if the variable display game is changed to the best mode before the corresponding variable display game is executed and the variable display game is started. Specifically, in the embodiment, from the time (variable time) in which the variable display game is executed once from the time when the variable display game is put on hold immediately before the execution to the time when the other button movable body effect is executed in the variable display game. Also provides the player with the best mode visibly for a long time. As a result, the concern in the conventional production (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-90780, etc.), that is, the best mode in the production is limited production (when the operation is detected during the button production in the final production of a series of production button productions). ), But even if it is executed, it is provided only for a short time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the contribution and lack of interest in the effect of the best mode. Since the player can have an opportunity to continuously see the best mode from the pending state before the execution of the target variable display game as the mode of the look-ahead effect, the player has a high degree of expectation. Hold and variable display games can be entertained. In addition, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority to the progress of the game while the best mode is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of contribution to the production of the best mode and suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

Further, in the button movable body production, the normal mode is changed to the best mode via the suggestion mode. The suggestion mode is a mode in which the player repeatedly operates between the normal mode and the best mode, and the player can be thrilled whether the mode finally changes to the best mode or returns to the normal mode. In this way, by providing the suggestion mode that makes the player feel the possibility of changing to the best mode on hold, the player expects that good things (“big hit” occurrence) will occur in the variable display game. While playing games. Therefore, the interest of the game can be further improved.

In addition, the button movable body production does not require the operation of the player, and the operation button itself performs an independent production as a production function, and a sufficient time is provided for the best mode to be visible, so that the operation button as an operation means is provided. It is possible to give novelty and surprise to the player who is tired of the game, and to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

In addition, in FIG. 200, in the button movable body effect of the look-ahead effect, the best mode is continuously visually provided during the variable display game executed during the hold and the corresponding variable display game, but the present invention is limited to this. Absent. It suffices that a predetermined time is secured until the start of the movable body effect in the variable display game set at the start of the fluctuation of the target variable display game or the end of the variable display game to maintain the best mode. Specifically, it suffices to change to the best mode before the reach effect and the winning / failing effect. Therefore, for example, a mode pattern may be used in which the suggestion mode is continued while the game is pending, and the mode pattern becomes the best mode after the variable display game corresponding to the look-ahead effect is started. By having a wide variety of timings to be the best mode, the interest and expectations of the player can be continued, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, as the effect pattern of the button movable body effect, the speed of the repetitive rotation in the suggestion mode may be adjusted, the suggestion mode may be changed to the best mode via the normal mode, or the suggestion mode may not be used. The normal mode may be switched to the best mode. Further, the look-ahead effect may be obtained by combining the movable body effect with other effect elements such as light emission decoration and sound output. With various patterns, the player can play the game while having expectations for the change in the mode, and the player is less likely to get tired of the game, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In addition to the button movable body effect that is finally the best mode, the button movable body effect that is not the best mode is provided, so that the player simply starts the independent operation of the button movable body. I'm not happy. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's interest in the button movable body production and give a feeling of excitement as to whether or not the mode is the best, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, in the button movable body production of Gase, not only the normal mode but also a modified normal mode in which the same or modest light emitting decoration is applied based on the normal mode can be applied as the final mode of the button. As a result, the difference between the expectations so far and the disappointment in which the best mode did not occur can be alleviated. Furthermore, the buttons are arranged so as to protrude in front of the gaming machine, and the visual effects such as the luminescent decoration are eye-catching. The parties feel embarrassed because it is recognized that it was a slingshot production. After the end of the button movable body production of Gase, the effect (light emitting decoration) that stands out from the deformed normal mode is gradually weakened and returned to the normal mode, so that the player is not ashamed and remedies are taken for not becoming the best mode. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. Further, the normal mode may be returned to the normal mode, and then the light emitting decoration may be performed to change the normal mode to the modified normal mode, which can give the player a sense of expectation again.

It should be noted that the suggestion mode and the best mode in the button movable body effect described above can be executed not only in the look-ahead effect but also in any effect. For example, as an effect during the big hit game, the best mode may be maintained and provided to the player so as to be visible until the big hit game is completed. In addition, in combination with the above-mentioned look-ahead effect, there is a special lottery result that generates the next big hit in the hold by changing from the suggested mode to the best mode during the big hit game or maintaining the best mode at the end of the big hit game. It may be provided as a hold-in villa production indicating that it is to be done. Further, when the winning area is provided with a specific area (V zone), the best mode may be set when the game ball passes through the specific area. In a game situation where a player can expect an advantageous gaming state or a game scene in which a player wants to give a feeling of exhilaration or expectation, by using the suggestion mode or the best mode of this embodiment, the effect of production is enhanced and the interest of the game is enhanced. Can be enhanced.

Further, in the button movable body effect of the look-ahead effect described above, the change from the suggestion mode to the best mode or the normal mode may be executed by the operation input of the operation button 410 by the player. By operating the operation button 410 according to the effect of instructing the operation input, the player changes to either mode based on the content of the button movable body effect, so that the player's own operation can be given a sense of accomplishment. In particular, when the mode is changed to the best mode, a sense of accomplishment can be given, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 201 to 204, a button movable body effect as a suggestion effect (effect of a variable display game) of a special lottery result will be described. The button movable body in the present embodiment is the decorative rotating body unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B.

FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing an example of the button effect setting process in the present embodiment. This process is a process executed by the peripheral control board 1510 at the start of the suggestion effect (variable display game).

The peripheral control board 1510 first determines whether or not the button look-ahead flag is set to ON (step S2001). When the button movable body effect is set in the look-ahead effect in the above-mentioned special figure look-ahead effect control process (FIG. 199) (step S1006 and step S1012), the button look-ahead flag is set to ON in the process of step S1007.

Then, when the button look-ahead flag is not set to ON (“No” in step S2001), the peripheral control board 1510 produces a button movable body accompanied by the operation of the decorative rotating body unit 530 in the variable display game to be started. Is feasible, so it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the variation display game is a pattern for producing a button movable body effect (step S2002). Here, the variation pattern that is the target of the button movable body effect is the variation pattern that performs the reach effect. In addition, all the variable display games corresponding to the look-ahead effect including the button movable body effect may be the target of the button movable body effect in the variable display game.

On the other hand, when the button look-ahead flag is set to ON (“Yes” in step S2001), the peripheral control board 1510 has a variable display in which the look-ahead effect that triggers the button look-ahead flag to be set to ON starts. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to the game (step S2011). Then, when it is not the look-ahead effect corresponding to the variable display game, that is, when the button movable body effect of the look-ahead effect continues (“No” in step S2011), the button movable body effect corresponding to the variable display game is produced. Cannot be executed, so the button effect setting process ends.

Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 is a look-ahead effect corresponding to the variation display game to be started (“Yes” in step S2011), first, the button look-ahead flag is set to off (step S2012), and the variation In the display game, it is determined whether or not the mode of the decorative rotating body unit 530 does not return to the normal mode and the look-ahead effect mode is continued (step S2013). Here, it may be judged from the look-ahead effect pattern set in the above-mentioned special figure look-ahead effect control process (FIG. 199). Specifically, if it is set in the process of step S1006, it continues, but if it is set in the process of step S1012, it does not continue.

The peripheral control board 1510 sets the continuation flag to on when the look-ahead effect mode is continued in the variable display game, that is, when the genuine button movable body effect is performed (“Yes” in step S2013). (Step S2014). Then, when the look-ahead effect mode is terminated in the variable display game, that is, when the button movable body effect of Gase is performed (“No” in step S2013), the above-mentioned modified normal mode (FIG. 200 (E)). )) Or set to the normal mode (step S2015). Then, after executing the process of step S2014 or the process of step S2015, the peripheral control board 1510 shifts to the process of step S2002 described above.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is determined in the process of step S2002 that the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display game is a pattern for producing a button movable body (“Yes”), the continuation flag is set to ON. Whether or not it is determined (step S2003). The continuation flag is set to ON in the process of step S2014 when the genuine button movable body effect is performed in the look-ahead effect corresponding to the variable display game.

Then, when the continuation flag is set to off (“No” in step S2003), the peripheral control board 1510 starts the reach effect and operates the decorative rotating body unit 530 based on the fluctuation pattern. Set (step S2004). Here, the fanning effect is a movable body effect that moves the decorative rotating body unit 530 by combining the rotation around the first axis CL1 and the rotation around the second axis CL2. Further, a button movable body effect capable of operating the decorative rotating body unit 530 by an operation input to the operation button 410 by the player is set in the latter half of the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 2005). Here, settings such as an operation validity period for accepting the operation of the operation button 410 and an instruction display for prompting the operation are made on the game board side effect display device 1600. After that, the button effect setting process is finished.

On the other hand, when the continuation flag is set to ON (“Yes” in step S2003), the peripheral control board 1510 continues the look-ahead effect mode even in the variable display game, so that the fanning effect is not executed. Based on the fluctuation pattern, only the button movable body effect by the operation input of the operation button 410 is set (step S2021). Further, the setting related to the effective operation period A among the set button movable body effects is deleted (step S2022). The button movable body effect set here comprises an operation valid period for accepting the operation of the operation button 410 by the player, which is a continuous period of the valid period A and the valid period B. Therefore, when the look-ahead effect mode is continued in the variable display game, only the button movable body effect of the valid period B can be executed. The details of the button movable effect in the variable display game will be described later with reference to FIGS. 203 and 204. After that, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the continuation flag to off (step S2023), and ends the button effect setting process.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the continuation flag to off when it is determined in the process of step S2002 that the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display game is not a pattern for producing a button movable body (“No”). Then (step S2023), the button effect setting process is completed. The case where the process of step S2002 becomes "No" and the continuation flag is switched from on to off in the process of step S2023 is a variable display game in which a genuine button movable body effect is performed by the look-ahead effect. This is a case where the button movement effect is not executed.

In the button effect setting process, in the variable display game in which the genuine button movable body effect is performed by the look-ahead effect, the button movable body effect accompanied by the operation of the player's operation button 410 may be executed without fail. In this case, the process of step S2021 is executed after the process of step S2014 described above is executed.

Further, in the above-mentioned button effect setting process, first, the process related to the button movable body effect in the look-ahead effect (processes of steps S2001 and steps S2011 to S2015) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. First, it is determined whether or not to execute the button movable body effect in the variable display game from the fluctuation pattern of the variable display game that starts to fluctuate (process content of step S2002), and then the effect in the variable display game is pre-read. The process of whether or not to take over the aspect (process contents of steps S2001 and steps S2011 to S2015) may be performed.

Next, FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing an example of the button operation effect processing in the present embodiment. This process is a process executed by the peripheral control board 1510 during the execution of the suggestion effect (variable display game).

First, the peripheral control board 1510 currently determines whether or not the operation valid period of the button movable body effect is the valid period A (step S2101). Then, in the case of the valid period A (“Yes” in step S2101), it is determined whether or not the operation input of the operation button 410 by the player is detected (step S2102).

Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 does not detect the operation input of the operation button 410 (“No” in step S2102), the peripheral control board 1510 returns to the process of step S2101 and operates at the end of the valid period A or the valid period A. “Yes” in the process of step S2101 → “No” is repeated in the process of step S2102 until the input is detected.

When the peripheral control board 1510 detects the operation input of the operation button 410 during the valid period A (“Yes” in step S2102), the result of the variable display game (special lottery result) is advantageous to the player (the result of the special lottery). For example, the expectation degree effect that suggests the expectation degree to be a “big hit”) in the aspect of the decorative rotating body unit 530 is executed (step S2103). Details of the expectation level production will be described later in FIG. 203 (B). After that, the button operation effect processing is finished.

In the valid period A, the operation input of the operation button 410 can be detected until the time preset in the process of step S2005 of the button effect setting process (FIG. 201) elapses. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the expectation degree effect is executed by one operation input, but the expectation degree effect may be executed when a plurality of operation inputs are detected, or in the valid period A. The expectation degree effect may be executed step by step according to the number of operation inputs. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game by giving diversity to the execution conditions of the expectation level production.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control board 1510 is not the valid period A of the operation valid period of the button movable body effect (“No” in step S2101), the peripheral control board 1510 is the valid period B of the operation valid period of the button movable body effect. Whether or not it is determined (step S2111). Then, in the case of the valid period B (“Yes” in step S2111), it is determined whether or not the operation input of the operation button 410 by the player is detected (step S2112).

Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 does not detect the operation input of the operation button 410 in the valid period B (“No” in step S2112), it indicates that the operation input is not detected in the valid period B. The undetected flag is set to on (step S2113), and the process returns to the process of step S2111. Then, until the end of the valid period B or the operation input is detected in the valid period B, the process of "Yes" in the process of step S2111 → "No" in the process of step S2112 → the process of step S2113 is repeated.

Here, the undetected flag is a flag necessary for executing the process of returning the decorative rotating body unit 530 to the initial mode (normal mode) after the button movable body effect is completed. When the operation input is detected in the valid period B as described later, the process of returning the decorative rotating body unit 530 to the initial mode (normal mode) is executed after the result notification effect in conjunction with the result notification effect (the process of returning the decorative rotating body unit 530 to the initial mode (normal mode)). Processing of steps S2123 and S2124 described later). However, if the operation input is not detected in the valid period B, there is no chance to restore the decorative rotating body unit 530 that has changed to the best mode by the look-ahead effect or the expectation degree effect. By setting the undetected flag to on when the operation input is not detected in the valid period B, the mode of the decorative rotating body unit 530 is confirmed at the preset return timing after the symbol of the variable display game is stopped, and the initial mode is The process of returning to (normal mode) can be executed (processes of steps S2131 to S2134 described later).

Next, when the peripheral control board 1510 detects the operation input of the operation button 410 during the valid period B (“Yes” in step S2112), the peripheral control board 1510 shifts to the processing of steps S212 to S2125.

The peripheral control board 1510 first displays the result notification effect of changing the mode of the decorative rotating body unit 530 according to the result of the variable display game (special lottery result) and the result display of the variable display game of the game board side effect display device 1600. Execute (step S2121). The details of the result notification effect will be described later in FIG. 203 (C). Further, in the result display on the game board side effect display device 1600, the symbol that is changing according to the result is stopped and displayed, and the effect corresponding to the result is displayed.

Subsequently, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the end of the valid period B (step S2122). In the above-mentioned validity period A, the operation input can be detected a plurality of times in a preset period, but in the validity period B, when the operation input is detected once, the period ends.

After that, the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not the current decorative rotating body unit 530 is in the best mode in which the second decorative surface portion 533 is directed forward (step S2123). In the case of the best mode (“Yes” in step S2123), the decorative rotating body unit 530 is inverted around the first axis CL1 to return to the normal mode (step S2124). On the other hand, if it is not the best mode (“No” in step S2123), the process of step S2124 is unnecessary. After that, the undetected flag is set to off (step S2125), and the button operation effect process ends.

Next, if it is not currently the valid period B of the operation valid period of the button movable body effect, that is, it is not the operation valid period of the button movable body effect (“No” in step S2111), the peripheral control board 1510 is It is determined whether or not the undetected flag is set to ON (step S2131). Here, when the undetected flag is set to ON (“Yes” in step S2131), it means that the operation input to the operation button 410 was not performed during the operation valid period B of the button movable body effect. Therefore, when the operation input is performed, the process of returning the decorative rotating body unit 530 to the normal mode has not been performed, so the process is performed here.

The peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not it is time to return the decorative rotating body unit 530 to the initial position (step S2132). The movable body return timing is set in advance in the processes of step S2005 and step S2021 of the button effect setting process (FIG. 201) described above. If it is not the movable body return timing (“No” in step S2132), the process returns to step S2131, and in the process of step S2131 until the movable body return timing is reached, “Yes” → in step S2132. The process of "No" is repeated.

When the movable body return timing is reached (“Yes” in step S2132), the peripheral control board 1510 is in the best mode in which the current decorative rotating body unit 530 faces the second decorative surface portion 533 forward. (Step S2133). In the case of the best mode (“Yes” in step S2133), the decorative rotating body unit 530 is inverted around the first axis CL1 to return to the normal mode (step S2134). On the other hand, if it is not the best mode (“No” in step S2133), the process of step S2134 is unnecessary. After that, the undetected flag is set to off (step S2135), and the process proceeds to the normal button operation effect processing (step S2141). The normal button operation effect processing is a process for setting an effect corresponding to the operation input for the operation input to the operation button 410 other than the button movable body effect. After that, the button operation effect processing is finished.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the undetected flag is set to off (“No” in step S2131), the operation input to the operation button 410 is performed during the operation validity period B of the button movable body effect. Since the process of returning the decorative rotating body unit 530 to the normal mode (processes of steps S2123 and S2124) is being performed, the normal button operation effect process is executed as it is (step S2141). After that, the button operation effect processing is finished.

In the button operation effect processing of the present embodiment, if the validity period A and the validity period B are set in the above-mentioned button effect setting process (FIG. 201), the passage of both periods is always counted. Not exclusively. When a predetermined number of operation inputs are detected in the valid period A, the setting of the valid period B may be deleted at that time. For a player who does not want to know the result quickly by the operation, the operation button 410 can be distracted and the remaining variable time can be concentrated on the reach production and enjoyed.

In the button operation effect processing of the present embodiment, whether the decorative rotating body unit 530 returns to the initial mode (normal mode) after the operation valid period of the button movable body effect ends by using the undetected flag in the process of step S2131. Etc. (processing of steps S2132 to S2135), but the present invention is not limited to this. Since the third base unit 520 of the third effect operation unit 400B is provided with a rotation detection sensor that detects the rotation position of the decorative rotating body unit 530, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is based on the detection by the rotation detection sensor. It may be determined whether or not it is necessary to return the aspect to the initial aspect (normal aspect). If the decorative rotating body unit 530 is not in the initial mode, when it is time to return the movable body (“Yes” in the process of step S2132), the decorative rotating body unit 530 may be inverted and returned to the initial mode (step S2134). ). When the mode can be determined based on the rotation detection sensor at one place as in the present embodiment, the process can be simplified. The undetected flag is effective when it is necessary to determine the mode based on elements such as a plurality of sensors.

Further, in the button operation effect processing of the present embodiment, the buttons are movable except during the operation valid period (valid period A and valid period B) of the button movable body effect that requires the player to operate the operation button 410 in the variable display game. It is possible to execute the normal button operation effect processing (step S2141) that accepts operations corresponding to the button effects other than the body effect. Since the player can operate the operation button 410, which is the best mode in which the genuine look-ahead effect is performed, in the effect scene unrelated to the button movable body effect, the player can enjoy the game while feeling superiority, satisfaction and expectation. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 203, an aspect (button movable body effect) of the decorative rotating body unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B as a suggestion effect (effect of the variable display game) of the special lottery result will be described. FIG. 203 is a diagram illustrating a button movable body effect produced by a player's operation input.

As shown in FIG. 203 (A), the operation valid period in which the player's operation input can be received in the button movable body effect operated by the player's operation input includes the valid period A and the valid period B. The validity period A and the validity period B are one continuous period. In the valid period A, it is possible to execute an expectation degree effect that suggests the expected degree that the result of the variable display game becomes a "hit" by the operation input to the operation button 410, and in the valid period B, the operation input to the operation button 410 can execute. It is possible to execute an effect of notifying the result of the variable display game. In the present embodiment, the validity period A and the validity period B are set to the same period.

Note that FIG. 203 (A) is information on the button movable body effect set in the processes of step S2005 and step 2021 of the button effect setting process (FIG. 201) described above, and is the information on the game board side during the operation valid period. This is an example of information displayed on the effect display device 1600. By such information display, the player can grasp that the operation input in the valid period A can know the degree of expectation, and the operation input in the valid period B can know the result. As a result, the player can obtain the information he / she wants to know by operating the operation button 410 during the valid period corresponding to one or both of the expectation level and the result according to his / her preference.

FIG. 203 (B) is a diagram showing an example of an expectation degree effect during the valid period A. The expectation degree effect is provided in two modes according to the expectation degree of the variable display game, and is executed in the process of step S2103 of the button operation effect process (FIG. 202) described above. When the degree of expectation is low, the decorative rotating body 530 is set as the first expectation degree mode, and when the degree of expectation is high, the decorative rotating body 530 is set as the second expectation degree mode. Here, the first expected degree mode is a normal mode (initial mode) in which the first decorative surface portion 532 is positioned forward so as to be well visible to the player. Further, the second expectation mode is the best mode in which the second decorative surface portion 533 is positioned forward so as to be well visible to the player.

In this embodiment, since the first expectation mode in the expectation effect is the best mode, the execution of the expectation effect of the valid period A is the process of step S2005 of the button effect setting process (FIG. 201) described above. It is limited to the case where the button movable body effect is set in, that is, the case where the genuine look-ahead effect is not executed. This is because when the button movable body effect by the genuine look-ahead effect is performed in the variable display game, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is already in the best mode, and even if the expectation degree effect is executed thereafter, the effect is obtained. This is because it cannot be obtained.

FIG. 203 (C) is a diagram showing an example of a result notification effect during the valid period B. The result notification effect is provided in two modes depending on the case where the variable display game is "missing" and the case where the variable display game is "hit" (big hit, small hit). It is executed in the process of step S2121 of. In the case of "off", the decorative rotating body unit 530 is the first result mode, and in the case of "hit", the decorative rotating body unit 530 is the second result mode. Here, the first decorative surface portion 532 and the second decorative surface portion 533 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 are rotated around the second axis CL2 orthogonal to the first axis CL1 by the effect operation unit second drive motor 534. This constitutes the result aspect. Hereinafter, an example of the result mode in which the first decorative surface portion 532 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 faces forward and is visible to the player will be described.

The first result mode executed in the case of "off" is composed of a first rotation executed during the symbol variation and a second rotation executed at the symbol stop timing. In the first rotation, the decorative rotation unit 530 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the player and temporarily stopped. After that, in the second rotation, the decorative rotation unit 530 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the player, and is returned to the position at the start of the first rotation.

Similar to the first result mode, the second result mode executed when the result is "hit" is composed of the first rotation executed during the symbol change and the second rotation started at the symbol stop timing. To. Then, in the first rotation, the decorative rotation unit 530 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the player and temporarily stopped, as in the first result embodiment. After that, in the second rotation, the decorative rotation unit 530 is further rotated clockwise by 270 degrees when viewed from the player, and is returned to the position at the start of the first rotation. Further, in the second rotation, the first decorative surface portion 532, the first button decorative portion 411a, and the frame side lens 417 are decorated with light emission.

The result mode in which the second decorative surface portion 533 of the decorative rotating body unit 530 faces forward and is visible to the player is also composed of the first rotation and the second rotation around the second axis CL2 as described above. ..

In this way, the first result mode and the second result mode have the same operation in the first rotation. Then, as will be described later, when the second rotation is started, the symbol of the variable display game is stopped and the effect display suggesting the result is started on the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the player can start the result notification effect even if the result notification effect is started. At the stage of one rotation, it is not possible to distinguish between "hit" and "miss" because it is the same rotation operation, and the player can be thrilled and thrilled because he / she does not get sick.

In the present embodiment, both the expectation degree effect and the result notification effect are produced by the decorative rotating body unit 530 in the operation button 410, but the effect is not limited to this. For example, the expectation degree effect (one effective period) is produced by the game board side effect display device 1600 (panel side effect device), and the result notification effect (the other effective period) is the rotating body unit 530 (frame side effect device). ) May be used as a production. In addition, since the effect on the frame side is more conspicuous between the panel side and the frame side, the effect on the frame side is used when the information is advantageous to the player, and the effect on the panel side is used when the information is not advantageous to the player. It may be produced by a device. By expanding the variety of production devices, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and surprise, and to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the operation input of the expectation degree effect and the result notification effect may be distinguished by the number of operation inputs within the operation effective time of the button movable effect, instead of distinguishing by the period of the valid period A and the valid period B. For example, the first operation input may be an expectation effect, and the second operation input may be a result notification effect. By expanding the variety of production opportunities, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and surprise, and to enhance the interest of the game. In addition, as the number of operation inputs increases, definitive information can be obtained, so that the player's motivation for operation can be increased and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

FIG. 204 is a diagram illustrating a changing button movable body effect and a mode change of the button movable body (decorative rotating body unit 530). In the present embodiment, in the process of step S2002 of the button effect setting process (FIG. 201) described above, the button movable body effect is not set for the look-ahead effect of the later hold, and the variation of the variable display game that starts to fluctuate. When the pattern includes the button movable body effect (“Yes” in the process of step S2002), the button movable body effect is executed. Here, the button effect using the rotation of the decorative rotating body unit 530 during the change of the present embodiment includes a fanning effect in which the decorative rotating body unit 530 is rotated in a mode other than the best mode at the start of the reach effect, and a reach effect. Expectation effect that can be executed when the operation input of the operation button 410 by the player is detected in the validity period A in the operation validity period provided at the final stage, and indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the variable display game will be a "big hit". Similarly, it is possible to execute when the operation input of the operation button 410 by the player is detected in the valid period B in the valid period of the operation, and the result notification of the result of the variable display game (“missing” or “hit”) is notified. Directing and is provided. Then, these fanning effects, expectation degree effects, and result notification effects are based on the presence / absence of a genuine button movable body effect in the look-ahead effect of the variable display game that starts to fluctuate, and the presence / absence of an operation input to the player's operation button 410 during the operation valid period. Set to be feasible accordingly. Hereinafter, changes in the mode (button mode) of the decorative rotating body unit 530 in the button effect according to the progress of the game will be described.

In FIG. 204 (A), the genuine button movable body effect (genuine look-ahead effect) is not executed in the look-ahead effect of the variable display game that starts to change, and the player can input the operation to the operation button 410 during the operation valid period. It is a figure which shows the button mode in the variation display game when it is not detected.

Specifically, when the button look-ahead flag is off in the process of step S2001 of the above-mentioned button effect setting process (FIG. 201), that is, there is no look-ahead effect of the button movable body effect (in the process of step S2001). "No"), or when the button movable body look-ahead effect (flag look-ahead effect) of the Gase is executed in the variable display game ("Yes" in the process of step S2001 → "Yes" in the process of step S2001. → “No” in the process of step S2012 → the process of step S2013 → the process of step S2015) is shown. In this case, the fanning effect is set as the button effect during the variable display game, and the expectation degree effect and the result notification effect are set to be executable by the operation input to the operation button 410 of the player (in the process of step S2002, ". Yes ”→“ No ”in the process of step S2003 → process of step S2004 → process of step S2005).

At this time, the button mode before entering the reach effect in the variable display game is the normal mode (FIG. 200 (E)). Then, in the fanning effect executed at the same time as the start of the reach effect, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is changed to a fanning mode such as rotating operation, and returns to the normal mode when the fanning effect is completed. After that, if the operation button 410 is operated at the final stage of the reach effect, the player does not operate during the operation valid period during which the expectation effect and the result notification effect related to the result of the variable display game can be executed. The variable display game ends while maintaining the normal mode without executing the result notification effect.

Specifically, in the button operation effect processing (FIG. 202) described above, "No" in the process of step S2101 → "No" in the process of step S2111 until the valid period A in which the expected degree can be produced is reached. In the process of step 2131, the process of "No" → S2141 is repeated. Then, when the valid period A is reached, since there is no operation by the player, “Yes” in the process of step S2101 → “No” in the process of step S2102 is repeated until the end of the period. Then, when the valid period A ends and the valid period B is reached, there is no operation by the player in the same manner, so that the process of "Yes" in the process of step S2111 → "No" in the process of step S2112 → S2113 is repeated. Is done. Then, when the valid period B ends, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is in a normal mode, and in the process immediately after the valid period B ends, the movable body return timing (initializing the decorative rotating body 530) set in advance when the button movable body effect is set. "No" in the process of step S2101 → "No" in the process of step S2111 → "Yes" in the process of step S2131 → "No" in the process of step S2132 is repeated until the timing to return to the mode is reached. However, once the movable body return timing is reached, "Yes" in the process of step S2131 → "Yes" in the process of step S2132 → "No" in the process of step S2133 → process of step S2135 → process of step S2141. After that, in the process of step S2131, the process of "No" → step S2141 is executed.

In FIGS. 204 (B) and 204 (C), the genuine button movable body effect (genuine look-ahead effect) is not executed in the look-ahead effect of the variable display game that starts to change, and the player determines the valid period A of the operation valid period. It is a figure which shows the button mode in the variation display game in the case where the operation input to the operation button 410 is detected, but the operation input is not detected in the validity period B. Then, FIG. 204 (B) shows a normal mode as a first expectation mode having a low expectation in the validity period A, and FIG. 204 (C) shows a second expectation mode having a high expectation in the validity period A. The case where it becomes the best mode is shown.

Here, the processing in the button effect setting process (FIG. 201) described above is the same as that in FIG. 204 (A), and the fanning effect is executed in the reach effect of the variable display game, and the expectation level effect and the result notification effect can be produced. Operation validity period is provided. It differs from FIG. 204 (A) in that there is an operation input by the player during the valid period A of the operation valid period. Therefore, in the following, the validity period A and after will be described.

The decorative rotating body unit 530 reaches an operation valid period in which the button movable body effect is executed in response to the operation input to the operation button 410 by the player at the end of the reach effect while maintaining the normal mode. Here, the player operates the operation button 410 during the valid period A, and the expectation degree production is performed according to the expectation degree (high or low) that the variable display game becomes a “big hit”.

Then, in FIG. 204 (B), the normal mode of the first expectation mode with a low expectation is obtained, and since the player does not operate during the valid period B, the variable display game ends while maintaining the normal mode. On the other hand, in FIG. 204 (C), the change is changed to the best mode of the second expectation mode having a high expectation, and since the player does not operate in the valid period B, the variation is displayed at the end of the valid period B while maintaining the best mode. After the game symbol stop (result display) timing is reached and the game is returned to the initial mode (normal mode), the variable display game ends.

Specifically, in the button operation effect process (FIG. 202) described above, since there is an operation by the player during the valid period A, “Yes” in the process of step S2101 → “Yes” in the process of step S2102 → step. The process of S2103 is executed, and the expectation degree effect is executed.

Here, in the first expectation mode with low expectation shown in FIG. 204 (B), the decorative rotating body unit 530 maintains the normal mode. Then, since the valid period A ends and there is no operation by the player in the valid period B, the process of "Yes" in the process of step S2111 → the process of "No" → S2113 in the process of step S2112 is repeated. When the valid period B ends, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is in the normal mode, and in the process immediately after the valid period B ends, the movable body return timing (decorative rotating body 530 is set to the initial mode) set in advance when the button movable body effect is set. Until the timing of returning) is reached, "No" in the process of step S2101 → "No" in the process of step S2111 → "Yes" in the process of step S2131 → "No" in the process of step S2132 is repeated. , Once the movable body return timing is reached, "Yes" in the process of step S2131 → "Yes" in the process of step S2132 → "No" in the process of step S2133 → the process of step S2135 → the process of step S2141 is executed. If so, after that, in the process of step S2131, the process of "No" → step S2141 is executed.

On the other hand, in the second expectation mode with high expectation shown in FIG. 204 (C), the decorative rotating body unit 530 changes to the best mode. Then, since the valid period A ends and there is no operation by the player in the valid period B, the process of "Yes" in the process of step S2111 → "No" in the process of step S2112 → S2113 is repeated. It is the same as FIGS. 204 (A) and 204 (B) described above. However, when the validity period B ends, the decorative rotating body unit 530 is in the best mode. Therefore, in the process immediately after the end of the valid period B, "No" is set in the process of step S2101 until the movable body return timing (timing for returning the decorative rotating body 530 to the initial mode) set in advance when the button movable body effect is set. → "No" in the process of step S2111 → "Yes" in the process of step S2131 → "No" is repeated in the process of step S2132, and when the movable body return timing comes (“Yes” in the process of step S2132) ), In the process of step S2133, “Yes” → the process of S2134 → the process of step S2135 → the process of step S2141 is executed, and the decorative rotating body unit 530 is inverted from the best mode and returned to the normal mode. After that, in the process of step S2131, the process of "No" → step S2141 is executed.

Subsequently, in FIG. 204 (D), the genuine button movable body effect (genuine look-ahead effect) is not executed in the look-ahead effect of the variable display game that starts to change, and the operation valid period is valid period A and valid period B. It is a figure which shows the button mode in the variation display game when the operation input to the operation button 410 by a player is detected. Here, the case where the second expectation degree mode (best mode) with a high expectation degree is obtained in the validity period A is shown.

Here, the processing in the button effect setting process (FIG. 201) described above is the same as that in FIGS. 204 (A) to 204 (C) described above, and the fanning effect is executed in the reach effect of the variable display game, and the expectation level effect and the expected degree effect and An operation valid period during which the result notification can be produced is provided. It differs from FIG. 204 (C) in that there is an operation input by the player during the valid period B of the operation valid period. Therefore, the validity period B and thereafter will be described below.

The decorative rotating body unit 530 changes from the normal mode to the best mode by the operation input to the operation button 410 during the valid period A. Then, the best mode is maintained and the validity period B is reached. In the valid period B, there is an operation input to the operation button 410, and the result notification effect of the first result mode or the second result mode (FIG. 203 (C)) is further executed for the decorative rotating body unit 530 in the best mode. .. Then, the symbol of the variable display game is stopped at the timing when the second rotation is started in the result notification effect composed of the first rotation and the second rotation. In addition, the effect is displayed in the effect displayed on the screen. The valid period B ends with the end of the result notification effect, that is, the end of the second rotation when there is an operation input, and the decorative rotating body unit 530 changes from the best mode of the expectation effect to the initial mode (normal mode). After being returned, the variable display game ends.

Specifically, in the button operation effect process (FIG. 202) described above, since there is an operation by the player during the valid period A, “Yes” in the process of step S2101 → “Yes” in the process of step S2102 → step. The process of S2103 is executed, and the expectation degree effect is executed. Here, the second expectation mode has a high expectation, and the decorative rotating body unit 530 changes to the best mode. Then, until the valid period A ends and the valid period B is reached and the operation input by the player is detected, the process of "Yes" in the process of step S2111 → "No" in the process of step S2112 → the process of S2113 is repeated. However, when the operation input by the player is detected, "Yes" in the process of step S2111 → "Yes" in the process of step S2112 → the process of step S2121 → the process of step S2122 → "Yes" in the process of step S2123. → Process of step S2124 → Process of step S2125 is executed. Since the valid period B ends by the operation input by the player, after that, "No" in the process of step S2101 → "No" in the process of step S2111 → "No" in the process of step S2131 → The process of step S2141 is executed.

Subsequently, in FIG. 204 (E), a genuine button movable body effect (genuine look-ahead effect) is executed in the look-ahead effect of the variable display game that starts to change, and the operation button by the player during the valid period B of the operation valid period. It is a figure which shows the button mode in the variation display game when the operation input to 410 is detected.

Specifically, when the button look-ahead flag is turned on in the process of step S2001 of the button effect setting process (FIG. 201) described above, and the fluctuation display game that starts to fluctuate is the target of the genuine look-ahead effect (step S2001). “Yes” in the process → “Yes” in the process of step S2001 → “Yes” in the process of step S2012 → “Yes” in the process of step S2013 → process of step S2014) is shown. In this case, as a button effect during the variable display game, the result notification effect is set to be executable by the operation input to the operation button 410 of the player (“Yes” in the process of step S2002 → “Yes” in the process of step S2003. Yes ”→ processing in step S2021 → processing in step S2022 → processing in step S2023).

At this time, the button mode before entering the reach effect in the variable display game is the best mode (FIG. 200 (D)). If the look-ahead effect is in the best mode, the fanning effect and the expectation effect cannot be performed. The decorative rotating body unit 530 maintains the best mode and reaches the validity period B. In the valid period B, there is an operation input to the operation button 410, and the result notification effect of the first result mode or the second result mode (FIG. 203 (C)) is further executed for the decorative rotating body unit 530 in the best mode. .. After that, it is the same as FIG. 204 (D) described above.

Specifically, the process in the button operation effect process (FIG. 202) is different from the process in FIG. 204 (D) in that the process related to the validity period A (processes in steps S2101 to S2103) is not executed. Until the validity period B is reached, the process of "No" in the process of step S2101 → "No" in the process of step S2111 → "No" in the process of step S2131 → the process of step S2141 is executed. The processing after the validity period B is the same as that in FIG. 204 (D) described above.

In this way, in the button movable body effect that can be executed by the operation input to the operation button 410 by the player, it is effective to execute the expectation degree effect that suggests the big hit expectation that the variable display game becomes a "big hit" by the operation input. One operation valid period is provided, which is composed of a period A and a valid period B in which a result notification effect for notifying the result of the variable display game by the operation input can be executed (FIG. 203 (A)). One operation valid period is functionally distinguished into an effect showing the degree of expectation and an effect showing the winning result, and the player can select the function according to the elapse of the effective period. Therefore, the operation input effect, which tends to be monotonous with one effect function corresponding to the operation input during one operation valid period, can be made multifunctional and the player's taste can be reflected. It is possible to increase the player's willingness to operate. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game.

Further, since the valid period A and the valid period B are set to the same length period (FIG. 203 (A)), it is possible to evenly provide the player with a selection. Therefore, since the player can make a selection without being overweight in the production, he / she can enjoy the production according to his / her taste. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, in the result notification effect that can be executed by the operation input to the operation button 410 in the valid period B, the first result mode indicating "missing" and the second result mode indicating "hit" (different from the first result mode). Aspects) and (FIG. 203 (C)). The first-result aspect and the second-result aspect are aspects different from the usual aspects. In this way, even in the case of "off", there is a mode change that is the first result mode in which "off" can be identified. Therefore, in the case of "off", no mode change occurs and it is difficult to grasp the result. The player can easily grasp the winning result. Further, since the player can surely obtain the game information (win / fail result) from the effect mode of the operation button 410 regardless of whether it is "missing" or "hit", the game can be played by operating the operation button 410. You will acquire the feeling of being able to obtain information and will participate in the operation production more actively. In this way, the interest in the production of the operation button 410 itself can be raised and attracted attention. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game.

Further, the first result mode indicating "missing" and the second result mode indicating "hit" are composed of a first rotation and a second rotation, respectively (FIG. 203 (C)). Then, the first rotation of the first result aspect and the first rotation of the second result aspect have the same operation, and the operation of temporarily stopping the movable body (decorative rotating body unit 530) in a state of rotating 90 degrees is performed. .. After that, in the case of the first result mode, it rotates 90 degrees in the opposite direction in the second rotation and returns to the original state, whereas in the case of the second result mode, it further rotates 270 degrees in the second rotation and returns to the original state. Return to. In this way, by making the first mode (first rotation) the same in the first result mode and the second result mode, even if it is "missing" immediately after the result notification effect, it looks like a "hit". Therefore, the player cannot immediately judge the winning even if the operation button 410 is operated. Therefore, the conventional operation input effect, which tends to be a dull and plain effect when the hit is found immediately after the operation, can give the player a sense of expectation immediately after the operation, and is an interesting and entertaining effect. Can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Then, when the result notification effect of the first result mode or the second result mode is executed by the movable body (decorative rotating body unit 530), the final display of the winning result on the game board side effect display device 1600 (symbol stop and symbol stop) The result display effect) is executed not at the time of the first rotation but at the timing of the start of the second rotation (FIGS. 203 (C) and 204 (D)). Thereby, the effect of making the first mode (first rotation) the same in the above-mentioned first result mode and the second result mode can be obtained more reliably.

Further, when the operation input to the operation button 410 by the player is not detected during the operation valid period, the movable body (decorative rotating body unit 530) is subjected to neither the expectation degree effect nor the result notification effect. The aspect maintains the aspect immediately before the operation validity period. In this way, by not intentionally changing the mode of the movable body during the operation valid period in which the player's operation input is required, it is possible to impress the player that the effect period reflects his / her own intention. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

When the operation input to the operation button 410 by the player is not detected, the movable body is not changed during the operation valid period, but after the operation valid period ends, the movable body is limited to "hit" as the second result. The mode may be set, or conversely, the movable body may be set as the first result mode only for "off". Further, the rotation operation of the movable body in the expectation degree effect and the result notification effect may be operated stepwise according to the number of operation inputs (continuous hitting pattern) during the corresponding valid period. Further, in the second mode of "hit" in the result notification effect, the same operation is performed up to the first rotation (90 degrees to the right) and the second rotation (90 degrees to the left) of the first mode of "disengagement" to "disappear". A revival mode may be provided in which a 360-degree rotation is performed after pretending to be a pattern. By maintaining the effects of the present invention and diversifying the production, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

Further, when the movable body is in the best mode (a mode different from the normal mode) at the start of the valid period B and the operation input to the operation button 410 by the player is not detected in the valid period B, the movable body is concerned. The final display (symbol stop and result display effect) of the winning result on the game board side effect display device 1600 is executed before the timing of returning from the best mode to the normal mode. As a result, the player does not grasp the result by the operation of the movable body before the display of the result of the variable display game on the display device. Therefore, when the player wants to enjoy the default variable display game to the end and does not input the operation during the valid period B, the result is known in advance from the movement of the movable body before the result display of the variable display game. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game that was invited by doing so.

Further, when the movable body is in the best mode (a mode different from the normal mode) at the start of the valid period B and the operation input to the operation button 410 by the player is detected in the valid period B, the result notification effect is being produced. At the timing when the second rotation of the first result mode or the second result mode is started, the final display of the winning result (design stop and result display effect) on the game board side effect display device 1600 is executed, and is effective when the result notification effect ends. After the period B was completed, the movable body was returned from the best mode to the normal mode. At this time, since the valid period B is set to end at the end of the result notification effect even if the preset period has not elapsed, it is possible to prevent unnecessary operation input in the valid period B. In addition, since the player is aware of the result of the variable display game, the player is given the impression that he / she is preparing for the next game by ending the validity period B and initializing the mode of the operation button 410. Since the game progresses smoothly, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game. Further, since the movable body is returned from the best mode to the normal mode in connection with the end of the result notification effect, it can be set at once as a series of operations (steps S2121 to step S212 of the button operation effect process (FIG. 202) described above). Processing of S2124). Therefore, the processing control burden can be suppressed.

The pre-reading effect and the changing effect of FIGS. 199 to 204 described above are based on the decorative rotating body unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B, but are not limited to this. The door frame side effect display device 460 of the above-mentioned effect operation unit 400 (see FIGS. 48 to 63) may be used, or the door frame side first of the above-mentioned second effect operation unit 400A (see FIGS. 64 to 77). (Ii) The effect display device 460A may be used. If the effect image is presented in the operation button 410 so as to change the decoration mode in the operation button 410 according to the game state, the same effect as the decorative rotating body unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B can be obtained. Furthermore, since the degree of freedom of the production is higher in the case of the production image than in the decorative structural member, for example, it is possible to display the final mode in the same manner as the best mode when performing the pre-reading effect of the ghost, which makes the game more interesting. Can be enhanced.

Further, the pre-reading effect and the variable effect effect of FIGS. 199 to 204 described above are not limited to the decorative rotating body unit 530 of the third effect operation unit 400B, and may be an effect device provided on the door frame 3 side. For example, in the present embodiment, the effect device provided on the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, the door frame left side unit 540, the door frame right side unit 550, the door frame top unit 570, and the like may be used. Since the effect device provided on the frame side is closer to the player side than the accessory attached to the game panel 1100 side and can provide a three-dimensional aspect, the decorative rotating body of the third effect operation unit 400B. It is possible to obtain the same effect as the unit 530.

In addition, the production by the production device on the frame side attracts the attention of the surrounding players, and while the player can feel superiority, the production of a disappointing result for the player such as "off" is immediately achieved. The production will be sober and the player will feel embarrassed. Therefore, it may be possible to set which of the frame side and the panel side the effect device provides the effect according to the game result and the player's preference. It is possible to provide a game that takes into consideration the taste and emotion of the player, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 100 Door frame base unit (door frame body)
110 Door frame base 111 Throughout (window)
320 Dish unit 400B Third production operation unit 410 Operation buttons (operation receiving part, operating means)
411 Button lens 415 Frame unit 420 Decorative board unit 520 Third base unit 521 Unit base 521g Left shaft part 521h Right bearing part 528 Production operation unit First drive motor (first rotation means)
529 First transmission gear 530 Decorative rotating body unit 531 Rotating body base unit (rotating body)
531a Rotating body gear 531b Rotating body side left bearing part 531c Rotating body side right shaft part 531f Peripheral surface decoration part (connecting decoration part)
532 First decorative surface (decorative surface)
532d Shaft member 533 Second decorative surface (decorative surface)
533a Rotating decoration part 533b Fixed decoration part 534 Production operation unit Second drive motor (second rotating means)
534a Second drive gear 534b Decorative surface gear 535 First decorative surface decorative substrate (decorative surface light emitting means)
536 Second decorative surface decorative substrate (decorative surface light emitting means)
1310 Main control board (special lottery means)
1510 Peripheral control board (effect execution means, mode change means, validity period setting means)

Claims (1)

A special lottery means that can execute a special lottery based on the acceptance of a game ball into the starting port provided in the game area, and
An effect execution means capable of executing a special effect corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery, and
Equipped with an operation means that can accept operation input by the player,
The operating means has a movable body portion that can be operated, and by operating the movable body portion, it is possible to change the mode of accepting operation input in a plurality of modes.
The effect executing means is
Based on the lottery result of the special lottery, the special effect can be executed by accepting the operation input within the valid period for accepting the operation input for the operation means.
It is possible to change the mode of accepting the operation input to the operation means at the time of executing the special effect from the normal mode to a special mode different from the normal mode.
The operating means is based on the lottery result of the special lottery.
A first mode in which the operating means is changed from the normal mode to a suggestive mode that is different from the normal mode and the special mode and suggests that the operating means may change to the special mode, and then changed to the special mode. Patterns and
With the second pattern of changing from the normal aspect to the suggested mode and then changing to the normal mode.
Is feasible and
After changing the operating means to the special mode according to the first pattern, the special mode is continued until the end of the valid period.
further,
The effect executing means is
Based on the lottery result of the special lottery, while the mode of accepting the operation input to the operation means is the special mode in the first pattern, an effective period for accepting the operation input to the operation means occurs. A gaming machine characterized in that when an operation input by a player is received within a valid period, the movable body portion can be changed to a mode different from the special mode.

Images